Owner’s Manual

2022 INSIGHT
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 1 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Event Data Recorders

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the

circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required,

and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that
have the special equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 2 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by You may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software
anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the by sending a signed, written notice to HONDA at American Honda
vehicle owner. Motor Co., Inc., Honda Automobile Customer Service, Mail Stop
CHI-5, 1919 Torrance Blvd., Torrance, CA 90501-2746.
Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record Privacy Notice
information about powertrain performance. The data can be used This vehicle may share location and usage information. To manage
to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians this setting, visit www.hondalink.com/vehicle-data-choices.
diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with
data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains To learn more about how we collect and use Personal
confidential. Some diagnostic and maintenance information is Information, please read our Privacy Policy, accessible
uploaded to Honda upon vehicle start up.
at www.honda.com.
California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act
The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this
vehicle may contain perchlorate materials - special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/

As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded
by a NOTICE symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid
damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.

Software End User License Agreement

Your vehicle comes equipped with software, which is governed by
the End User License Agreement in Owner’s Manual, and which
contains a binding arbitration clause. Please refer to the End User
License Agreement for the terms and conditions governing your
use of the installed software, as well as the applications, services,
functions, and content provided through the software. Your use of
the installed software will serve as your consent to the terms and
conditions of the End User License Agreement.
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 3 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

A Few Words About Safety You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And ● Safety Labels - on the vehicle.
operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility. ● Safety Messages - preceded by a safety alert symbol 3 and
one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and other information on labels and These signal words mean:
in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
could hurt you or others. 3DANGER
you don't follow instructions.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
3WARNING
hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You you don't follow instructions.
must use your own good judgment.
You CAN be HURT if you don't follow
3CAUTION
instructions.

● Safety Headings - such as Important Safety Precautions.

● Safety Section - such as Safe Driving.
● Instructions - how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information - please

read it carefully.
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 4 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Contents

This owner’s manual should be considered a permanent part of the 2 Safe Driving P. 39
vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold. For Safe Driving P. 40 Seat Belts P. 44 Airbags P. 51

2 Instrument Panel P. 81
The Navigation Manual is available online at owners.honda.com
Indicators P. 82 Gauges and Driver Information Interface P. 129
(U.S.). If you are the first registered owner of your vehicle,
you may request a complimentary printed copy of the 2 Controls P. 155
Navigation Manual within the first six months of vehicle Clock P. 156 Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 157
Moonroof * P. 180
purchase. To request a copy, visit owners.honda.com. Adjusting the Seats P. 199

This owner’s manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find 2 Features P. 223
Audio System P. 224 Audio Error Messages P. 302
descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver * P. 346 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 349
particular model.
2 Driving P. 375
Images throughout this owner’s manual (including the front cover) Before Driving P. 376 Towing a Trailer P. 381
Parking Your Vehicle P. 478 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 483
represent features and equipment that are available on some, but
not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these 2 Maintenance P. 489
features. Before Performing Maintenance P. 490 Maintenance MinderTM P. 493
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 516
Climate Control System Maintenance P. 531
This owner’s manual is for vehicles sold in the United States.
2 Handling the Unexpected P. 539
The information and specifications included in this publication were Tools P. 540 If a Tire Goes Flat P. 541
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 569 Fuses P. 577
in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
If You Cannot Open the Trunk P. 585
reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications
or design at any time without notice and without incurring any 2 Information P. 587
obligation. Specifications P. 588 Identification Numbers P. 590
Emissions Testing P. 593 Warranty Coverages P. 594
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 5 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Contents
Quick Reference Guide P. 6
Child Safety P. 66 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 79 Safety Labels P. 80

Safe Driving P. 39

Instrument Panel P. 81
Opening and Closing the Trunk P. 171 Security System P. 174 Opening and Closing the Windows P. 177
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 181 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 197
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items P. 207 Climate Control System P. 216
Controls P. 155
General Information on the Audio System P. 304 Customized Features P. 326
Refuel Recommend P. 374 Features P. 223

When Driving P. 382 Honda Sensing® P. 415 Braking P. 468

Driving P. 375
Refueling P. 485 Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions P. 488

Maintenance Under the Hood P. 499 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 512 Maintenance P. 489
Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 519 12-Volt Battery P. 528 Remote Transmitter Care P. 530
Cleaning P. 532 Accessories and Modifications P. 537
Handling the Unexpected P. 539
Power System Won’t Start P. 561 If the 12-Volt Battery Is Dead P. 564 Overheating P. 567
Emergency Towing P. 583 If You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door P. 584
Information P. 587

Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 591 Reporting Safety Defects P. 592 Index P. 599
Authorized Manuals P. 597 Customer Service Information P. 598
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 6 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Quick Reference Guide

Visual Index
❚ TRIP Button (P 134)
Quick Reference Guide

❚ Brightness Control (P 195)

❚ System Indicators (P 82)
❚ Gauges (P 129)
❚ Driver Information Interface (P 132)
❚ Hazard Warning Button
❚ Audio System (P 224)
❚ Navigation System *
() See the Navigation System Manual
❚ Climate Control System (P 216)
❚ Front Seat Heater Buttons * (P 215)

❚ Rear Defogger (P 194)

❚ Heated Door Mirror Button (P 194)
❚ Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
(P 63)
❚ POWER Button (P 181)
❚ (Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) System OFF) Button (P 404)
❚ Safety Support Switch (P 413, 422, 456)
❚ Fuel Fill Door Release Button (P 486)

6
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 7 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

❚ Headlights/Turn Signals (P 184)

Quick Reference Guide

❚ Fog Lights * (P 188)
❚ Deceleration Paddle Selector (−) (P 398)
❚ Left Selector Wheel (P 133)
❚ (home) Button (P 133)
❚ Horn (Press an area around .)
❚ MAIN Button (P 429)
❚ Deceleration Paddle Selector (+) (P 398)

❚ Wipers/Washers (P 192)
❚ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low
Speed Follow Buttons (P 438)

❚ Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Button

(P 448)

❚ Interval Button (P 439)

❚ Steering Wheel Adjustments (P 196)

❚ Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® System Voice Control Buttons (P349)
❚ Voice Control Buttons (P 255)
❚ Audio Remote Controls (P 227)
* Not available on all models 7
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 8 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Visual Index
❚ Power Window Switches (P 177)
Quick Reference Guide

❚ Master Door Lock Switch (P 169)

❚ Door Mirror Controls (P 198)
❚ Driver’s Front Airbag (P 54)
❚ Rearview Mirror (P 197)
❚ HomeLink® Buttons * (P 347)
❚ Shift Button
Electronic Gear Selector (P 391)
❚ Passenger’s Front Airbag (P 54)

❚ Glove Box (P 209)

❚ Accessory Power Socket (P 213)
❚ USB Port(s) (P 225)
❚ EV Button (P 14)
❚ SPORT Button (P 397)
❚ ECON Button (P 401)
❚ Automatic Brake Hold Button (P 473)
❚ Electric Parking Brake Switch (P 468)

❚ Interior Fuse Box (P 581)

❚ Hood Release Handle (P 500)
❚ Trunk Opener (P 171)
8
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 9 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

❚ Side Curtain Airbags (P 61)

❚ Interior Light (P 207)

Quick Reference Guide

❚ Grab Handle
❚ Coat Hook (P 214)
❚ Coat Hooks (P 214)
❚ Seat Belts (P 44)
❚ Map Lights (P 208)
❚ Moonroof Switch *
(P 180)

❚ Sun Visors
❚ Vanity Mirrors

❚ Front Seat (P 199)

❚ Side Airbags (P 59)
❚ Seat Belt (Installing a Child Seat) (P 73)
❚ Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat (P 75)
❚ Rear Seats (P 202)
❚ LATCH to Secure a Child Seat (P 71)
* Not available on all models 9
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 10 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Visual Index
❚ Maintenance Under the Hood (P 499)
Quick Reference Guide

❚ Windshield Wipers (P 192, 516)

❚ Power Door Mirrors (P 198)
❚ Side Turn Signal Lights * (P 185, 512)
❚ Door Lock/Unlock Control (P 160)
❚ Headlights (P 185, 512)
❚ Front Turn Signal Lights (P 184, 512)
❚ Front Side Marker Lights (P 185, 512)
❚ Parking/Daytime Running Lights (P 184, 188, 512)
❚ Fog Lights * (P 188, 512)
❚ Tires (P 519, 541, 547)
❚ High-Mount Brake Light (P 515)
❚ Opening/Closing the Trunk (P 171)
❚ Emergency Trunk Opener (P 173)
❚ Trunk Release Button (P 172)
❚ Rear License Plate Light (P 515)

❚ Multi-View Rear Camera (P 483)

❚ Back-Up Lights (P 514)
❚ Taillights (P 514)
❚ Brake Lights (P 513)
❚ Rear Turn Signal Lights (P 513)
❚ Rear Side Marker Lights/Taillights (P 513)
❚ How to Refuel (P 486)
10
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 11 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

SPORT HYBRID i-MMD (intelligent Multi-Mode

Drive)

Quick Reference Guide

Your SPORT HYBRID i-MMD vehicle uses both an electric motor and a gasoline engine as propulsion sources, with the electric motor
receiving electricity from an internal High Voltage battery or internal generator. The High Voltage battery is charged from the generator
driven by the engine or regenerative braking.

When driving, your vehicle is propelled exclusively by the electric motor, exclusively by the gasoline engine, or by a combination of the two.
The system selects which propulsion source is most appropriate and automatically switches to it. Under certain circumstances, pressing the
EV button can manually enable EV (driven only on electricity) mode.

● Energy efficiency
As with a gasoline-powered vehicle, hybrid vehicle fuel efficiency and driving range is most impacted by your driving style. Aggressive
acceleration and high-speed driving can easily trigger the system to switch the propulsion source to the gasoline-powered engine.
In addition, heavy climate control system use negatively affects vehicle range and efficiency. Either of these use patterns will more quickly
reduce the High Voltage battery's state of charge.

● Battery types
There are two types of batteries used in this vehicle; a standard 12-volt battery that powers the airbags, the interior and exterior lights, and
other standard 12-volt systems; and a high voltage battery that is used to power the propulsion motor and recharge the 12-volt battery.

* Not available on all models 11

 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 12 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

SPORT HYBRID i-MMD SYSTEM MAIN COMPONENTS

Gasoline Engine– Runs the generator and under certain
conditions, drives the wheels directly.
Quick Reference Guide

Generator– Starts the engine and generates electric power

when driven by the gasoline engine to supply electricity to
power the electric motor and/or to charge the High Voltage
battery.

Electric Motor– Provides propulsion to drive the wheels in

conjunction with the gasoline engine in certain conditions, and
provides electricity to the High Voltage battery through
regenerative braking.

High Voltage Battery– Provides electrical storage and serves High Voltage Battery
as a power source for the electric motor.
Learning about the High Voltage battery’s characteristics will
Generator & Electric Motor
help you get the best handling and maximize the range of your
electric vehicle. (P414) Gasoline Engine

High Voltage Battery Charge Level Indicator– Displays

battery state of charge.
When the indicator:
• Displays two or less segments, EV mode is no longer available.
• Displays ten segments, battery charge level is full.

12
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 13 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Vehicle
Speed

Quick Reference Guide

Time

Operating
Electric Vehicle (EV) Hybrid (HV) Engine (Direct Drive) Regeneration
mode
Stopped or driven at low speeds: Driven in high-load conditions Driven in high-speed, low-load The accelerator pedal is released
● Only the electric motor (e.g., when accelerating, going conditions: and the vehicle is decelerating.
provides propulsion to the uphill): ● The gasoline engine provides ● The electric motor provides

wheels. ● The Electric Motor provides propulsion to the wheels. electricity to the High Voltage
propulsion to the wheels. ● The High Voltage battery battery through regenerative
Driving ● The gasoline engine drives the supplies electricity to the braking.
Speed generator, supplying electric motor for added
electricity to the electric propulsion.
motor for added propulsion ● The electric motor provides

or to the High Voltage battery electricity to the High Voltage

for charging. battery through regenerative
braking.

Power Flow
Monitor

Electric motor Stopped/Running Running Generating/Running Regenerating

Generator Stopped Generating No Output Stopped/No Output

Engine Stopped Running Running Stopped/No Output

High Voltage
Discharge Charging/Discharge Charging/Discharge Charging
battery

13
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 14 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

EV Button
EV mode is enabled by pressing the EV button near the shift
button.
Quick Reference Guide

The EV mode indicator comes on in the instrument panel when EV

mode is enabled.

Press the EV button again to switch back to HV mode. Press

Some conditions, such as a low High Voltage battery level and a

high vehicle speed, may keep the system from manually switching
into EV mode. The beeper sounds and a message appears on the
driver information interface with the button pressed when EV
mode is disabled.

Shifts in vehicle, driving or road conditions may automatically

cancel EV mode and switch back to HV mode.

A message will appear on the driver information interface and EV mode may be canceled automatically when:
● The High Voltage battery charge level is low.
● Your vehicle speed is too high.
● Your vehicle speed is above 25 mph (40 km/h) while the engine is in warming-up operation.
● You fully depress the accelerator pedal.
● You are driving on hilly road.
2 Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages (P104)

14
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 15 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

● Regenerative Energy and Regenerative Braking

When regenerative braking is in When the vehicle is decelerating or descending a hill, the electric motor acts as a generator that
operation recovers a portion of the energy that was used to accelerate the vehicle.
The regenerative force that the electric motor applies to the wheels when it is in regenerative

Quick Reference Guide

Motor mode helps to slow the vehicle down in a manner similar to engine braking which is used on
conventional vehicles. If you want to slow the vehicle down at a faster rate without using the
brakes, you can use the deceleration paddle selector to increase the resistive force.

High
Voltage
Battery

15
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 16 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

● Auto Engine Stop/Start

Your vehicle's gasoline engine automatically stops running during vehicle operation or restarts while the vehicle is stationary when it is
appropriate.
In the following cases, however, auto engine stop may not activate.
Quick Reference Guide

• The vehicle momentarily needs additional power for aggressive acceleration, or driving uphill or at high speed.
• The climate control system is in heavy use.
• The High Voltage battery temperature is high or low.
• The High Voltage battery is too low on charge.

● Sounds Unique to the SPORT HYBRID i-MMD System

When you first start driving this vehicle, you will likely hear some unfamiliar sounds, particularly when you turn on the power system, or
while you are driving or accelerating from a stop. Some of these sounds are unique to this vehicle’s powertrain, fuel, and climate control
systems; others are similar to sounds generated by conventional automobiles that typically are masked by louder noises absent from a
vehicle of this design. These sounds are not a cause for concern, and you will soon recognize them as normal and thus be able to detect any
new or unusual noise should one develop.

After shutting off the engine, you may hear certain noises coming from the vehicle. Here’s the lowdown:
• Noise from Under Vehicle: This noise is caused by the vacuum pump inside the fuel evaporation leakage check module (ELCM).
Depending on conditions, the pump will come on for about 15 minutes about 5 to 10 hours after engine shutoff. This noise is just normal
vehicle operation and doesn’t indicate a vehicle problem.

16
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 17 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Safety Precautions
Do not touch the High Voltage system
Attempting to take a High Voltage system component apart or disconnect one of its wires
can cause severe electrical shock. Make sure that any maintenance or repairs to the High

Quick Reference Guide

Voltage system are performed by a dealer.

If a crash occurs
● Be careful of electric shock hazard.
uIf a severe crash damages your vehicle’s High Voltage system, there is a possibility of
electrical shock due to exposed High Voltage components or wires. If this happens, do not
touch any of the High Voltage system components or any of its orange wires.
● Avoid contact with High Voltage battery fluid.
Do not cover the air intake. uThe High Voltage battery contains a flammable electrolyte that could leak as a result of
a severe crash. Avoid skin or eye contact with the electrolyte as it is corrosive. If you
accidentally come into contact with the electrolyte, rinse the exposed skin or flush your
eyes with copious amounts of water for at least five minutes, and seek medical attention
immediately.
● Use a fire extinguisher for an electrical fire.
uAttempting to extinguish an electrical fire with even a small quantity of water, from a
garden hose for instance, can be dangerous.
● Anytime the vehicle is damaged in a crash, have it repaired by a dealer.
Air Intake

If the air intake is obstructed

Emergency Shutdown System for the High Voltage System
If the vehicle is involved in a crash, the emergency shutdown system will activate depending
during vehicle operation, the High
on the severity of the impact. When the system activates, the High Voltage system
Voltage battery can become too
automatically shuts down, and the vehicle can no longer move under its own power. To
hot. To protect the battery, the
return the High Voltage system back to normal operation, consult a dealer.
system may start to limit the
battery’s output and cause the
power system and 12-volt battery Honda collects and recycles High Voltage batteries used in its vehicles – consult a dealer for
charging system indicators to come more information.
on.

17
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 18 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Eco Assist® System (P 401)

Quick Reference Guide

Ambient Meter
With SPORT mode off, the color
of the ambient meter changes to
green to indicate that the vehicle
is being driven in a fuel efficient
manner.

The message is displayed

for a few seconds when the ECON Button
ECON button is pressed. (P 401)
Helps maximize
fuel economy.

ECON Mode Indicator (P 97)

Comes on when the ECON button is
pressed.

18
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 19 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Quick Reference Guide

Drive Cycle Score/Lifetime Points
● Comes on when the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF.
Drive Cycle Score

Lifetime Points

Eco Drive Display

● Keep the vehicle icon near the center of the circle.

Fuel economy is: Worse Better Best Better Worse

Aggressive Moderate Slow Acceleration/ Moderate Aggressive

Deceleration Deceleration Deceleration Acceleration Acceleration

19
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 20 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Safe Driving (P 39)

Quick Reference Guide

Airbags (P 51)
● Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and
your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision.

Child Safety (P 66)

● All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat.
● Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat.
● Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat.

Exhaust Gas Hazard (P 79)

● Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain carbon
monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces where carbon
monoxide gas can accumulate.

Seat Belts (P 44)

● Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well
back in the seat.
● Check that your passengers are wearing
their seat belts correctly.
Before Driving Checklist (P 43)
● Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints,
steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted.
Fasten your lap belt as
low as possible.

20
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 21 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Instrument Panel (P 81)

Indicators (P 82)/Driver Information Interface (P 132)/Gauges (P 129)

Quick Reference Guide

POWER/CHARGE Gauge Speedometer

High Voltage Battery Fuel Gauge

Charge Level Gauge

Driver Information Interface Immobilizer System Indicator/

Security System Alarm Indicator

Deceleration Paddle
Selector Indicator

Shift Position Indicator/

Transmission System Indicator

21
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 22 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Controls (P 155)

Clock (P156) e Select Set Date or Set Time. POWER Button (P181)
Quick Reference Guide

To adjust time f Adjust the dates, hours and minutes by

Press the button to change the vehicle’s
selecting 3 / 4 . power mode.

g Select Save to set the date or time.

The clock is automatically updated through

the audio system.

To adjust date

a Press , then select Settings.

b Select System, then Day & Time.

c Select Set Date & Time.

d Select Automatic Date & Time, then

select OFF.

22
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 23 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Models with automatic intermittent wipers

Turn Signals (P 184) Wipers and Washers AUTO should always be turned OFF before
(P 192) the following situations in order to prevent
Turn Signal Control Lever
severe damage to the wiper system:

Quick Reference Guide

Right ● Cleaning the windshield
Wiper/Washer Control Lever ● Driving through a car wash
Adjustment Ring ● No rain present
(- : Low Sensitivity*1
(- : Lower speed, fewer sweeps*2 Steering Wheel (P 196)
(+ : High Sensitivity*1 ● To adjust, pull the adjustment lever
(+ : Higher speed, more sweeps*2 toward you, adjust to the desired
position, then lock the lever back in place.
Left

To adjust
Lights (P 185)
Light Control Switches Pull toward
you to spray
washer fluid.
High Beam
MIST
Low Beam OFF
AUTO*1: Wiper speed varies automatically
INT*2: Low speed with intermittent To lock
Flashing LO: Low speed wipe
HI: High speed wipe

*1:Models with automatic intermittent

wipers
*2:Models without automatic intermittent
wipers

23
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 24 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Unlocking the Front Doors Power Door Mirrors (P 198) Power Windows (P 177)
from the Inside (P 168) ● With the power mode in ON, move the ● With the power mode in ON, open and
selector switch to L or R. close the power windows.
● Pull either front door inner handle to
● Push the appropriate edge of the ● If the power window lock button is in the
Quick Reference Guide

unlock and open it at the same time.

adjustment switch to adjust the mirror. off position, each passenger’s window
can be opened and closed with its own
Selector Switch switch.
● If the power window lock button is in the
on position (indicator on), each
passenger’s window switch is disabled.
Power Window
Indicator
Lock Button

● Unlocking and opening the driver’s door

from the inner handle unlocks all the
other doors. Adjustment Switch

Trunk (P 171)
● Press and hold the trunk opener on the
driver’s door to unlock and open the
trunk.
Window Switch
● Press the trunk release button on the
remote to unlock and open the trunk.
● Press the trunk release button on the
trunk lid to unlock and open the trunk.

Trunk Opener

24
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 25 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Climate Control System (P 216)

● Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system.
● Press the button to turn the system on or off.
● Press the button to defrost the windshield.

Quick Reference Guide

Models without SYNC button

Dashboard Dashboard Floor vents Floor and

vents and floor defroster
vents vents
AUTO Button Fan Control Dial

Temperature Control Dial (ON/OFF) Button

(Recirculation) Button A/C (Air Conditioning) Button

(Windshield Defroster) Button MODE Control Button
Models with SYNC button

Dashboard Dashboard Floor vents Floor and

vents and floor defroster
vents vents
A/C (Air Conditioning) Button MODE Control Button

Driver’s Side Temperature Passenger’s Side Temperature

Control Dial Control Dial
AUTO Button SYNC (Synchronization) Button

(ON/OFF) Button Fan Control Button

(Recirculation) Button (Windshield Defroster) Button

25
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 26 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Features (P 223)

● / (Seek/Skip) Buttons
Audio Remote Controls Roll up or down: To cycle through the Radio: Press
Quick Reference Guide

/ to change the
(P 227) audio modes, roll up or down and then
press the left selector wheel: preset station.
(home) Button iPod, USB device, Bluetooth® Audio or
Smartphone Connection:
FM Press / to skip to the
/
beginning of the next song or
(Seek/Skip) Buttons
return to the beginning of the
AM current song.
USB device:
Left Selector Press and hold / to
Wheel SiriusXM®
change a folder.
VOL (+ /VOL (- (Volume) Buttons
USB1
● VOL (+ /VOL (- (Volume) Buttons
Press to adjust the volume up/down.
USB2
● Left Selector Wheel
When selecting the audio mode
Press the (home) button, then roll up
Bluetooth® Audio
or down to select Audio on the driver
information interface, and then press the
left selector wheel.
Smartphone Connection
(Apple CarPlay/Android Auto)

26
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 27 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Audio System (P230)

For navigation system operation () See the Navigation System Manual

Quick Reference Guide

Audio/Information Screen

(Home) Button

(Back) Button

(Day/Night) Button

(Seek/Skip) Button

(Seek/Skip) Button

VOL/ (Volume/Power)
Knob

27
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 28 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Driving (P 375)

Electronic Gear Selector (P 391)

Quick Reference Guide

● Select (P and depress the brake pedal when turning on the power.

Shift selection

Shift Position Indicator

The shift position indicator and
the shift button indicator
indicate the current gear
selection.

Shift Button
Shift Position Indicator Indicator

Park Drive
Press the (P button. Press the (D button.
Used when parking or before turning Used for normal driving.
the power on or off. The deceleration paddle selector can be
Transmission is locked. used temporarily.
The deceleration paddle selector can be
Reverse
used when SPORT mode is on.
Pull back the (R button.
Used when reversing.

Neutral
Press the (N button.
Transmission is not locked.

28
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 29 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Deceleration Paddle Selector (P398)

When you release the accelerator pedal, you can control the rate of deceleration
without releasing your hands from the steering wheel. Using the deceleration

Quick Reference Guide

paddle selector situated on the steering wheel, you can sequentially shift through
three stages of deceleration.
Pull the (+ selector for a few seconds when you want to cancel the deceleration
paddle selector.
● When SPORT mode is OFF
If you pull back the paddle selector, the rate of deceleration will change
temporarily, and the stage will appear in the instrument panel.
● When SPORT mode is ON
If you pull back the paddle selector, the rate of deceleration will change and
the stage along with M will appear in the instrument panel.
When SPORT mode is When SPORT mode is
OFF, the deceleration ON, the deceleration
stage appears. stage and M appear.

(- Paddle (+ Paddle
Selector Selector
Deceleration stage

29
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 30 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

CMBSTM On and Off

(P 422)
● When a possible frontal collision is likely
Quick Reference Guide

unavoidable, the CMBSTM can help you to

reduce the vehicle speed and the severity
of the collision.
● The CMBSTM is turned on every time you
turn on the power system.
● To turn the CMBSTM on or off, use the
safety support switch.

VSA® On and Off (P 404)

● The Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®)
system helps stabilize the vehicle during
cornering, and helps maintain traction
while accelerating on loose or slippery
road surfaces.
● VSA® comes on automatically every time
you turn on the power system.
● To partially disable or fully restore VSA®
function, press and hold the button until
you hear a beep.

Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS) (P 406)
● Detects a change in tire conditions and
overall dimensions due to decrease in tire
pressures.
● The TPMS is turned on automatically
every time you turn on the power system.
● A calibration procedure must be
performed when certain conditions arise.

30
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 31 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Refueling (P 485)
Fuel recommendation: Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher
Fuel tank capacity: 10.6 US gal (40 L)

Quick Reference Guide

a Press the fuel fill door release button.
u Please Wait appears for a few seconds on the
driver information interface. Fuel Fill Door Release
Button
b When the message changes to Ready, the fuel
fill door automatically opens.

c Turn the fuel fill cap slowly to remove the cap.

d Place the cap in the holder on the fuel fill door.

e After refueling, screw the cap back on until it

clicks at least once.

31
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 32 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Honda Sensing® (P 415)

Honda Sensing® is a driver support system Collision Mitigation Lane Keeping Assist
Quick Reference Guide

which employs the use of two distinctly

different kinds of sensors, a radar sensor Braking SystemTM System (LKAS) (P 446)
located at the lower part of the front
bumper and a front sensor camera mounted
(CMBSTM) (P 418) Provides steering input to help keep the
to the interior side of the windshield, vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and
The system can assist you when it
behind the rearview mirror. provides tactile and visual alerts if the
determines there is a possibility of your
vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane.
vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a
The camera is located pedestrian detected in front of your vehicle.
behind the rearview The CMBSTM is designed to alert you when Road Departure
mirror. the potential for a collision is determined, as
well as to reduce your vehicle speed to help
Mitigation (RDM) System
Front Sensor
Camera minimize collision severity when a collision is (P 454)
deemed unavoidable.
Alerts and helps to assist you when the
Adaptive Cruise Control system detects a possibility of your vehicle
unintentionally crossing over detected lane
(ACC) with Low Speed markings and/or leaving the roadway
Follow (P428) altogether.

Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a Traffic Sign Recognition

Radar Sensor set following-interval behind a vehicle
detected ahead of yours and, if the detected
System (P459)
vehicle comes to a stop, can decelerate and
Reminds you of road sign information, such as
stop your vehicle, without you having to keep the current speed limit your vehicle has just
your foot on the brake or the accelerator.
The radar sensor is at passed through, showing it on the driver
the lower part of the information interface.
front bumper.

32
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 33 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Maintenance (P 489)

Under the Hood (P 499)

Quick Reference Guide

● Check engine oil, engine coolant, inverter coolant, and
windshield washer fluid. Add when necessary.
Wiper Blades (P 516)
● Check brake fluid. ● Replace blades if they leave streaks
across the windshield or become
a Pull the hood release handle under the corner of the noisy.
dashboard.

b Locate the hood latch lever, push it to the side, and then
raise the hood. Once you have raised the hood slightly, you
can release the lever.

Tires (P 519) Lights (P 512)

● Inspect tires and wheels regularly. ● Inspect all lights regularly.
● Check tire pressures regularly.
● Install snow tires for winter
driving.

c When finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly

locked in place.

33
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 34 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Handling the Unexpected (P 539)

Flat Tire (P 541) Power System Won’t Overheating (P 567)

Quick Reference Guide

● Park in a safe location. If you do not see

Models with optional spare tire
● Park in a safe location and replace the
Start (P 561) steam under the hood, open the hood,
● If the 12-volt battery is dead, jump start
flat tire with the compact spare tire in the and let the engine cool down.
using a booster battery.
trunk.
● Park in a safe location and repair the flat
tire using the temporary tire repair kit.

Indicators Come On Blown Fuse (P 577) Emergency Towing

(P 569) ● Check for a blown fuse if an electrical (P 583)
device does not operate.
● Identify the indicator and consult the ● Call a professional towing service if you
owner’s manual. need to tow your vehicle.

34
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 35 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

What to Do If
Why does the brake pedal This can occur when the ABS activates and does not indicate a

Quick Reference Guide

pulsate slightly when problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never
applying the brakes? pump the brake pedal.
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) (P476)

The rear door cannot be Check if the childproof lock is in the

opened from inside the lock position. If so, open the rear door
vehicle. Why? with the outside door handle.
To cancel this function, slide the lever
up to the unlock position.

Why do the doors lock If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are
after I unlocked the doors? relocked automatically for security.

Why does the beeper The beeper sounds when:

sound when I open the ● The power mode is in ACCESSORY.

driver’s door? ● The exterior lights are left on.

35
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 36 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Why does a beeper sound The beeper sounds if you move outside the walk away auto lock
when I walk away from the operating range before the door completely closes.
2 Locking the doors (Walk away auto lock®) (P162)
Quick Reference Guide

vehicle after I close the

door?

Why does the beeper The beeper sounds when the driver and/or front passenger are
sound when I start driving? not wearing their seat belts.

Pressing the electric Press the electric parking brake switch with the brake pedal
parking brake switch does depressed.
not release the parking
brake. Why?

I’m seeing an amber The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) needs attention. If
indicator of a tire with an you recently inflated or changed a tire, you have to recalibrate
exclamation point. What is the system.
that? 2 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (P406)

36
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 37 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Depressing the accelerator ● Fasten the driver’s seat belt.

pedal does not release the ● Check if the transmission is in (P or (N . If so, select any other
parking brake position.

Quick Reference Guide

automatically. Why?

Why does the shift position ● Fasten the driver’s seat belt.
automatically change to (P ● Close the driver’s door and manually change the shift
when I open the driver’s position.
door to check for parking 2 When opening the driver’s door (P394)
space lines when
reversing?

Why do I hear a screeching The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle
sound when I apply the inspected by a dealer.
brake pedal?

37
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 38 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

38
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 39 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Safe Driving
You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual.

For Safe Driving Side Airbags ...................................... 59

Important Safety Precautions ............. 40 Side Curtain Airbags .......................... 61
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features............ 42 Airbag System Indicators.................... 62
Safety Checklist ................................. 43 Airbag Care ....................................... 65
Seat Belts Child Safety
About Your Seat Belts........................ 44 Protecting Child Passengers ............... 66
Fastening a Seat Belt.......................... 47 Safety of Infants and Small Children.......68
Seat Belt Inspection............................ 50 Safety of Larger Children ................... 77
Airbags Exhaust Gas Hazard
Airbag System Components............... 51 Carbon Monoxide Gas....................... 79
Types of Airbags ................................ 54 Safety Labels
Front Airbags (SRS) ............................ 54 Label Locations .................................. 80

39
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 40 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

For Safe Driving

The following pages explain your vehicle’s safety features and how to use them
properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the
most important.
Safe Driving

Important Safety Precautions

■ Always wear your seat belt 1Important Safety Precautions

A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to Some states prohibit the use of cell phones other
than hands-free devices by the driver while driving.
supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped
with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly.

■ Restrain all children

Children ages 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the
front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger
children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat.

■ Be aware of airbag hazards

While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants
who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children,
and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.

■ Don’t drink and drive

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to
changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink.
So don’t drink and drive, and don’t let your friends drink and drive, either.

40
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 41 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Safety Precautions

■ Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely

Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying
close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash.
Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to

Safe Driving
divert some attention away from driving.

■ Control your speed

Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher
the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds.
Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum
speed posted.

■ Keep your vehicle in safe condition

Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous.
To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition
frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.

■ Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle

Children, pets and people needing assistance left unattended in the vehicle may be
injured if they activate one or more of the vehicle controls. They may also cause the
vehicle to move, resulting in a crash in which they and/or another person(s) can be
injured or killed. Also, depending on the ambient temperature, the temperature of
the interior may reach extreme levels, which can result in harm or death.
Even if the climate control system is on, never leave them in the vehicle unattended
as the climate control system can shut off at any time.

41
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 42 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle’s Safety Features

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

1Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
9 8 9 Your vehicle is equipped with many features that
work together to help protect you and your
passengers during a crash.
Safe Driving

6
Some features do not require any action on your part.
These include a strong steel framework that forms a
10
safety cage around the passenger compartment,
7 front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering
8 column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat
belts in a sufficient crash.
10

However, you and your passengers cannot take full

11 advantage of these features unless you remain seated
in the correct position and always wear your seat
belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to
injuries if they are not used properly.

7 Safety Cage
Crush Zones
Seats and Seat-Backs
Head Restraints
Collapsible Steering Column
6 Seat Belts
7 Front Airbags
8 Side Airbags
9 Side Curtain Airbags
10 Door Locks
11 Seat Belt Tensioners

The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and
your passengers.

42
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 43 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuFor Safe DrivinguSafety Checklist

Safety Checklist
For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items 1Safety Checklist
each time before you drive. If the door and/or trunk open message appears on
• After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure all doors are closed and locked. the driver information interface, a door and/or the
Locking the doors helps prevent an occupant from being ejected and an outsider trunk is not completely closed. Close all doors and

Safe Driving
from unexpectedly opening a door. the trunk tightly until the message disappears.
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 167 2 Driver Information Interface Warning and
Information Messages P. 104
• Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are
adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the
vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a
crash.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 199
• Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective
when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller
persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position.
2 Adjusting the Front Head Restraint Positions P. 204
• Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any
passengers are properly belted as well.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 47
• Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a child’s age, height
and weight.
2 Child Safety P. 66

43
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 44 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts
Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you 1About Your Seat Belts
connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety
features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the 3 WARNING
vehicle, against any passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat Not wearing a seat belt properly increases
Safe Driving

belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full the chance of serious injury or death in a
advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags. crash, even though your vehicle has
airbags.
In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including:
- frontal impacts Be sure you and your passengers always
- side impacts wear seat belts and wear them properly.
- rear impacts
- rollovers If a passenger moves around and extends the seat
belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If this
■ Lap/shoulder seat belts happens, release the retractor by unfastening the
seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely.
All five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency
Then, refasten the belt.
locking retractors. In normal driving, the retractor lets you move freely while keeping
some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop the retractor locks to If you extend the seat belt too quickly, it will lock in
restrain your body. place. If this happens, slightly retract the seat belt,
then extend it slowly.
The front passenger’s and rear seat belts also have a lockable retractor for use with
child seats. Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every
crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your
2 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 73
risk of serious injury.

44
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 45 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

■ Proper use of seat belts 1About Your Seat Belts

Follow these guidelines for proper use: Most states require you to wear seat belts.
• All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position
for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduce the effectiveness of the

Safe Driving
belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
• Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.
• Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
• Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort
or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability
and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.

■ Seat Belt Reminder 1Seat Belt Reminder

The indicator will also come on if a front passenger
The seat belt system includes an indicator on does not fasten their seat belt within six seconds after
the instrument panel to remind the driver or a the power mode is set to ON.
front passenger or both to fasten their seat
belts. When no one is sitting in the front passenger’s seat,
If you set the power mode to ON and a seat the indicator will not come on and the beeper will not
sound.
belt is not fastened, a beeper will sound and
The indicator also may not come on and the beeper
the indicator will blink. After a few seconds, may not sound when the occupant is not heavy
the beeper will stop and the indicator will enough to trigger the weight sensor. Such occupants
come on and remain illuminated until the seat (e.g., infants and smaller children) should be moved
belt is fastened. to the rear seat as a deploying front airbag likely will
injure or kill them.
The beeper will periodically sound and the 2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 66
indicator will blink while the vehicle is moving
until the seat belt is fastened.

Continued 45
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 46 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

■ Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners 1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

The seat belt tensioners can only operate once.
The front seats are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners to enhance safety. If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come
on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and
Safe Driving

The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts during a moderate-to- thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not
severe frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not severe enough to offer protection in a subsequent crash.
inflate the front airbags.
During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the
tensioner on that side of the vehicle also activates.

46
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 47 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

Fastening a Seat Belt

After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well 1Fastening a Seat Belt
back in the seat: No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 199 belt or one that does not appear to be working
1. Pull the seat belt out slowly. correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working

Safe Driving
Pull out slowly. properly may not protect the occupant in a crash.
Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.
Correct
Seated If the seat belt appears to be locked in a fully
Posture. retracted position, firmly pull out on the shoulder belt
once, then push it back in. Then, smoothly pull it out
of the retractor and fasten. If you are unable to
release the seat belt from a fully retracted position,
do not allow anyone to sit in the seat, and take your
vehicle to a dealer for repair.
Latch 2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then
2 About Your Seat Belts P. 44
Plate tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is 2 Seat Belt Inspection P. 50
secure.
u Make sure that the belt is not twisted or
caught on anything.
Buckle

Continued 47
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 48 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as 1Fastening a Seat Belt
possible across your hips, then pull up on
the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part 3 WARNING
Lap belt
fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic Improperly positioning the seat belts can
Safe Driving

as low as
possible bones take the force of a crash and reduces cause serious injury or death in a crash.
the chance of internal injuries.
4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to Make sure all seat belts are properly
remove any slack, then check that the belt positioned before driving.
rests across the center of your chest and
over your shoulder. This spreads the forces To release the belt, push the red PRESS button and
of a crash over the strongest bones in your then guide the belt by hand until it has retracted
completely.
upper body.
When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is properly
stowed so that it will not get caught in the closing
door.

Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or

retractor mechanism.

■ Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor 1Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor

After an adjustment, make sure that the shoulder
The front seats have adjustable shoulder anchors to accommodate taller and shorter anchor position is secure.
occupants.
1. Move the anchor up and down while The shoulder anchor height can be adjusted to four
pulling the shoulder anchor outward. levels. If the belt contacts your neck, lower the height
2. Position the anchor so that the belt rests one level at a time.
across the center of your chest and over
your shoulder.
Pull outward

48
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 49 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

■ Advice for Pregnant Women 1Advice for Pregnant Women

Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is
If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when okay for you to drive.
driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the

Safe Driving
belt as low as possible across the hips. To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your
unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front
Wear the shoulder belt
across the chest avoiding airbag:
the abdomen. • When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle.
• When sitting in the front passenger’s seat, adjust
the seat as far back as possible.

Wear the lap part of the

belt as low as possible
across the hips.

49
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 50 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuSeat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection

Seat Belt Inspection

Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows: 1Seat Belt Inspection

• Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear. 3 WARNING
• Check that the latch plates and buckles work smoothly and the belts retract Not checking or maintaining seat belts can
Safe Driving

easily. result in serious injury or death if the seat

u If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only belts do not work properly when needed.
use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make
sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract. Check your seat belts regularly and have
any problem corrected as soon as possible.
Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper
protection and should be replaced as soon as possible.
A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of
protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after
any collision.

50
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 51 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Airbags
Airbag System Components

Safe Driving
8 10 9 8 7

11

8
6

8 8

Continued 51
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 52 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components

The front, side, and side curtain airbags are d An electronic control unit that, when the h Impactsensors that can detect a
deployed according to the direction and power mode is in ON, continually moderate-to-severe front or side impact.
severity of impact. Both side curtain airbags monitors information about the various
are deployed in a rollover. The airbag impact sensors, seat and buckle sensors, i An indicator on the dashboard that alerts
Safe Driving

system includes: rollover sensor, airbag activators, seat you that the front passenger’s front
belt tensioners, and other vehicle airbag has been turned off.
a Two SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) information. During a crash event the
front airbags. The driver’s airbag is stored unit can record such information. j An indicator on the instrument panel that
in the center of the steering wheel; the alerts you to a possible problem with your
front passenger’s airbag is stored in the e Seat belt tensioners for the front seats. In airbag system or seat belt tensioners.
dashboard. Both are marked SRS addition, the driver’s and front
AIRBAG. passenger’s seat belt buckles incorporate kA rollover sensor that can detect if your
sensors that detect whether or not the vehicle is about to roll over and signal the
b Two side airbags, one for the driver and belts are fastened. control unit to deploy both side curtain
one for a front passenger. The airbags are airbags.
stored in the outer edges of the seat- f Driver’sseat position sensor. This sensor
backs. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG. detects the driver’s seat slide position to
help determine the optimal deployment
c Two side curtain airbags, one for each of the driver’s airbag.
side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored
in the ceiling, above the side windows. g Weight sensors in the front passenger’s
The front and rear pillars are marked seat. The sensors are used for occupant
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG. classification to activate or deactivate the
front passenger’s airbag.

52
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 53 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components

■ Important Facts About Your Airbags 1Important Facts About Your Airbags
Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together,
Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.
tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises,

Safe Driving
and other minor injuries, sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing When driving, keep hands and arms out of the
their seat belts properly and sitting correctly. deployment path of the front airbag by holding each
side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over
the airbag cover.
What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly and sit upright and as
far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as
possible.

Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that
can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags
deploy.

Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag.
Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp
object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.

Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers. Objects on the
covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags
or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.

53
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 54 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAirbagsuTypes of Airbags

Types of Airbags
Your vehicle is equipped with three types of airbags: 1Types of Airbags
• Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver’s and front passenger’s seats. The airbags can inflate whenever the power mode is
• Side airbags: Airbags in the driver’s and front passenger’s seat-backs. in ON.
• Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows.
Safe Driving

Each is discussed in the following pages. After an airbag inflates in a crash, you may see a
small amount of smoke. This is from the combustion
process of the inflator material and is not harmful.
People with respiratory problems may experience
some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

Front Airbags (SRS) 1Front Airbags (SRS)

The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or
the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger. both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate
at different rates, depending on the severity of the
crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant’s primary supplement the seat belts to help reduce the
restraint system. likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal
crashes.

■ Housing Locations
The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and
in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG.

54
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 55 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

■ Operation
Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions.
When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control

Safe Driving
unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.

A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a
vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.

■ How the Front Airbags Work 1How the Front Airbags Work
Although the driver’s and front passenger’s airbags
While your seat belt restrains your torso, the
normally inflate within a split second of each other, it
front airbag provides supplemental protection is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can
for your head and chest. happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin,
or threshold, that determines whether or not the
The front airbags deflate immediately so that airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will
they won’t interfere with the driver’s visibility provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental
protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.
or the ability to steer or operate other
controls.

The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.

Continued 55
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 56 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

■ When front airbags should not deploy

Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and
help save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might occur
during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash.
Safe Driving

Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration
causes a driver or front passenger to move toward the front of the vehicle. Side
airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the
severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which
can cause the driver or passenger to move toward the side of the vehicle.
Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear
impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed
to deploy in such collisions.
Rollovers: In a rollover, your best form of protection is a seat belt or, if your vehicle
is equipped with a rollover sensor, both a seat belt and a side curtain airbag. Front
airbags, however, are not designed to deploy in a rollover as they would provide
little if any protection.
■ When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the
vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy.
Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object
that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is
underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.
■ When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage
appears severe
Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of
visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some
collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags
would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they
had deployed.

56
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 57 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

■ Advanced Airbags 1Advanced Airbags

If there is a problem with the driver’s seat position
The airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag related sensor or the passenger’s seat weight sensors, the
injuries to smaller occupants. SRS indicator will come on, and in the event of a

Safe Driving
The driver’s advanced airbag system includes a crash, the airbag will deploy (regardless of the driver’s
seat position sensor. seating position or passenger’s occupant
classification) with a force corresponding to the
severity of the impact.
Based on information from this sensor and the
2 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
severity of the impact, the advanced airbag
Indicator P. 62
Driver’s system determines the optimal deployment of
Seat the driver’s airbag. For the advanced front airbags to work properly,
Position confirm that:
Sensor • The occupant is sitting in an upright position,
The front passenger’s advanced airbag system wearing the seat belt properly and the seat back is
not excessively reclined.
has weight sensors. The sensors are used for
• The occupant is not leaning against the door or
occupant classification to activate or center console.
deactivate the front passenger’s airbag. • The occupant’s feet are placed on the floor in front
Passenger’s of them.
Seat For adult size occupants, the system will • There are no objects hanging from the front
Weight passenger’s seat.
Sensors automatically activate the front passenger’s
airbag. If a small adult sits in the front • Only small, lightweight objects are in the seat back
pocket.
passenger seat and the system does not
• The steering wheel and passenger’s side dashboard
recognize him/her as an adult, see are not obstructed by any object.
2 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 63 • No liquid has been spilled on or under the seat.

Continued 57
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 58 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

We advise against allowing a child age 12 or under to ride in the front passenger’s 1Advanced Airbags
seat. However, if you do allow a small child or infant to ride in the front passenger’s • There is no child seat or other object pressing
seat, the system is designed to automatically deactivate the front passenger’s airbag. against the rear of the seat or seat back.
Do not let a small child or infant ride in the front passenger’s seat if the airbag does • There is no rear passenger pushing or pulling on
Safe Driving

not automatically deactivate. the back of the front passenger’s seat.

• There are no objects placed under or beside the
front passenger’s seat. Improperly positioned
objects can interfere with the advanced airbag
sensors.
• The head restraint is not contacting the roof.
2 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 63

• The floor mat behind the front passenger’s seat is

set in the correct position evenly on the floor. An
improperly placed mat can interfere with the
advanced airbag sensors.
2 Floor Mats P. 533

58
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 59 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags

Side Airbags
The side airbags help protect the torso and pelvis of the driver or a front passenger 1Side Airbags
during a moderate-to-severe side impact. Make sure you and your front seat passenger always
sit upright. Leaning into the path of a side airbag can
■ Housing Locations prevent the airbag from deploying properly and

Safe Driving
increases your risk of serious injury.
The side airbags are housed in the outside
edge of the driver’s and passenger’s seat- Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags.
backs. They can interfere with the proper operation of the
airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.

Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG. Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers
without consulting a dealer.
Housing Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back
Location covers can prevent your side airbags from properly
deploying during a side impact.

■ Operation
When
When the sensors detect a moderate-to-
inflated severe side impact, the control unit signals the
side airbag on the impact side to immediately
inflate.

Side
Airbag

Continued 59
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 60 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags

■ When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage

Because the airbag system senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side
of the vehicle’s framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there
may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough
Safe Driving

impact to deploy the airbag.

■ When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears
severe
It is possible for a side airbag not to deploy during an impact that results in
apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was toward the
far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle’s crushable body parts absorbed
most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have been
needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.

60
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 61 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags

Side Curtain Airbags

The side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in the 1Side Curtain Airbags
outer seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side curtain To get the best protection from the side curtain
airbags equipped in this vehicle are also designed to help reduce the likelihood of airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts
partial and complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in crashes, properly and sit upright and well back in their seats.

Safe Driving
particularly rollover crashes.
Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof
pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation
■ Housing Locations of the side curtain airbags.
The side curtain airbags are located in the
If the impact is on the passenger’s side, the
ceiling above the side windows on both sides passenger’s side curtain airbag deploys even if there
of the vehicle. are no occupants on that side of the vehicle.

If the SRS control unit senses that your vehicle is

about to rollover, it immediately deploys both side
curtain airbags and activates both front seat belt
tensioners.
Side Curtain Airbag Storage

■ Operation
The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy
in a rollover or a moderate-to-severe side
impact.

Deployed Side Curtain Airbag

Continued 61
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 62 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators

■ When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision

One or both side curtain airbags may also inflate in a moderate-to-severe angled
frontal collision.
Safe Driving

Airbag System Indicators

If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on and a
message appears on the driver information interface.

■ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator 1Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator

■ When the power mode is set to ON 3 WARNING

The indicator comes on for a few seconds, Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in
then goes off. This tells you the system is serious injury or death if the airbag systems
working properly. or tensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as

soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts
you to a possible problem.

If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the
system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you don’t, your airbags and seat
belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed.

62
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 63 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators

■ Passenger Airbag Off Indicator 1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator

To ensure the passenger is detected properly, confirm
■ When the passenger airbag off that:
indicator comes on • The occupant is sitting in an upright position,

Safe Driving
The indicator comes on to alert you that the wearing the seat belt properly and the seat back is
passenger’s airbag has been turned off. This not excessively reclined.
occurs if the seat is empty or when the weight • The occupant is not leaning against the door or
center console.
sensors determine that a small child or infant
• The occupant’s feet are placed on the floor in front
is on the passenger seat.
of them.
• There are no objects hanging from the front
passenger’s seat.
• Only small, lightweight objects are in the seat back
Children age 12 or under should always ride properly restrained in a back seat. pocket.
2 Child Safety P. 66 • No liquid has been spilled on or under the seat.
• There is no child seat or other object pressing
against the rear of the seat or seat back.
If the indicator is on, in the event of a crash, the passenger’s airbag will not deploy.
• There is no rear passenger pushing or pulling on
the back of the front passenger’s seat.
• There are no objects placed under or beside the
front passenger’s seat. Improperly positioned
objects can interfere with the advanced airbag
sensors.
• The floor mat behind the front passenger’s seat is
set in the correct position evenly on the floor. An
improperly placed mat can interfere with the
advanced airbag sensors.
• The head restraint is not contacting the roof.

Continued 63
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 64 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators

1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator

The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and
go off periodically if the total weight on the seat is
near the airbag cutoff threshold. For a small adult,
Safe Driving

depending on physique and posture, the system may

not recognize him/her as an adult and thus deactivate
the passenger’s airbag.
If this occurs, please confirm that the conditions set
forth in the above bullet points on the previous page
are met.
If the above conditions are met and the indicator is
still on, then with the transmission in park, turn the
ignition off and back on.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as

possible if:
• All of the above conditions are met, and the
indicator comes on with an adult seated in the
front passenger seat.
• The seat is empty and the indicator is off.
Do not allow an adult passenger to ride in the front
seat when the indicator is on.

64
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 65 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAirbagsuAirbag Care

Airbag Care
You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any 1Airbag Care
airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag
inspected by a dealer in the following situations: system components, including the airbag, tensioners,
sensors, and control unit.

Safe Driving
■ When the airbags have deployed
If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced.
Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be
replaced.

■ When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision

Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the driver’s
seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passenger’s seat, front seat belt
tensioners, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash.

■ Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer

This would likely disable or affect the proper operation of the driver’s seat position
sensor or the weight sensors in the passenger’s seat. If it is necessary to remove or
modify a front seat to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a Honda
dealer, or American Honda Automobile Customer Service at 1-800-999-1009.

65
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 66 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers
Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are 1Protecting Child Passengers
either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle crashes are the
number one cause of death of children ages 12 and under. 3 WARNING
Children who are unrestrained or
Safe Driving

To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state requires that infants improperly restrained can be seriously
and children be properly restrained when they ride in a vehicle. injured or killed in a crash.

Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because: Any child too small for a seat belt should be
• An inflating front airbag can injure or kill a properly restrained in a child seat. A larger
child sitting in the front seat. child should be properly restrained with a
seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary.
• A child in the front seat is more likely to
interfere with the driver’s ability to safely The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
control the vehicle. recommends that all children ages 12 and under be
properly restrained in a rear seat. Some states have
laws restricting where children may ride.
• Statistics show that children of all sizes and
ages are safer when they are properly
restrained in a rear seat.

66
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 67 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers

• Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the 1Protecting Child Passengers
event of a collision.
3 WARNING
• Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or

Safe Driving
likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries. wrap one around their neck can result in
serious injury or death.
• Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very
seriously injured in a crash. Instruct children not to play with any seat
belt and make sure any unused seat belt a
• Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an child can reach is buckled, fully retracted,
approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the seat and locked.
belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system.
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
• Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows or seat adjustments. and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.

• Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when To remind you of the passenger’s front airbag
hazards and child safety, your vehicle has warning
the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate
labels on the dashboard and on the front visors.
vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly. Please read and follow the instructions on these
labels.
2 Safety Labels P. 80

67
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 68 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safety of Infants and Small Children

■ Protecting Infants 1Protecting Infants

An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat until the infant 3 WARNING
reaches the seat manufacturer’s weight or height limit for the seat. Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front
Safe Driving

■ Positioning a rear-facing child seat seat can result in serious injury or death
Child seats must be placed and secured in a during a crash.
rear seating position.
Always place a rear-facing child seat in the
rear seat, not the front.

Experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat for a

child so long as the child’s height and weight are
appropriate for a rear-facing seat.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front Infants should never be seated in a forward-facing
passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back position.
in the desired position. Make sure that there is no contact between the child seat
Always refer to the child seat manufacturer’s
and the seat in front of it. instructions before installation.

It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger’s advanced front airbag Do not allow a front seat to rest against a child seat
system. installed in a rear seating position.
2 Airbags P. 51 The weight sensor in the front seat may not correctly
detect the actual weight of the occupant.
If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front
passenger’s seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied.
Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.

68
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 69 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

■ Protecting Smaller Children 1Protecting Smaller Children

If a child has exceeded the weight and height limitations of a rear-facing child seat, 3 WARNING
the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured forward-facing child seat
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the

Safe Driving
until they exceed the weight and height limitations for the forward-facing child seat.
front seat can result in serious injury or
■ Forward-facing child seat placement death if the front airbag inflates.
We strongly recommend placing a forward-
facing child seat in a rear seating position. If you must place a forward-facing child
seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, and properly restrain the
child.

Educate yourself about the laws and regulations

regarding child seat use where you are driving, and
follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with
advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger’s front airbag off. A
rear seat is the safest place for a child.

Continued 69
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 70 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

■ Selecting a Child Seat 1Selecting a Child Seat

Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is
Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children). simple.
Some have a rigid-type connector, while others have a flexible-type connector. Both
Safe Driving

are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed
installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat to simplify the installation process and reduce the
manufacturer’s use and care instructions including recommended expiration dates likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.
as well as the instructions in this manual. Proper installation is key to maximizing
your child’s safety.

In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible

child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security.
This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured
with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat
manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat
once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owner’s manual
for proper installation instructions.

■ Important consideration when selecting a child seat

Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements:
• The child seat is the correct type and size for the child.
• The child seat is the correct type for the seating position.
• The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

70
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 71 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

■ Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat 1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat

A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in either of the two outer rear seats. A child 3 WARNING
seat is attached to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of connectors.
Never attach two child seats to the same

Safe Driving
1. Locate the anchor marks affixed to the base
anchor. In a collision, one anchor may not
of the seat cushion.
be strong enough to hold two child seat
2. Pull out the anchor covers under the marks
attachments and may break, causing
to expose the lower anchors.
Marks
serious injury or death.

Covers
For your child’s safety, when using a child seat
installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the
child seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child
seat that is not properly secured will not adequately
3. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat, then protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the
attach the child seat to the lower anchors child or other vehicle occupants.
Lower Anchors according to the instructions that came
with the child seat.
u When installing the child seat, make sure
that the lower anchors are not
obstructed by the seat belt or any other
Rigid Type object.

Flexible Type

Continued 71
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 72 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Straight Top Tether Type 4. Open the tether anchor cover behind the 1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
head restraint.
Tether Strap
Hook 5. Route the tether strap over the top of the 3 WARNING
head restraint and secure the tether strap Using the outer rear seats’ inner anchors to
Safe Driving

hook to the anchor. secure a LATCH-compatible child seat in the

6. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the center seating position may result in failure
child seat manufacturer. of the child seat, causing injury or death.
7. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
Anchor
rocking it forward and back and side to Only use the outer rear seats’ inner anchors
Other Top Tether Type side; little movement should be felt. to install a child seat in the center seating
position if the manufacturer’s instructions
Tether Strap 8. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
expressly permit.
Hook can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked. Installing a LATCH-compatible child seat in the
rear center seat
Each outer rear seat is equipped with a pair of lower
anchors which are used to secure a LATCH-
Anchor compatible child seat. The rear center seat, however,
is not equipped with anchors of any kind.
The inner and outer anchors are spaced apart at a
standard distance of 11 inches (280 mm). The distance
between the two inner anchors is 15 inches (380 mm).
LATCH-compatible restraint systems that are fitted
with rigid-type attachments cannot be installed in the
rear center seat. However, a system fitted with
flexible-type attachments can be installed in the
center seat, provided that the manufacturer’s
instructions for that system permit the use of the
inner anchors with the stated spacing.
Before seating a child, make sure that the system is
properly attached to both the lower anchors and
tether anchors.
72
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 73 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

■ Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt 1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
A child seat that is not properly secured will not
A child seat can be installed with a lap/shoulder belt in any rear seat or, if absolutely adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause
necessary, the front passenger seat. injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.

Safe Driving
1. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat.
2. Route the seat belt through the child seat
according to the seat manufacturer’s
instructions, and insert the latch plate into
the buckle.
u Insert the latch plate fully until it clicks.

3. Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all

the way out until it stops. This activates the
lockable retractor.
4. Let the seat belt retract a few inches and
check that the retractor has switched
modes by pulling on the webbing. It should
not pull out again until it is reset by
removing the latch plate from the buckle.
u If you are able to pull the shoulder belt
out, the lockable retractor is not
activated. Slowly pull the seat belt all the
way out, and repeat steps 3 – 4.

Continued 73
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 74 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

5. Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near 1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
from the lap part of the belt. and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
u When doing this, place your weight on
Safe Driving

the child seat and push it into the vehicle

seat.

6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by

rocking it forward and back and side to
side; less than one inch of movement
should occur near the seat belt.
7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.

74
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 75 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

■ Adding Security with a Tether 1Adding Security with a Tether

Always use a tether for forward-facing child seats
Tether Anchor Points A tether anchor point is provided behind each whether using the seat belt or lower anchors.
rear seating position.

Safe Driving
If you have a child seat that comes with a
tether but can be installed with a seat belt, the
tether may be used for additional security.

Anchor Cover

Straight Top Tether Type 1. Locate the appropriate tether anchor point
in Outer Position and lift the cover.
Tether Strap 2. Route the tether strap over the head
Hook restraint. Make sure the strap is not twisted.
3. Secure the tether strap hook to the anchor.
4. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.

Anchor
Other Top Tether Type
in Outer Position
Tether Strap
Hook

Anchor

Continued 75
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 76 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Straight Top Tether Type

in Center Position
Tether Strap
Hook
Safe Driving

Anchor
Other Top Tether Type
in Center Position

Tether Strap
Hook

Anchor

76
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 77 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children

Safety of Larger Children

■ Protecting Larger Children 1Safety of Larger Children

The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind 3 WARNING
of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in

Safe Driving
must sit in front. front can result in injury or death if the
passenger’s front airbag inflates.
■ Checking Seat Belt Fit
If a larger child must ride in front, move the
When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/
vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible,
shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the
have the child sit up properly and wear the
following questions.
seat belt properly, using a booster seat if
■ Checklist
needed.
• Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the edge of the seat?
• Does the shoulder belt cross between the
child’s neck and arm?
• Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s thighs?
• Will the child be able to stay seated like this
for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder
seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a
booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.

Continued 77
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 78 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children

■ Booster Seats 1Booster Seats

When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the
If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used instructions that came with it, and install the seat
properly, position the child in a booster seat in accordingly.
Safe Driving

the rear seat. For the child’s safety, check that There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a
the child meets the booster seat booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat
manufacturer’s recommendations. belt correctly.

Some U.S. states require children to use a booster

seat until they reach a given age or weight (e.g. 6
years or 60 lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the
state where you intend to drive.

■ Protecting Larger Children-Final Checks

Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever
have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front:
• Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information
in this manual.
• Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.
• Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat.
• Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the
seat.

■ Monitoring child passengers

We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more
mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up
properly.

78
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 79 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Exhaust Gas Hazard

Carbon Monoxide Gas
The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless, 1Carbon Monoxide Gas
odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon
monoxide gas will not get into the interior. 3 WARNING
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.

Safe Driving
■ Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever
• The exhaust system is making an unusual noise. Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and
• The exhaust system may have been damaged. even kill you.
• The vehicle is raised for an oil change.
Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that
When you operate a vehicle with the trunk open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into expose you to carbon monoxide.
the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the trunk open,
open all the windows and set the climate control system as shown below. An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up
with carbon monoxide gas.
Do not run the engine with the garage door closed.
1. Select the fresh air mode.
Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the
2. Select the mode. garage immediately after starting the engine.
3. Set the fan speed to high.
4. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.

Adjust the climate control system in the same manner if you sit in your parked
vehicle with the engine running.

79
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 80 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Safety Labels
Label Locations
These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer for a
Safe Driving

replacement.

Sun Visor

Radiator Cap
Dashboard

Air Conditioner System

Radiator Cap

80
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 81 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Instrument Panel
This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving.

Indicators ............................................ 82
Driver Information Interface Warning and
Information Messages.................... 104
Gauges and Driver Information Interface
Gauges............................................ 129
Driver Information Interface ............. 132

81
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 82 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Indicators

Parking Brake and Transmission System  P. 90 System Message Indicator  P. 97

*1 Brake System  P. 83 Indicator
Indicator (Red)
Seat Belt Reminder  P. 91
Indicator ECON Mode Indicator  P. 97
Parking Brake and
*1
Brake System  P. 84
Indicator (Amber) Low Fuel Indicator  P. 91
SPORT Mode Indicator  P. 97
Instrument Panel

*1 Automatic Brake *1 Anti-lock Brake System

Hold System Indicator
 P. 85 (ABS) Indicator  P. 92
Immobilizer System  P. 96
Indicator
*1 Automatic Brake Hold *1 Supplemental Restraint  P. 92
Indicator  P. 85 System Indicator Security System Alarm  P. 96
Indicator
POWER SYSTEM *1 Electric Power Steering  P. 92
*1
 P. 86 (EPS) System Indicator Adaptive Cruise Control
Indicator
*1 (ACC) with Low Speed  P. 98
*1 Vehicle Stability AssistTM
Follow Indicator (Amber)
READY Indicator  P. 87  P. 93
(VSA®) System Indicator
Adaptive Cruise Control
*1 EV Indicator  P. 87 *1
Vehicle Stability AssistTM  P. 93 (ACC) with Low Speed  P. 99
(VSA®) OFF Indicator Follow Indicator (Green)
*1
EV Mode Indicator  P. 87 *1 Low Tire Pressure/TPMS  P. 94 Lane Keeping Assist
Indicator *1 System (LKAS) Indicator  P. 99
*1 Malfunction Indicator  P. 88 (Amber)
Lamp Turn Signal and Hazard
Warning Indicators
 P. 95
Lane Keeping Assist
*1
12-Volt Battery System (LKAS) Indicator  P. 99
Charging System  P. 89 High Beam Indicator  P. 95 (Green)
Indicator
Lights On Indicator  P. 95 *1 Safety Support Indicator  P. 100
Shift Position Indicator  P. 89 (Amber)
Fog Light Indicator *  P. 95
Deceleration Paddle Auto High-Beam Safety Support Indicator
Selector Indicator  P. 89 *1
 P. 95  P. 103
Indicator (Green/Gray)

*1 : When you set the power mode to ON, these indicators come on to indicate that system checks are being performed. They go off a few seconds later or after the power
system has started. If an indicator does not come on or turn off, there may be a malfunction in the corresponding system. To resolve the issue, follow the instructions in
the owner’s manual.

82 * Not available on all models

22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 83 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

• Comes on when the parking brake • Comes on while driving - Make sure
is applied, and goes off when it is the parking brake is released. Check the
released. brake fluid level.
• Comes on when the brake fluid 2 What to do when the indicator
level is low. comes on while driving P. 572

Instrument Panel
• Comes on if there is a problem with • Comes on along with the brake system
the brake system. indicator (amber) - Immediately stop in a
• The beeper sounds and the safe place. Contact a dealer for repair. The
indicator comes on if you drive with brake pedal becomes harder to operate.
the parking brake applied. Depress the pedal further than you
• Comes on for about 30 seconds normally do.
when you pull or push the electric • Comes on along with the ABS
Parking Brake parking brake switch when the indicator - Have your vehicle checked by
and Brake power mode is in ACCESSORY or a dealer.
System VEHICLE OFF. 2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red)
Indicator (Red) • Stays on for about 30 seconds Comes On or Blinks P. 572
when you set the power mode to • Blinks and the brake system indicator
VEHICLE OFF while the electric (amber) comes on at the same time -
parking brake is set. There is a problem with the electric
parking brake system. The parking brake
may not be set.
Avoid using the parking brake and have
your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red)
Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time
When the Brake System Indicator
(Amber) Comes On P. 573

Continued 83
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 84 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

• Comes on if there is a problem with • Stays on constantly - Avoid high speeds

a system related to braking other and sudden braking. Take the vehicle to a
than the conventional brake dealer immediately.
system. • Comes on while driving - Avoid using
• Comes on if there is a problem with the parking brake and have your vehicle
Instrument Panel

the cooperative control with checked by a dealer immediately.

regenerative braking, the electric
servo brake system, or the hill start
assist system.
Parking Brake • Comes on if there is a problem with
and Brake the electric parking brake system.
System ● Comes on if there is a problem with ● Make sure the total load is within the
Indicator
the radar sensor. Maximum Load Limit.
(Amber) ● Indicator may come on temporarily 2 Maximum Load Limit P. 379
when the Maximum Load Limit is ● Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
exceeded. checked by a dealer.

• Comes on if there is a problem with

the automatic brake hold system.
2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 473

84
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 85 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

● Comes on when the automatic
Automatic brake hold system is on.
Brake Hold
2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 473
System
Indicator

Instrument Panel
Automatic ● Comes on when the automatic
Brake Hold brake hold is activated. 2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 473 —
Indicator

Continued 85
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 86 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

● Comes on if there is a problem with ● Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
the electric vehicle system.
● Comes on when the High Voltage
battery temperature becomes high.
Instrument Panel

POWER
SYSTEM
Indicator

86
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 87 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

● Comes on when the vehicle is ready
to drive.
READY
2 Turning on the Power P. 382
Indicator

Instrument Panel
● Comes on when the vehicle is
EV Indicator moved by the motor, and the — —
engine is not operating.
● Comes on when the vehicle is in EV
mode.
EV Mode 2 SPORT HYBRID i-MMD (intelligent
Indicator Multi-Mode Drive) P. 11

Continued 87
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 88 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

• After you have set the power mode • Readiness codes are part of the on board
to ON, the vehicle performs system diagnostics for the emissions control
checks. However, if the readiness systems.
codes have not been set by that 2 Testing of Readiness Codes P. 593
time, this indicator will blink five • Comes on while driving - Have your
Instrument Panel

times and then go off. vehicle checked by a dealer.

• Comes on if there is a problem with • Blinks while driving - Stop in a safe
the emissions control system. place where there are no flammable
Malfunction
• Blinks when a misfire in the objects. Stop the power system for 10
Indicator Lamp
engine’s cylinders is detected. minutes or more, and wait for it to cool
• Comes on if the fuel fill cap is loose down. Then, take your vehicle to a dealer.
or missing. 2 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Comes On or Blinks P. 571
• Comes on - Check the fuel cap before
taking your vehicle to a dealer.

88
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 89 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

• Comes on when there is a problem • Stop in a safe place and have your vehicle
12-Volt Battery with the charging system. checked by a dealer immediately.
Charging 2 If the 12-Volt Battery Charging
System System Indicator Comes On P. 570
Indicator

Instrument Panel
• Indicates the current shift position.
Shift Position
2 Shifting P. 391 —
Indicator

• Comes on when the paddle selector

is pulled.
• Blinks when deceleration does not
Deceleration
occur while pulling the paddle
Paddle Selector 2 Deceleration Paddle Selector P. 398 —
selector.
Indicator
• Comes on with M when SPORT
mode is selected and pulling the
paddle selector.

Continued 89
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 90 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

• The current shift position blinks if • Blinks while driving - Avoid sudden
the transmission system has a starts and acceleration and have your
problem. vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
Instrument Panel

• The current shift position or all the • Immediately park your car in a safe place.
Transmission shift positions blink if there is a 2 Emergency Towing P. 583
System problem with the transmission and • Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Indicator the vehicle is no longer able to run.

• The current shift position or all the • While the vehicle is stopped, apply the
shift positions blink if there is a parking brake.
problem with the transmission and • Have your vehicle checked by a dealer
it is not possible to select (P . immediately.

90
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 91 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

• Blinks and the beeper sounds for a • The beeper stops and the indicator goes
few seconds if you are not wearing off when you and the front passenger
a seat belt when you set the power fasten their seat belts.
mode to ON, then the indicator • Stays on after you and/or the front
comes on. passenger has fastened the seat

Instrument Panel
Seat Belt • If the front passenger is not belt(s) - A detection error may have
Reminder wearing a seat belt, the indicator occurred in the sensor. Have your vehicle
Indicator comes on a few seconds later. checked by a dealer.
• Blinks while driving if either you 2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 45
and/or the front passenger has not
fastened a seat belt. The beeper
sounds and the indicator blinks at
regular intervals.
• Comes on when the fuel reserve is • Comes on - Refuel your vehicle as soon
running low (approximately 1.59 as possible.
U.S. gal.). • Blinks - Have your vehicle checked by a
• Blinks if there is a problem with the dealer.
fuel gauge.
Low Fuel
Indicator

Continued 91
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 92 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

• Comes on if there is a problem with • Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle

Anti-lock Brake the ABS. checked by a dealer. With this indicator
System (ABS) on, your vehicle still has normal braking
Indicator ability but no anti-lock function.
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 476
Instrument Panel

• Comes on if a problem with any of • Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle

Supplemental the following is detected: checked by a dealer.
Restraint - Supplemental restraint system
System - Side airbag system
Indicator - Side curtain airbag system
- Seat belt tensioner
• Comes on if there is a problem with • Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
Electric Power the EPS system. checked by a dealer.
Steering (EPS) 2 If the Electric Power Steering (EPS)
System System Indicator Comes On P. 574
Indicator

92
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 93 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

● Blinks when VSA® is active. ● Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
● Comes on if there is a problem with checked by a dealer.
the VSA® system. 2 Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka
Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
Vehicle Stability System P. 403

Instrument Panel
AssistTM (VSA®)
System ● Comes on if the VSA® system is ● Drive a short distance at more than 12
Indicator deactivated temporarily after the mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go
12-volt battery has been off. If it does not, have your vehicle
disconnected, then re-connected. checked by a dealer.

● Comes on when you partially

disable VSA®.
2 VSA® On and Off P. 404

Vehicle Stability
AssistTM (VSA®)
OFF Indicator ● Comes on if the VSA® system is ● Drive a short distance at more than 12
deactivated temporarily after the mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go
12-volt battery has been off. If it does not, have your vehicle
disconnected, then re-connected. checked by a dealer.

Continued 93
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 94 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

● May come on briefly if the power ● Comes on while driving - Stop in a safe
mode is set to ON and the vehicle is place, check tire pressures, and inflate the
not moved within 45 seconds, to tire(s) if necessary.
indicate the calibration process is ● Stays on after the tires are inflated to
not yet complete. the recommended pressures - The
Instrument Panel

● Comes on and stays on when: system needs to be calibrated.

- One or more tires’ pressures are 2 TPMS Calibration P. 406
determined to be significantly low.
- The system has not been
calibrated.
Low Tire
Pressure/TPMS ● Blinks for about one minute, and ● Blinks and remains on - Have your
Indicator then stays on if there is a problem vehicle checked by a dealer. If the vehicle
with the TPMS, or when a compact is fitted with a compact spare tire, get your
spare tire * is temporarily installed. regular tire repaired or replaced and put
back on your vehicle as soon as you can.

● Comes on if the TPMS is deactivated ● Drive a short distance at more than 12

temporarily after the 12-volt battery mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go
has been disconnected, then re- off. If it does not, have your vehicle
connected. checked by a dealer.

94 * Not available on all models

22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 95 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

• Blinks when you operate the turn • Does not blink or blinks rapidly
Turn Signal and
signal lever. 2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 512
Hazard
• Blink along with all turn signals —
Warning
when you press the hazard warning
Indicators
button.

Instrument Panel
High Beam • Comes on when the high beam
headlights are on. — —
Indicator

• Comes on when the light switch in • If you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
Lights On a position other than OFF or when while the lights are on, a chime sounds
—
Indicator the switch is set to AUTO and the when the driver’s door is opened.
exterior lights come on.

Fog Light • Comes on when the fog lights are

on. — —
Indicator *

• Comes on when all the operating

Auto High-
conditions of the auto high-beam 2 Auto High-Beam P. 189 —
Beam Indicator
are met.

* Not available on all models Continued 95

 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 96 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

• Blinks if the immobilizer system • Blinks - You cannot start the power
cannot recognize the key system. Set the power mode to VEHICLE
information. OFF, then select the ON mode again.
Indicator
Immobilizer • Repeatedly blinks - The system may be
System malfunctioning. Have your vehicle —
Instrument Panel

Indicator checked by a dealer.

• Do not attempt to alter this system or add
other devices to it. Electrical problems can
occur.
• Blinks when the security system
Indicator
Security System alarm has been set.
2 Security System Alarm P. 175 —
Alarm Indicator

96
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 97 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

• Comes on along with a beep when • While the indicator is on, press the
a problem is detected. A system (home) button to see the message again.
message on the driver information 2 Accessing contents in the main
interface appears at the same time. display P. 132
• Refer to the Indicators information in this

Instrument Panel
System chapter when a system message appears
Message —
on the driver information interface. Take
Indicator the appropriate action for the message.
• The driver information interface does not
return to the normal screen unless the
warning is canceled, or the left selector
wheel is pressed.
• Comes on when the ECON mode is
on.
ECON Mode
2 ECON Mode P. 401
Indicator

• Comes on when you press the

SPORT button.
SPORT Mode • The ambient meter remains lit up in 2 SPORT Mode P. 397
Indicator red as long as SPORT mode is on.

Continued 97
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 98 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

● Comes on if there is a problem with ● Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
ACC with Low Speed Follow. checked by a dealer.
● Indicator may come on temporarily ● Make sure the total load is within the
Adaptive when the Maximum Load Limit is Maximum Load Limit.
Instrument Panel

Cruise Control exceeded. 2 Maximum Load Limit P. 379

● ACC with Low Speed Follow has ● Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
(ACC) with Low
been automatically canceled. checked by a dealer.
Speed Follow
Indicator ● Comes on if the ACC with Low ● Drive a short distance at more than 12
(Amber) Speed Follow is deactivated mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go
temporarily after the 12-volt battery off. If it does not, have your vehicle
has been disconnected, then re- checked by a dealer.
connected.

98
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 99 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

Adaptive ● Comes on when you press the

Cruise Control MAIN button.
(ACC) with Low 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with
—
Speed Follow Low Speed Follow P. 428
Indicator

Instrument Panel
(Green)

Lane Keeping
● Comes on if there is a problem with ● Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
Assist System the LKAS. checked by a dealer.
(LKAS)
Indicator
(Amber)

Lane Keeping ● Comes on when you press the

Assist System MAIN button.
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
(LKAS) —
P. 446
Indicator
(Green)

Continued 99
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 100 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

● Comes on if there is a problem with ● Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
RDM, CMBSTM or blind spot checked by a dealer.
information system.
● Indicator may come on temporarily ● Make sure the total load is within the
Instrument Panel

when the Maximum Load Limit is Maximum Load Limit.

exceeded. 2 Maximum Load Limit P. 379
● Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.

Safety Support
Indicator
(Amber)

● Comes on if the RDM and CMBSTM ● Drive a short distance at more than 12
are deactivated temporarily after mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go
the 12-volt battery has been off. If it does not, have your vehicle
disconnected and then re- checked by a dealer.
connected.

100
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 101 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

● Comes on when RDM and/or ● Indicator may come on temporarily when
CMBSTM shuts itself off. passing through an enclosed space, such
as a tunnel.
● The area around the radar sensor is
blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your

Instrument Panel
vehicle in a safe place and wipe the debris
off with a soft cloth. Indicator may take
some time to go off after the radar sensor
is cleaned.
Safety Support ● Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if
Indicator the indicator does not go off even after
(Amber) you have cleaned the radar sensor.
2 Radar Sensor P. 467

● Stays on - The temperature inside the

camera is too high.
Use the climate control system to cool
down the camera.
The system activates when the
temperature inside the camera cools
down.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 465

Continued 101
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 102 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

● Comes on when RDM and/or ● Stays on - The area around the camera is
CMBSTM shuts itself off. blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your
vehicle in a safe place and wipe the debris
off with a soft cloth.
● Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if
Instrument Panel

the indicator and message are still

Safety Support displayed even after you have cleaned the
Indicator area around the camera.
(Amber) 2 Front Sensor Camera P. 465

● Comes on when mud, snow, or ice ● Comes on while driving - Something

has accumulated in the vicinity of may be interfering with the Blind spot
the blind spot information system information System sensor. Check the
sensor. vicinity of the Blind spot information
System sensor and remove any obstacles.
2 Blind spot information System P. 411

102
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 103 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

● Lights up in green when RDM,
CMBSTM and blind spot information
system are on.
● Lights up in green and gray when
RDM, CMBSTM or blind spot

Instrument Panel
information system are off.
● Lights up in gray when RDM,
2 RDM On and Off P. 456
Safety Support CMBSTM and blind spot information
2 CMBSTM On and Off P. 422
Indicator system are off. 2 Blind spot information System On
(Green/Gray) and Off P. 413

103
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 104 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

The following messages appear only on the driver information interface. Press the (home) button, select Warnings to see the message
again with the system message indicator on. 2Switching the Display P. 132

Message Condition Explanation

● Appears when the vehicle is no longer able to run ● Immediately stop in a safe place.
due to a malfunction.
Instrument Panel

● Appears when there is a risk that the vehicle will ● While the vehicle is stopped, apply the parking brake.
move unexpectedly after you have stopped due to a ● Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
malfunction with the vehicle.

● Appears when you set the power mode to ON again

and the vehicle is able to run.
2 Turning on the Power P. 382

104
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 105 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Message Condition Explanation

• Appears if any door or the trunk is not completely • Disappears when all doors and the trunk are closed.
closed.
• Appears if any door or the trunk is opened while
driving. The beeper sounds.

Instrument Panel
• Appears when the engine oil pressure is low. • Appears while driving - Immediately stop in a safe
place.
2 If the Low Oil Pressure Warning Appears P. 569

● Appears when the engine coolant temperature is ● Drive slowly to prevent overheating.
near its upper limit.

● Appears when the engine coolant temperature gets

abnormally high.
2 Overheating P. 567

Continued 105
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 106 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Message Condition Explanation

● Appears when the scheduled maintenance is due
soon.
● Consequently, Maintenance Due Now and 2 Maintenance Minder Messages on the Driver
Maintenance Past Due follow. Information Interface P. 495
Instrument Panel

● Appears when there is a problem with the sensor on ● Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
the 12-volt battery. 2 Checking the 12-Volt Battery P. 528

● Appears if there is a problem with the cooling ● Drive slowly to prevent overheating and have your
system. vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

● Appears when the fuel fill cap is loose or is not

installed.
2 Tighten Fuel Cap Message P. 571

106
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 107 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Message Condition Explanation

● Appears if the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph ● Stop the vehicle and close the fuel fill door.
(15 km/h) with the fuel fill door opened.
● Appears when the fuel fill door has been open for 30 ● Turn off the power system, reinstall the fuel cap, and
minutes. close the fuel fill door.

Instrument Panel
- If you still want to refuel, press the fuel fill door release
button to reopen the door.
• Appears if the vehicle is being driven in a manner
consistent with drowsy or inattentive driving.

2 Driver Attention Monitor P. 145

Continued 107
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 108 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Message Condition Explanation

• Appears if there is a problem with the automatic • Appears while driving - Manually turn the lights on,
lighting control system. and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Instrument Panel

• Appears if there is a problem with the headlights. • Appears while driving - The headlights may not be
on. When conditions allow you to drive safety, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

● Appears when the automatic brake hold system is

turned off.
2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 473

● Appears when the automatic brake hold button is ● Fasten the driver’s seat belt.
pressed without wearing the driver’s seat belt. 2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 473

108
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 109 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Message Condition Explanation

● Appears when the automatic brake hold button is ● Press the automatic brake hold button with the brake
pressed without depressing the brake pedal while pedal depressed.
the automatic brake hold is in operation. 2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 473

Instrument Panel
● Appears when the parking brake is applied
automatically while it is in operation.
2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 473
2 Parking Brake P. 468

● Appears if the automatic brake hold is automatically ● Immediately depress the brake pedal.
canceled while it is in operation.

● Appears when the electric parking brake switch is ● Press the electric parking brake switch with the brake
pressed without depressing the brake pedal while pedal depressed.
the electric parking brake is in operation. 2 Parking Brake P. 468

Continued 109
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 110 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Message Condition Explanation

● Appears when the power mode is in ACCESSORY.

—
Instrument Panel

● Appears after the driver’s door is opened when the ● Change the power mode to VEHICLE OFF.
power mode is in ACCESSORY. 2 POWER Button P. 181

● Appears when you close the door with the power ● Disappears when you bring the keyless remote back
mode in ON without the keyless remote inside the inside the vehicle and close the door.
vehicle. 2 Keyless Remote Reminder P. 183

● Appears when the keyless remote battery becomes

weak.
2 Replacing the Remote Battery P. 530

110
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 111 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Message Condition Explanation

● Appears if the keyless remote battery is too weak to ● Bring the back of the keyless remote into contact with
turn on the power system or the key is not within the POWER button.
operating range to turn on the power system. 2 If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak P. 562
A beeper sounds six times.

Instrument Panel
● Appears as soon as a problem is detected in the ● Appears constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a
keyless access system (smart entry system) or push dealer.
button starting system.

● Appears after you set the power mode to

ACCESSORY or ON.
2 Turning on the Power P. 382

• Appears if you press the POWER button while the • The message will disappear after six seconds or when
vehicle is moving. the power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF.

Continued 111
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 112 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Message Condition Explanation

• Appears when the power system temperature is low. • Your vehicle has less ability to accelerate and may be
harder to start moving on an incline.
• Disappears once you start driving as the High Voltage
battery warms up.
Instrument Panel

• Appears when the power system temperature is • Your vehicle has less ability to accelerate and may be
high. harder to start moving on an incline.
• Park in a safe place, and cool the system down.
2 Overheating P. 567

• Appears if the power system is in diagnostic mode. • You may notice a decrease in available power. Have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.

• Appears if there is a problem with the acoustic • Have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
vehicle alerting system.

112
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 113 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Message Condition Explanation

• Appears when you press the fuel fill door release • The display changes to Ready when the fuel vapor
button. pressure inside the fuel tank is released. You can start
refueling once Ready appears.
2 Refueling P. 485

Instrument Panel
• Appears when the vehicle is ready to be refueled.

• Appears when the high voltage battery and other • You must wait for an increase in the ambient
system control temperatures are too low to operate temperature or move the vehicle to a warmer location.
(approx. –40°F or below). • Consult a dealer if necessary.

• Appears when the high voltage battery temperature • You can start the power system and use the climate
is too low to operate (approx. −22°F or below). control system to warm up the interior, which will also
warm the High Voltage battery enough for you to drive
the vehicle.

Continued 113
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 114 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Message Condition Explanation

• Appears when the high voltage battery charge is • Contact a dealer immediately.
running extremely low.
Instrument Panel

114
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 115 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Message Condition Explanation

• Appears when you failed to select EV mode or EV • EV mode is available once the condition is improved or
mode is automatically canceled. the cause that canceled EV mode is cleared.
• The cause may be shown with the following
message:
- Battery Temperature At Limit.

Instrument Panel
- Battery Charge Too Low.
- Engine Too Cold.
- Cabin Being Heated.
- Speed Too High.
- Hard Acceleration Requested.
• Appears when EV mode has been automatically
canceled.
2 EV Button P. 14

• Appears if the engine needs to be started when you

press the EV button.
—

Continued 115
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 116 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Message Condition Explanation

• Appears when you try to change the shift position • Release your foot off the accelerator pedal, then select
without releasing your foot off the accelerator pedal. a shift button.
Instrument Panel

• Appears when the (P button is pressed while the • Make sure that the vehicle comes to a stop before
vehicle is moving. operating the select button.
• Appears if you put the transmission into (R while
the vehicle is moving forward, or into (D while the
vehicle is reversing.

• Appears when you set the power mode to ON • Fasten the seat belt properly before you start to drive.
without fastening the driver’s seat belt. 2 Shift Operation P. 393
• Appears when you change the shift position after
(P has been automatically selected with the driver’s
door open, the driver’s seat belt unfastened, then
the brake pedal is released.

• Appears when you try to change the shift position • Depress the brake pedal, then select a shift button.
without depressing the brake pedal.

116
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 117 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Message Condition Explanation

• Appears when you set the power mode to OFF while • Immediately stop in a safe place, set the parking brake,
driving. then restart the power system. If the message
disappears, continue driving.

Instrument Panel
• Appears if the vehicle is stopped and the driver’s seat • When the power system is ON or when you are parking
belt is unfastened, as there is a possibility that the or exiting the vehicle, put the transmission into (P
vehicle may roll. before releasing the brake pedal.
2 Shift Operation P. 393

• Appears if you depress the accelerator pedal when • Release the accelerator pedal. After that, depress the
the transmission is in (N . brake pedal and change the transmission position.

● Appears if the shift position is repeatedly changed ● Wait awhile, then change the shift position.
between (P and another position.
● Appears if the 12V battery is not charged enough to ● Keep the power system on and wait awhile.
make it possible to change shift positions. ● The battery may be nearing the end of its life.
Have it checked by a dealer.

Continued 117
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 118 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Message Condition Explanation

• Appears for a few seconds if you have not pressed

the (N button long enough to initiate Neutral-Hold
mode. 2 If you want to keep the transmission in (N
position [car wash mode] P. 395
Instrument Panel

• Appears when you press and hold (N button for • Disappears when you set the shift position to a gear
more than two seconds. other than (N .
2 If you want to keep the transmission in (N
position [car wash mode] P. 395

118
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 119 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Message Condition Explanation

• Appears if there is a problem with the auto high- • Manually operate the headlight switch.
beam. • If you are driving with the high-beam headlights when
this happens, the headlights are changed to low beams.

Instrument Panel
● Appears when ACC with Low Speed Follow has been ● You can resume the set speed after the condition that
automatically canceled. caused ACC with Low Speed Follow to cancel improves.
Press the RES/+ button.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow P. 428

● Flashes when the system senses a likely collision with ● Take the appropriate means to prevent a collision (apply
a vehicle in front of you. the brakes, change lanes, etc.)
2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
P. 418
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow P. 428

Continued 119
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 120 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Message Condition Explanation

● Appears when ACC with Low Speed Follow is ● Reduce the speed, then reset ACC with Low Speed
canceled due to excessive high vehicle speed. Follow.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow P. 428
Instrument Panel

● Appears when the speed of the vehicle is too high for ● Reduce the speed, then set ACC with Low Speed
you to set ACC with Low Speed Follow. Follow.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow P. 428

● Appears if ACC with Low Speed Follow is canceled ● Immediately depress the brake pedal.
while your vehicle is automatically stopped by ACC
with Low Speed Follow.

● Appears when pressing the RES/+ or SET/− button ● ACC with Low Speed Follow cannot be set.
while the vehicle is moving and the brake pedal is 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
depressed. Follow P. 428

120
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 121 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Message Condition Explanation

● Appears when the distance between your vehicle ● ACC with Low Speed Follow has been automatically
and the vehicle ahead of you is too close while ACC canceled.
with Low Speed Follow is in operation. 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow P. 428

Instrument Panel
● Appears when pressing the RES/+ or SET/− button ● ACC with Low Speed Follow cannot be set.
while the distance between your vehicle and the 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
vehicle ahead of you is too close. Follow P. 428

● Appears when the parking brake is applied ● ACC with Low Speed Follow has been automatically
automatically while ACC with Low Speed Follow is canceled.
in operation. 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow P. 428
2 Parking Brake P. 468

● Appears when pressing the RES/+ or SET/− button ● ACC with Low Speed Follow cannot be set.
while the parking brake is applied. 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow P. 428
2 Parking Brake P. 468

Continued 121
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 122 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Message Condition Explanation

● Appears if the VSA® or traction control function ● ACC with Low Speed Follow has been automatically
operates while ACC with Low Speed Follow is in canceled.
operation. 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow P. 428
Instrument Panel

● Appears just before the ACC with Low Speed Follow

is automatically canceled when you are descending a
long hill etc (The following interval is automatically
set to extra long).

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow P. 428
● Appears when the ACC with Low Speed Follow has
been automatically canceled.

● Appears when you are descending a long hill etc and

you press the RES/+ or SET/− button.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow P. 428

122
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 123 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Message Condition Explanation

● Appears when the driver’s seat belt is unfastened ● ACC with Low Speed Follow has been automatically
while your vehicle is automatically stopped by ACC canceled.
with Low Speed Follow. 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow P. 428

Instrument Panel
● Appears when pressing the RES/+ or SET/− button ● ACC with Low Speed Follow cannot be set.
while the driver’s seat belt is unfastened. 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow P. 428

● Appears when the transmission is put into any ● ACC with Low Speed Follow has been automatically
position other than (D while ACC with Low Speed canceled.
Follow is in operation. 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow P. 428

● Appears when pressing the RES/+ or SET/− button ● ACC with Low Speed Follow cannot be set.
while the transmission is in any position other than 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
(D . Follow P. 428

Continued 123
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 124 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Message Condition Explanation

● Appears when the vehicle is stopped on a very steep ● ACC with Low Speed Follow has been automatically
slope while ACC with Low Speed Follow is in canceled.
operation. 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow P. 428
Instrument Panel

● Appears when pressing the RES/+ or SET/− button ● ACC with Low Speed Follow cannot be set.
while the vehicle is stopped on a very steep slope. 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow P. 428

124
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 125 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Message Condition Explanation

● Appears if anything covers the radar sensor cover ● When the radar sensor gets dirty, stop your vehicle in a
and prevents the sensor from detecting a vehicle in safe place, and wipe off dirt using a soft cloth. The
front. message may take some time to go off.
● May appear when driving in bad weather (rain, ● Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the message
snow, fog, etc.) does not disappear even after you clean the sensor

Instrument Panel
cover.
2 Radar Sensor P. 467

● Appears if the temperature inside the front sensor ● Use the climate control system to cool down the
camera is too high and the ACC with Low Speed camera.
Follow, LKAS, traffic sign recognition system and ● Disappears - The camera has been cooled down and
auto high-beam cannot be activated. the systems are activated normally.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 465

● Appears if the area around the front sensor camera is ● When the front window gets dirty, stop your vehicle in
blocked by dirt, mud, etc and be prevented from a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth.
detecting a vehicle in front. ● Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the message
● May appear when driving in bad weather (rain, does not disappear even after you cleaned the area
snow, fog, etc.) around the camera.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 465

Continued 125
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 126 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Message Condition Explanation

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) ● Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving.
● Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a detected 2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 446
lane. The steering wheel vibrates rapidly.
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System ● Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving.
Instrument Panel

● Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a detected 2 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System P. 454
lane. ● You can change the setting for the road departure
When you selected Warning Only mitigation system. Narrow, Normal, Wide, and
- The steering wheel vibrates rapidly when the Warning Only can be selected.
2 Customized Features P. 326
vehicle is drifting out of a detected lane.
When you selected Narrow, Normal or Wide
- The steering wheel vibrates rapidly when the
vehicle is drifting out of a detected lane. The system
also steers the vehicle to help you remain within
your driving lane.
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
When you selected Narrow
● Appears when the vehicle is likely to drive out of a
—
detected lane.
The RDM system also steers the vehicle to help you
remain within your driving lane.

126
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 127 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Message Condition Explanation

● Blinks when you fail to steer the vehicle. The beeper ● Operate the steering wheel to resume the LKAS.
sounds simultaneously.

Instrument Panel
● Appears when the LKAS is in operation, or the LKAS ● If any other system indicators come on, such as the
button is pressed, but there is a problem with a VSA®, ABS and brake system, take appropriate action.
system related to the LKAS. The LKAS cancels 2 Indicators P. 82
automatically. The beeper sounds simultaneously.

● Appears if the ECON mode or SPORT mode cannot

be changed due to certain situations, such as a
system error or adverse driving conditions. 2 ECON Mode P. 401
2 SPORT Mode P. 397

Continued 127
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 128 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Message Condition Explanation

● Appears when you unlock and open the driver’s door
while the power system is on by remote engine start.
2 Remote Engine Start with Vehicle Feedback P. 384
Instrument Panel

128
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 129 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Gauges and Driver Information Interface

Gauges
Gauges include the speedometer, fuel gauge, POWER/CHARGE gauge, High
Voltage battery charge level gauge, and related indicators. They are displayed when
the power mode is in ON.

■ Speedometer 1Speedometer
You can show another speed unit on the driver
Displays your driving speed in mph or km/h. information interface (sub display) and set the

Instrument Panel
displayed measurements to read in either mph and
km/h.
2 POWER/CHARGE Gauge P. 131

■ Fuel Gauge 1Fuel Gauge

NOTICE
Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.
You should refuel when the reading approaches E .
Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire,
damaging the catalytic converter.

The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from

the fuel gauge reading.

Continued 129
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 130 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuGauges

■ High Voltage Battery Charge Level Gauge 1High Voltage Battery Charge Level Gauge
The high voltage battery charge level may decrease
Shows the remaining high voltage battery charge level. under the following conditions:
• When the 12-volt battery has been replaced.
• When the 12-volt battery has been disconnected.
• When the high voltage battery control system
corrects its reading.
Instrument Panel

The charge level reading will be corrected

automatically while driving.

Changes in the temperature of the high voltage

battery can increase or decrease the battery’s
charging capacity. If temperature changes cause the
battery’s capacity to change, the number of
indicators in the battery charge level gauge may also
change, even if the amount of charge remains the
same.

130
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 131 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuGauges

■ POWER/CHARGE Gauge
■ Electric motor
The power level supplied to the electric motor
is displayed by the readings on the POWER
side.

Instrument Panel
■ Battery charge in progress
The power level supplied to the high voltage
battery is displayed by readings on the
CHARGE side.

■ Speed Unit
Enables you to show another speed unit on
the driver information interface and set the
displayed measurements to read in either mph
and km/h.

Select the Gauge Only screen.

2 Accessing contents in the main display
P. 132
Press and hold the left selector wheel when
you select the Gauge Only on the driver
information interface. Each time you do this,
the unit will change from mph to km/h or vice
versa. After this, a confirmation screen will
appear for a few seconds.

131
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 132 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

Driver Information Interface

The driver information interface shows the odometer, trip meter, outside
temperature indicator, and other gauges.
It also displays important messages such as warnings and other helpful information.

■ Switching the Display 1Switching the Display

If a warning initially appears, you can - after reading
■ Accessing contents in the main display it - press the (home) button to proceed
Instrument Panel

Press the (home) button, then roll the left selector wheel to scroll to the content immediately to the content or to any other
you want to see. Press the left selector wheel to see detailed information. warning(s).

To go back to the previous screen, press the

(back) button.

To go back to the home screen, press the (home)

button.

You can edit, add, or delete the meter contents using

the audio/information screen.
2 Customizing the Meter P. 245

132
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 133 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

P. 131 P. 141

Instrument Panel
P. 151 P. 149

P. 153 P. 141

P. 136 P. 145

P. 150 P. 148

Left Selector
Wheel P. 138 P. 144
(back) Button
(home) Button
P. 143 P. 140

Roll the left

selector wheel.
P. 142

Continued 133
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 134 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

■ Sub display
Press the TRIP button to change the display.

TRIP
Instrument Panel

TRIP TRIP

Odometer Trip A Trip B

TRIP Button Outside temperature

■ Odometer
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers that your vehicle has accumulated.

134
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 135 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

■ Trip Meter 1Trip Meter

Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers driven since the last reset. Meters A pressing the TRIP Button.
and B can be used to measure two separate trips.

■ Resetting a trip meter

To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the TRIP Button. The trip meter
is reset to 0.0.

Instrument Panel
■ Outside Temperature 1Outside Temperature
The temperature sensor is in the front bumper.
Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit. Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can
affect the temperature reading when your vehicle
■ Adjusting the outside temperature display speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).
Adjust the temperature reading by up to ±5°F if the temperature reading seems
incorrect. It may take several minutes for the display to be
updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.
Use the customized features in the driver information interface or audio/information
screen to correct the temperature.
2 Customized Features P. 326

Continued 135
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 136 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

■ Range & Fuel

Roll the left selector wheel to switch between trip computer A and trip computer B.

Range
Instrument Panel

Average Fuel
Economy
Instant Fuel
Trip Computer A Economy
Trip Meter

Left Selector Wheel

Trip Computer B

Roll the left

selector wheel.

136
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 137 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

■ Trip meter 1Trip meter

Shows the total number of miles or kilometers driven since the last reset. Meters A Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by
and B can be used to measure two separate trips. rolling the left selector wheel.

Resetting a trip meter Resetting the trip meter in the Range & Fuel, the trip
meter in the sub display resets at the same time.
To reset the trip meter, display it, press the left selector wheel and then select Reset.
u The trip meter is reset to 0.0.

Instrument Panel
■ Average fuel economy (Avg. Fuel) 1Average fuel economy (Avg. Fuel)
Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg or l/100 km. You can change when the average fuel economy is
The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the average fuel reset.
economy is also reset. 2 Customized Features P. 326

■ Instant fuel economy

Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg or l/100 km.

■ Range
Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This estimated
distance is based on the vehicle’s current fuel economy.

Continued 137
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 138 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

■ Speed & Time

Roll the left selector wheel to switch between trip computer A and trip computer B.
Instrument Panel

Average Speed

Elapsed Time

Trip Computer A Trip Meter

Left Selector Wheel Trip Computer B

Roll the left

selector wheel.

138
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 139 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

■ Trip meter
2 Trip meter P. 137

■ Elapsed Time 1Elapsed Time

Shows the time elapsed since the last time Trip A or Trip B was reset. You can change when to reset the elapsed time.
2 Customized Features P. 326
■ Average Speed (Avg. Speed)

Instrument Panel
Shows the average speed in mph or km/h since the last time Trip A or Trip B was 1Average Speed (Avg. Speed)
reset. You can change when to reset the average speed.
2 Customized Features P. 326

Continued 139
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 140 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

■ Navigation 1Navigation
You can select whether to have the turn-by-turn
■ Compass display come on or not during the route guidance.
Shows the compass screen. 2 Customized Features P. 326

Models with navigation system

When the compass or turn-by-turn directions are
Instrument Panel

displayed, you can control some navigation system

functions on the driver information interface by
scrolling the left selector wheel.
2 Refer to the navigation system
Compass

■ Turn-by-Turn Directions
When driving guidance is provided by the
navigation system *, Android Auto or Apple
CarPlay, turn-by-turn directions to your
destination appear.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
2 Android AutoTM P. 298
2 Apple CarPlayTM P. 294

Turn-By-Turn Driving Directions

140 * Not available on all models

22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 141 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

■ Warnings 1Warnings
If there are no Warnings, None message appears on
2 Driver Information Interface Warning and
the driver information interface.
Information Messages P. 104

Instrument Panel
(Example)

■ Maintenance
■ Oil Life
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance
MinderTM.
2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 493

Continued 141
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 142 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

■ Phone
Shows the current phone information.
2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 349
Instrument Panel

142
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 143 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

■ Audio
Shows the current audio information.
2 Audio System Basic Operation P. 230

Instrument Panel
Continued 143
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 144 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

■ Traffic Sign Recognition System

Shows the traffic sign recognition system.
2 Traffic Sign Recognition System P. 459
Instrument Panel

144
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 145 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

■ Driver Attention Monitor 1Driver Attention Monitor

The Driver Attention Monitor cannot always detect if
The Driver Attention Monitor analyzes steering inputs to determine if the vehicle is the driver is tired or inattentive.
being driven in a manner consistent with drowsy or inattentive driving. If it Regardless of the system’s feedback, if you are
determines that the vehicle is being driven in such a manner, it will display the feeling tired, stop in a safe location and rest for as
degree of the driver’s attention on the driver information interface. long as needed.

Instrument Panel
Driver Information
Interface

Left Selector
Wheel

(home) Button

When you select Driver Attention on the

driver information interface, bars on it light up
in white to indicate the degree of the driver’s
attention.
2 Accessing contents in the main display
P. 132

Level

Continued 145
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 146 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

If two bars light up, the Driver Attention

Level Low message will appear.
Instrument Panel

If one bar lights up, the Driver Attention

Level Low. Time For A Break message will
appear, a beep will sound, and the steering
wheel will vibrate.
If this message appears, stop in a safe location
and rest for as long as needed.
The message will disappear when the left
selector wheel is pressed or when the system
has determined that the driver is driving
normally.
If the driver does not take a break and the
monitor continues to detect that the driver is
very tired, the message will appear again after
approximately 15 minutes, accompanied by a
beep and steering wheel vibrations.
The message does not appear when the
traveling time is 30 minutes or less.

146
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 147 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

■ The Driver Attention Monitor resets when:

• The power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF.
• The driver unfastens the seat belt and opens the door while the vehicle is stopped.

■ For the Driver Attention Monitor to function: 1For the Driver Attention Monitor to function:
• The vehicle must be traveling above 25 mph (40 km/h). The bars on the driver information interface remain
• The electric power steering (EPS) system indicator must be off.

Instrument Panel
grayed out unless the Driver Attention Monitor is
functioning.
■ Depending on driving conditions or other factors, the Driver Attention
Monitor may not function in the following circumstances:
• The steering assist function of the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) is active.
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 446
• The condition of the road is poor, e.g. the surface is unpaved or bumpy.
• It is windy.
• The driver is frequently operating the vehicle in an assertive manner such as
changing lanes or accelerating.

■ Customizing
You can change the Driver Attention Monitor settings. Select Tactile And Audible
Alert, Tactile Alert, or OFF.
2 Customized Features P. 326

Continued 147
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 148 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

■ Driving Support Information 1Driving Support Information

In case ACC with Low Speed Follow is not activated,
Shows the distance between your vehicle and when the distance between your vehicle and the
the vehicle detected ahead. vehicle ahead becomes too small, the section behind
Informs you whether ACC with Low Speed the vehicle icon turns amber and alerts you.
Follow and/or LKAS is activated or not. If ACC
with Low Speed Follow is activated, the set
Instrument Panel

following interval is displayed. If LKAS is

activated, the displayed lane marks change to
indicate that LKAS is activated.
Icon of vehicle ahead
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low
Distance of vehicle ahead
Speed Follow P. 428
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 446
Amber gradation
When ACC and LKAS is in On
Set Vehicle Interval

ACC on: The section behind the

vehicle icon turns green.
LKAS on: The lane outlines
appear on the display.
LKAS starts: The lane lines
change to solid ones.
LKAS suspend: The lane lines
change to dotted ones.

148
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 149 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

■ Safety Support 1Safety Support

If a system is indicated by the color amber, have your
Indicates the state of RDM, CMBSTM and blind spot information system, such as On, vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
Off, or Failure, by color and letters.
To turn on or off each system, first rotate the left
The following colors indicate the state of any of the above mentioned systems: selector wheel to switch displays. From the next
• Green: The system is on. display you can select which system to turn on or off.

Instrument Panel
2 RDM On and Off P. 456
• Gray: The system is off.
2 CMBSTM On and Off P. 422
• Amber: There is a problem with the system.
2 Blind spot information System On and Off
P. 413
Area Info for
CMBSTM You can also confirm the state of the each function
by the color of the safety support indicator.
2 Safety Support Indicator (Amber) P. 100
CMBSTM Icon RDM Icon and 2 Safety Support Indicator (Green/Gray)
and State Info State Info P. 103

Area Info
for RDM
Blind spot
information
Area Info for system Icon
Blind spot and State Info
information
system

Continued 149
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 150 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

■ Average Fuel Economy Records

Shows the average fuel economy for the last
three driving cycles (1-3), and the current
driving cycle (0) in mpg or l/100 km.

Each time you set the power mode to ON, the

Instrument Panel

display is updated, and the oldest record is

deleted.

150
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 151 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

■ Eco Drive Display/Drive Cycle Score/Lifetime Points

■ Eco Drive Display 1Eco Drive Display
The vehicle icon on the display moves forward or backward while driving. Switch between the average fuel economy A and
The more aggressive the acceleration is, the further the icon moves forward. average fuel economy B by rolling the left selector
The more aggressive the deceleration is, the further the icon moves backward. wheel.
Keep the icon near the center of the circle for better fuel economy while driving.

Instrument Panel
Aggressive Moderate Fuel-Efficient Moderate Aggressive
Deceleration Deceleration Driving Acceleration Acceleration

Vehicle Icon

Average Fuel
Economy

Continued 151
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 152 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

■ Drive Cycle Score/Lifetime Points

Appear for a few seconds when you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF. Each has
three stages. Depending on your driving style, the leaf icon(s) and the gauge
increase or decrease to indicate that you have reached a different stage of fuel
economy.

Drive Cycle Score

Instrument Panel

Advancing Advancing
to 2nd to 3rd
Stage Stage

Receding Receding
to 2nd to 3rd
Stage Stage
Lifetime Points

■ Resetting the Drive Cycle Score

1. Make sure the shift position is in (P . Turn the power mode to ON.
2. If ECON mode is on, press the ECON button to turn it off.
3. Turn the power mode to VEHICLE OFF.
4. Turn the power mode to ON again.
u Make sure to complete steps from 4 through 6 within 30 seconds.
5. Depress the brake pedal twice.
u The color of the ambient meter will change from white to green.
u When the Fuel Efficiency Backlight setting on the audio/information screen
is off, the color stays white.
6. Press the ECON button twice.
u The color of the ambient meter will turn to monochrome.
7. Turn the power mode to VEHICLE OFF.

152
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 153 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

■ Power Flow Monitor 1Power Flow Monitor

While the vehicle is stationary with the engine
Displays the power flow of the motor and engine, indicating the vehicle’s power running, the following may appear on the driver
source and whether the battery is being charged. information interface.

Engine ON
Power Flow

Instrument Panel
Engine Engine OFF

Hybrid (HV) Electric Vehicle (EV) Engine (Direct Drive)

Power is supplied Power is supplied Power is being supplied to
by the motor and by the motor. charge the High Voltage
the engine. battery and supply power
to the wheels.

Regeneration Power is being The engine is running

The motor is supplied by the and the motor is
charging the High engine only. charging the High
Voltage battery. Voltage battery.

153
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 154 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

154
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 155 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Controls
This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving.

Clock .................................................. 156 Security System Alarm...................... 175 Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
Locking and Unlocking the Doors Opening and Closing the Windows ...177 Button ........................................194
Key .................................................. 157 Moonroof * ................................................ 180 Brightness Control ........................... 195
Low Keyless Remote Signal Strength ...159 Operating the Switches Around the Adjusting the Steering Wheel .......... 196
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Steering Wheel Adjusting the Mirrors
Outside .......................................... 160 POWER Button................................. 181 Interior Rearview Mirror ................... 197
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Turn Signals ..................................... 184 Power Door Mirrors ......................... 198
Inside ............................................. 167 Light Switches.................................. 185 Adjusting the Seats .......................... 199
Childproof Door Locks ..................... 169 Fog Lights * ...................................... 188 Interior Lights/Interior Convenience
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .......... 170 Daytime Running Lights ................... 188 Items ................................................ 207
Opening and Closing the Trunk....... 171 Auto High-Beam .............................. 189 Climate Control System
Security System Wipers and Washers ........................ 192 Using Automatic Climate Control .... 216
Immobilizer System .......................... 174 Automatic Climate Control Sensors... 222

* Not available on all models 155

 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 156 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Clock
Adjusting the Clock
You can adjust the time manually in the audio/information screen with the power 1Clock
mode in ON. The clock is automatically updated through the audio
system.
■ Adjusting the Time You can customize the clock display to show the 12
■ Using the Settings menu on the audio/ hour clock or 24 hour clock.
information screen 2 Customized Features P. 326
1. Press the , then select Settings.
2. Select System. 1Using the Settings menu on the audio/information screen
3. Select Day & Time. You can also adjust the clock by touching the clock
Controls

4. Select Set Date & Time. displayed on the upper right corner of the display or
the Clock icon on the home screen.
5. Select Automatic Date & Time, then
1. Touch the clock on the display.
select OFF. The clock screen of the select face-type appears.
2. Select Settings.
To adjust time: 3. Select Day & Time.
6. Select Set Time. 4. Select Set Date & Time.
7. Selecting 3 / 4 . 5. Select Automatic Date & Time, then select OFF.
8. Select Save to set the time. 6. Select Set Date or Set Time.
7. Adjusting the dates, hours and minutes by
selecting 3 / 4 .
To adjust date: 8. Select Save to set the time.
6. Select Set Date.
7. Selecting 3 / 4 . You can customize the date display to MM/DD/
8. Select Save to set the date. YYYY, DD/MM/YYYY or YYYY/MM/DD.
2 Customized Features P. 326

156
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 157 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Locking and Unlocking the Doors

Key
This vehicle comes with the following key: 1Key
Use the keys to turn on and off the power All the keys have an immobilizer system. The
system, and to lock and unlock all the doors immobilizer system helps to protect against vehicle
and to open the trunk. theft.
2 Immobilizer System P. 174

Follow the advice below to prevent damage to the

keys:
• Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in
locations with high temperature or high humidity.
• Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them.

Controls
• Keep the keys away from liquids, dust and sand.
• Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the
battery.
If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the power
system may not activate, and the remote transmitter
may not work.
If the keys do not work properly, have them
inspected by a dealer.

You can remotely turn the power system on using the

remote engine start.
2 Remote Engine Start with Vehicle
Feedback P. 384

Continued 157
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 158 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuKey

■ Built-in Key
The built-in key can be used to lock/unlock the
Release Knob
doors when the keyless remote battery
becomes weak and the power door lock/
unlock operation is disabled.

To remove the built-in key, slide the release

knob and then pull out the key. To reinstall
the built-in key, push the built-in key into the
Controls

Built-in Key
keyless remote until it clicks.

■ Key Number Tag 1Key Number Tag

Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a
Contains a number that you will need if you safe place outside of your vehicle.
purchase a replacement key. If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a
dealer.

If you lose your key and you cannot activate the

power system, contact a dealer.

158
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 159 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLow Keyless Remote Signal Strength

Low Keyless Remote Signal Strength

The vehicle transmits radio waves to locate the keyless remote when locking/ 1Low Keyless Remote Signal Strength
unlocking the doors, opening the trunk, or to activate the power system. Communication between the keyless remote and the
vehicle consumes the keyless remote’s battery.
In the following cases, locking/unlocking the doors, opening the trunk, or activating Battery life is about two years, but this varies
the power system may be inhibited or operation may be unstable: depending on regularity of use.
The battery is consumed whenever the keyless
• Strong radio waves are being transmitted by nearby equipment.
remote is receiving strong radio waves. Avoid placing
• You are carrying the keyless remote together with telecommunications it near electrical appliances such as televisions and
equipment, laptop computers, cell phones, or wireless devices. personal computers.
• A metallic object is touching or covering the keyless remote.

Controls
159
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 160 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

■ Using the Keyless Access System 1Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
If the interior light switch is in the door activated
When you carry the keyless remote, you can position, the interior light comes on when you unlock
lock/unlock the doors and open the trunk. the doors.
You can lock/unlock the doors within a radius No doors opened: The light fades out after 30
of about 32 inches (80 cm) of the outside door seconds.
handle. You can open the trunk within about Doors relocked: The light goes off immediately.
2 Interior Lights P. 207
32 inches (80 cm) radius from the trunk
release button.
1Using the Keyless Access System
Controls

If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of

unlocking the vehicle with the keyless access system,
■ Locking the doors the doors will automatically relock.
Touch the door lock sensor on the front door.
u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper You can lock or unlock doors using the keyless access
sounds; all the doors lock; and the system only when the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF.
security system sets.
The keyless access system will not lock the vehicle
when a door is open.

Door Lock Sensor

160
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 161 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

■ Unlocking the doors and trunk 1Using the Keyless Access System
Grab the driver’s door handle: • Do not leave the keyless remote in the vehicle
u The driver’s door unlocks. when you get out. Carry it with you.
u Some exterior lights flash twice and the • Even if you are not carrying the keyless remote, you
beeper sounds twice. can lock/unlock the doors while someone else with
Grab the front passenger’s door handle: the remote is within range.
• The door may be unlocked if the door handle is
u All doors unlock.
covered with water in heavy rain or in a car wash if
u Some exterior lights flash twice and the the keyless remote is within range.
beeper sounds twice. • If you grip a front door handle or touch a door lock

Controls
sensor wearing gloves, the door sensor may be
Trunk Release Button
Press the trunk release button: slow to respond or may not respond by locking or
u The trunk unlocks and opens. unlocking the doors.
u Some exterior lights flash twice and the • After locking the door, you have up to two seconds
during which you can pull the door handle to
beeper sounds.
confirm whether the door is locked. If you need to
2 Using the Trunk Release Button P. 172
unlock the door immediately after locking it, wait
at least two seconds before gripping the handle,
otherwise the door will not unlock.
• The door might not open if you pull it immediately
after gripping the door handle. Grip the handle
again and confirm that the door is unlocked before
pulling the handle.
• Even within the 32 inches (80 cm) radius, you may
not be able to lock/unlock the doors with the keyless
remote if it is above or below the outside handle.
• The keyless remote may not operate if it is too close
to the door and door glass.

The light flash, beep and door unlock mode settings

can be customized using the audio/information
screen.
2 Customized Features P. 326
Continued 161
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 162 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

■ Locking the doors (Walk away auto 1Locking the doors (Walk away auto lock®)
lock®) The auto lock function is set to OFF as the factory
When you walk away from the vehicle with all default setting. The auto lock function can be set to
doors closed while carrying the keyless ON using the audio/information screen.
remote, the doors will automatically lock. If you set the auto lock function to ON using the
audio/information screen, only the remote
The auto lock function activates when all
transmitter that was used to unlock the driver’s door
doors are closed, and the keyless remote is
prior to the setting change can activate auto lock.
within about 5 feet (1.5 m) radius of the 2 Customized Features P. 326
The activation range of outside door handle or trunk release button.
the auto lock function is
Exit vehicle while carrying keyless remote and
Controls

about 5 feet (1.5 m) After the auto lock function has been activated,
close door(s). when you stay within the locking/unlocking
1. While within about 5 feet (1.5 m) radius of operation range, the indicator on the keyless remote
will continue to flash until the doors are locked.
the vehicle.
u The beeper sounds; the auto lock When you stay beside the vehicle within the
function will be activated. operation range, the doors will automatically lock
2. Carry the keyless remote beyond about 5 approximately 30 seconds after the auto lock
feet (1.5 m) from the vehicle and remain function activating beeper sounds.
outside this range for 2 or more seconds.
u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper When you open a door after the auto lock function
activating beeper sounds, the auto lock function will
sounds; all doors will then lock.
be delayed until all doors are closed.

Under the following circumstances, the auto lock

function will not activate:
• The remote is inside the vehicle.
uThe beeper will not sound.
• The remote is taken out of its operational range
before all the doors are closed.
uThe beeper will sound.

162
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 163 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

To temporarily deactivate the function: 1Locking the doors (Walk away auto lock®)
1. Set the power mode to OFF. The auto lock function does not operate when any of
2. Open the driver’s door. the following conditions are met.
3. Using the master door lock switch, operate • The keyless remote is inside the vehicle.
the lock as follows: • A door or the hood is not closed.
Lock Unlock Lock Unlock. • The power mode is set to any mode other than
OFF.
u The beeper sounds and the function is
• The keyless remote is not located within a radius of
deactivated. about 5 feet (1.5 m) from the vehicle when you get
out of the vehicle and close the doors.
To restore the function:

Controls
• Set the power mode to ON. Auto lock function operation stop beeper
• Lock the vehicle without using the auto lock After the auto lock function has been activated, the
auto lock operation stop beeper sounds for
function.
approximately two seconds in the following cases.
• With the keyless remote on you, move out • The keyless remote is put inside the vehicle through
of the auto lock function operation range. a window.
• Open any door. • You are located too close to the vehicle.
• The keyless remote is put inside the trunk.
If the warning beeper sounds, check that you are
carrying the keyless remote. Then, open/close a door
and confirm the auto lock activation beeper sounds
once.

Continued 163
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 164 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

■ Using the Remote Transmitter 1Using the Remote Transmitter

If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of
■ Locking the doors unlocking the vehicle with the remote transmitter,
LED Lock Button
Press the lock button. the doors will automatically relock.
Once: You can change the relock timer setting.
u Some exterior lights flash, all the doors 2 Customized Features P. 326
lock, and the security system sets.
You can lock or unlock doors using the remote
Twice (within five seconds after the first
transmitter only when the power mode is in VEHICLE
push):
OFF.
u The beeper sounds and verifies the
Controls

security system is set. The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so

Unlock Button the operating range may vary depending on the
■ Unlocking the doors surroundings.
Press the unlock button.
The remote will not lock the vehicle when a door is
Once:
open.
u Some exterior lights flash twice, and the
driver’s door unlocks. If the distance at which the remote transmitter works
Twice: varies, the battery is probably low.
u The remaining doors unlock. If the LED does not come on when you press a
button, the battery is dead.
2 Replacing the Remote Battery P. 530

You can customize the door unlock mode setting.

2 Customized Features P. 326

164
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 165 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

■ Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key 1Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
When you lock the driver’s door with a key, all the
If the lock or unlock button of the keyless remote does not work, use the key other doors lock at the same time. When unlocking,
instead. the driver’s door unlocks first. Turn the key a second
2 Replacing the Remote Battery P. 530 time within a few seconds to unlock the remaining
Fully insert the key and turn it. doors.

Lock You can customize the door unlock mode setting.

2 Customized Features P. 326

Controls
Unlock

Continued 165
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 166 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

■ Locking a Door Without Using a Key 1Locking a Door Without Using a Key
When you lock the driver’s door, all the other doors
If you do not have the key on you, or if for some reason you cannot lock a door using lock at the same time.
the key, you can lock the door without it.
■ Locking the front doors Before locking a door, make sure that the key is not
Push the lock tab forward a or push the inside the vehicle.
master door lock switch in the lock direction
b, and close the door.

■ Locking the rear doors

Controls

Push the lock tab forward and close the door.

■ Lockout prevention system

The doors cannot be locked when the keyless remote is inside the vehicle.

166
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 167 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

■ Using the Lock Tab 1Using the Lock Tab
When you lock the door using the lock tab on the
■ Locking a door driver’s door, all of the other doors lock at the same
To Lock Lock Tab
Push the lock tab forward. time.
When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the
■ Unlocking a door driver’s door, only the driver’s door will unlock.
Pull the lock tab rearward.
To Unlock

Controls
Continued 167
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 168 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

■ Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle 1Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle
The front door inner handles are designed to allow
Pull the front door inner handle. front seat occupants to open the door in one motion.
u The door unlocks and opens in one However, this feature requires that front seat
motion. occupants never pull a front door inner handle while
the vehicle is in motion.

Children should always ride in a rear seat where

childproof door locks are provided.
Inner Handle 2 Childproof Door Locks P. 169
Controls

Unlocking and opening the driver’s door from the inner handle unlocks all the other
doors.

To avoid all the doors unlocking, use the lock tab on the driver’s door to unlock,
then lock again before opening the door.
u This setting works for one time only. If you do not want all the doors to be
unlocked all the time, customize the Auto Door Unlock setting to OFF using
the audio/information screen.
2 Customized Features P. 326

168
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 169 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuChildproof Door Locks

■ Using the Master Door Lock Switch 1Using the Master Door Lock Switch
When you lock/unlock either front door using the
Master Door
Press the master door lock switch in as shown master door lock switch, all the other doors lock/
Lock Switch to lock or unlock all the doors. unlock at the same time.

To Lock

Controls
To Unlock

Childproof Door Locks

1Childproof Door Locks
The childproof door locks prevent the rear doors from being opened from the inside
To open the door from the inside when the
regardless of the position of the lock tab. childproof door lock is on, put the lock tab in the
unlock position, lower the rear window, put your
■ Setting the Childproof Door Locks hand out of the window, and pull the outside door
handle.
Slide the lever in the rear door to the lock
position, and close the door.

■ When opening the door

Unlock Open the door using the outside door handle.

Lock

169
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 170 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking

Your vehicle locks or unlocks all doors automatically when a certain condition is met. 1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
You can turn off or change to another auto door
■ Auto Door Locking locking/unlocking setting using the audio/
information screen.
■ Drive lock mode 2 Customized Features P. 326
All doors lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).

■ Auto Door Unlocking

■ Driver’s door open mode
Controls

All doors unlock when the driver’s door is opened.

170
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 171 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Opening and Closing the Trunk

Precautions for Opening/Closing the Trunk
■ Opening the trunk
Open the trunk all the way.
u If it is not fully opened, the trunk lid may begin to close under its own weight.

■ Closing the trunk

Keep the trunk lid closed while driving to:
u Avoid possible damage.
u Prevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle.
2 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 79

Controls
Using the Trunk Opener
Pressing and holding the trunk opener on the
driver’s door unlocks and opens the trunk.
2 If You Cannot Open the Trunk P. 585

Trunk Opener

171
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 172 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuUsing the Trunk Release Button

Using the Trunk Release Button

Trunk Release Button Push up the release button on the trunk lid 1Using the Trunk Release Button
after the doors are unlocked. • If you forget the keyless remote inside, the beeper
2 If You Cannot Open the Trunk P. 585 will sound and the trunk will not close.
• A person who is not carrying the keyless remote
Even if the trunk is locked, you can open the can unlock the trunk if a person who is carrying it is
trunk if you carry the keyless remote. within range.
• If the beeper sounds after you close the trunk,
u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
move the keyless remote away from the trunk and
beeper sounds. close again.
• The keyless remote may not operate if it is too close
Controls

to the trunk.

Using the Remote Transmitter 1Using the Remote Transmitter

Press the trunk release button for If the driver’s door is locked, the trunk will
approximately one second to unlock and open automatically lock when you close it. Otherwise, you
will have to lock it manually.
the trunk.

Trunk
Release
Button

172
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 173 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuEmergency Trunk Opener

Emergency Trunk Opener

The trunk release lever allows you to open the 1Emergency Trunk Opener
trunk from inside for your safety. Parents should decide if their children should be
shown how to use this feature.
Slide the release lever in the direction of the
arrow.

Lever

Controls
173
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 174 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Security System
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from 1Immobilizer System
starting the power system. Each key contains electronic transmitters that use NOTICE
electronic signals to verify the key. Leaving the key in the vehicle can result in theft or
accidental movement of the vehicle.
Pay attention to the following when pressing the POWER button: Always take the key with you whenever you leave the
• Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the POWER button. vehicle unattended.
• Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object.
Do not alter the system or add other devices to it.
• Do not bring a key from another vehicle’s immobilizer system near the POWER
Doing so may damage the system and make your
button. vehicle inoperable.
Controls

• Do not put the key near magnetic items. Electronic devices, such as televisions
and audio systems emit strong magnetic fields. Note that even a key chain can
become magnetic.

174
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 175 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm

Security System Alarm

The security system alarm activates when the trunk, hood or doors are forcibly 1Security System Alarm
opened. The alarm does not activate if the trunk or doors are opened with the key, Do not alter the system or add other devices to it.
remote transmitter or keyless access system. Doing so may damage the system and make your
However, the alarm activates if a door is opened with the key and then the hood is vehicle inoperable.
opened before the power mode is set to ON.
The security system alarm continues for a maximum
■ When the security system alarm activates of two minutes until the security system alarm
The horn sounds intermittently and some exterior lights flash. deactivates.

Do not set the security system alarm when someone

■ To deactivate the security system alarm

Controls
is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can
Unlock the vehicle using the key, remote transmitter or keyless access system, or set accidentally activate when:
the power mode to ON. The system, along with the horn and flashing lights, is • Unlocking the door with the lock tab.
deactivated. • Opening the trunk with the trunk opener or the
emergency trunk opener.
■ Setting the security system alarm • Opening the hood with the hood release.
The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have
been met: If the 12-volt battery goes dead after you have set the
• The power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). security system alarm, the security alarm may go off
• The hood is closed. once the 12-volt battery is recharged or replaced.
• All doors and the trunk are locked from outside with the key, remote transmitter If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by
unlocking a door using the key, remote transmitter,
or keyless access system.
or keyless access system.

■ When the security system alarm sets

The security system alarm indicator in the instrument panel blinks and the blinking
interval changes after about 15 seconds.

■ To cancel the security system alarm

The security system alarm is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the remote
transmitter or keyless access system, or when the power mode is set to ON. The
security system alarm indicator goes off at the same time.

Continued 175
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 176 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm

■ Panic Mode
■ The panic button on the remote
transmitter
If you press the panic button for
approximately one second, the following will
occur for about 30 seconds:
• The horn sounds.
Panic
• Some exterior lights flash.
Button
Controls

■ Canceling panic mode

• Press any button on the remote transmitter.
• Set the power mode to ON.

176
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 177 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Opening and Closing the Windows

Opening/Closing the Power Windows
The power windows can be opened and closed when the power mode is in ON, 1Opening/Closing the Power Windows
using the switches on the doors.
3 WARNING
The driver’s side switches can be used to open and close all the windows. The power Closing a power window on someone’s
window lock button on the driver’s side must be switched off (indicator off) to open hands or fingers can cause serious injury.
and close the windows from anywhere other than the driver’s seat.
Make sure your passengers are away from
When the power window lock button is pressed, the indicator comes on and you the windows before closing them.
can only operate the driver’s window. Turn the power window lock button on if a

Controls
child is in the vehicle. The power windows can be operated for up to 10
minutes after you set the power mode to VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK).
■ Opening/Closing the Windows with Auto-Open/Close Opening either front door cancels this function.
Function
Power ■ Manual operation Auto Reverse
If a power window senses resistance when closing
Window To open: Push the switch down lightly, and
Lock Button automatically, it will stop closing and reverse
hold it until the desired position is reached. direction.
To close: Pull the switch up lightly, and hold it
until the desired position is reached. The driver’s window auto reverse function is disabled
Indicator when you continuously pull up the switch.
■ Automatic operation
To open: Push the switch down firmly. The auto reverse function stops sensing when the
window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.
To close: Pull the switch up firmly.
Front Passenger’s
Window Switch The window opens or closes completely. To
Driver’s Window
stop the window at any time, push or pull the
Switch
switch briefly.

Continued 177
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 178 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows

■ Opening/Closing Windows without Auto-Open/Close Function 1Opening/Closing the Power Windows

While driving with any of the windows open, you
To open: Push the switch down. may hear a booming, throbbing, or helicopter-type
To close: Pull the switch up. noise or pressure. This is called wind buffeting. This is
Close a normal occurrence that can be minimized.
Open Release the switch when the window reaches
the desired position. If you hear a wind buffeting noise with any of the
windows open, lower all of the other windows
slightly or open the moonroof *.
Controls

■ Opening the Windows with the Remote 1Opening the Windows with the Remote
If you open the windows with the remote, the
To open: Press the unlock button, and then moonroof * will open automatically along with them.
within 10 seconds, press it again and hold it.

If the windows stop midway, repeat the

procedure.

Unlock
Button

178 * Not available on all models

22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 179 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows

■ Opening/Closing the Windows with the Key 1Opening/Closing the Windows with the Key
If you open/close the windows with the key, the
To open: Unlock the driver’s door with the moonroof * will open/close automatically along with
key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to them.
the central position, turn the key in the unlock
direction and hold it there.
To close: Lock the driver’s door with the key.
Close
Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the
Open central position, turn the key in the lock
direction and hold it there.

Controls
Release the key to stop the windows at the
desired position. If you want further
adjustment, repeat the same operation.

* Not available on all models 179

 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 180 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Moonroof *
Opening/Closing the Moonroof
You can operate the moonroof when the power mode is in ON. Use the switch in 1Moonroof *
the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof.
3 WARNING
■ Using the Moonroof Switch Opening or closing the moonroof on
someone’s hands or fingers can cause
■ Automatic operation
serious injury.
To open: Pull the switch back firmly.
Open To close: Push the switch forward firmly. Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of
the moonroof before opening or closing it.
The moonroof automatically opens or closes
Controls

all the way. To stop the moonroof midway,

NOTICE
pull or push the switch briefly.
Tilt Opening the moonroof in below freezing
Close temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice
■ Manual operation can damage the moonroof panel or motor.
To open: Pull the switch back lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached. The moonroof can be operated for up to 10 minutes
after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
To close: Push the switch forward lightly, and (LOCK).
hold it until the desired position is reached. Opening either front door cancels this function.

■ Tilting the moonroof up When resistance is detected, the auto reverse

function causes the moonroof to change directions,
To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the
switch. moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully
To close: Push the switch forward firmly, closes. Make sure that all objects, including fingers,
are clear of the moonroof.
then release.
You can use the remote transmitter or the key to
operate the moonroof.
2 Opening the Windows with the Remote
P. 178
2 Opening/Closing the Windows with the
Key P. 179

180 * Not available on all models

22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 181 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel

POWER Button
■ Changing the Power Mode 1POWER Button
POWER Button Operating Range
You can start the power system when the keyless
remote is inside the vehicle.
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
The button is off. Operating Range
The power to all electrical components is turned off.

Controls
ACCESSORY
The button blinks (in red).
Operate the audio system and other accessories in
this position.
If the battery of the keyless remote is getting low, the
power system may not start when you press the
POWER button. If the power system does not start,
refer to the following link.
ON 2 If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak
The button blinks (in red). P. 562
All electrical components can be used.
The power system may also start if the keyless remote
Without pressing is close to the door or window, even if it is outside the
the brake pedal
vehicle.

Press the button. ON mode:

The POWER button is on (in red), if the power system
is on.

Do not leave the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON

when you get out.

Continued 181
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 182 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluPOWER Button

■ Automatic Power Off

If you leave the vehicle for 30 to 60 minutes with the transmission in (P and the
power mode in ACCESSORY, the vehicle automatically goes into the mode to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to avoid draining the 12-volt battery.

■ Power Mode Reminder

If you open the driver’s door when the power mode is set to ACCESSORY, a warning
beep sounds.
Controls

182
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 183 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluPOWER Button

■ Keyless Remote Reminder 1Keyless Remote Reminder

When the keyless remote is within the system’s
When the power mode is set to any mode operational range, and the driver’s door is closed, the
other than OFF and you remove the keyless warning function cancels.
remote from the vehicle and shut the door, an
alarm will sound. If the alarm continues to If the keyless remote is taken out of the vehicle after
sound, place the keyless remote in another the power system has been turned on, you can no
longer change the POWER button mode or restart
location.
the power system. Always make sure if the remote is
in your vehicle when you operate the POWER
■ When the power mode is in

Controls
button.
ACCESSORY
The alarm will sound from outside the vehicle. Removing the keyless remote from the vehicle
through a window does not activate the warning
■ When the power mode is in ON buzzer.
An alarm will sound both inside and outside
Do not put the keyless remote on the dashboard or in
the vehicle. In addition, a warning indicator the glove box. It may cause the warning buzzer to go
will appear on the instrument panel. off. Under some other conditions that can prevent
the vehicle from locating the remote, the warning
buzzer may also go off even if the remote is within
the system’s operational range.

183
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 184 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluTurn Signals

Turn Signals
The turn signals can be used when the power 1(A): Turn signal
(A)
mode is in ON. The turn signal indicator on the instrument panel will
(B) blink when the external turn signal blinks.
(B) ■ (A): Turn signal 2 Indicators P. 82
(A) Push the lever up or down based on the
direction you want to turn, and the turn signal
will blink.

■ (B): One-touch turn signal

Controls

When you lightly push the lever up or down

and release it, the turn signal will blink 3
times.

184
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 185 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches

Light Switches
■ Manual Operation 1Light Switches
If you leave the power mode in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
Rotating the light switch turns the lights on while the lights are on, a chime sounds when the
High Beams
and off, regardless of the power mode driver’s door is opened.
setting.
■ High beams When the lights are on, the lights on indicator in the
Push the lever forward until you hear a click. instrument panel will be on.
■ Low beams 2 Lights On Indicator P. 95
When in high beams, pull the lever back to
Flashing the high beams Do not leave the lights on when the power system is
return to low beams.

Controls
Low Beams off because it will cause the 12-volt battery to
■ Flashing the high beams discharge.
Pull the lever back, and release it.
Turns on parking, side marker,
tail, and rear license plate lights
If you sense that the level of the headlights is
abnormal, have the vehicle inspected by a dealer.
Turns on headlights, parking, side
marker, tail, and rear license plate
lights

Continued 185
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 186 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches

■ Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control) 1Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)
We recommend that you turn on the lights manually
Automatic lighting control can be used when when driving at night, in a dense fog, or in dark areas
the power mode is in ON. such as long tunnels or parking facilities.

The light sensor is in the location shown below.

When the light switch is in AUTO, the
Do not cover this light sensor with anything;
headlights and other exterior lights will switch otherwise, the automatic lighting system may not
on and off automatically depending on the work properly.
ambient brightness. Models without automatic
intermittent wipers
Controls

The headlights come on when you unlock a Light Sensor

door in dark areas with the headlight switch in
AUTO.
u Once you lock the door, the headlights
will go off.

Models with automatic

intermittent wipers

Light Sensor

186
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 187 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches

■ Headlight Integration with Wipers 1Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)

You can adjust the auto light sensitivity as follows:
The headlights automatically come on when the wipers are used several times within
a certain number of intervals with the headlight switch in AUTO. The exterior lights come on
Setting
The headlights automatically go off a few minutes later if the wipers are stopped. when the ambient light is at
Max
Bright
High
■ Automatic Lighting Off Feature Mid
The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off 15 Low
Dark
seconds after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), take the remote with Min

Controls
you, and close the driver’s door. 2 Customized Features P. 326

1Headlight Integration with Wipers

If you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) with the headlight switch on, but
do not open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (3 minutes, if the switch This feature activates while the headlights are off in
AUTO.
is in the AUTO position).
The instrument panel brightness does not change
when the headlights come on.
The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the driver’s door. If you unlock
the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the At dark ambient light levels, the automatic lighting
driver’s door, you will hear a reminder chime alerting you that the lights are on. control feature turns on the headlights, regardless of
the number of wiper sweeps.

1Automatic Lighting Off Feature

You can change the headlight auto off timer setting.
2 Customized Features P. 326

187
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 188 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluFog Lights *

Fog Lights *
When the low beam headlights are on, turn
the fog light switch on to use the fog lights.

Fog Light Switch

Controls

Daytime Running Lights

The parking/daytime running lights come on when the following conditions have
been met:
• The power mode is in ON.
• The headlight switch is AUTO or OFF.
• The parking brake is released.

The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake. Setting the power mode to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) will turn off the daytime running lights.

The daytime running lights are off once the headlight switch is turned on, or when
the headlight switch is in AUTO and it is getting darker outside.

188 * Not available on all models

22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 189 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam

Auto High-Beam
The front sensor camera detects the light sources ahead of the vehicle such as the 1Auto High-Beam
lights of a preceding or oncoming vehicle, or street lights. When you are driving at The auto high-beam system does not always operate
night, the system automatically switches the headlights between low beam and high in every situation. This system is just for assisting the
beam depending on the situation. driver. Always observe your surroundings and switch
the headlights between high beam and low beam
Front Sensor Camera manually if necessary.

If you find the timing of beam changes inconvenient

for driving, change the headlight beams manually.

Controls
The range and the distance at which the camera can
recognize varies depending on conditions
surrounding your vehicle.

■ How to Use the Auto High-Beam Regarding the handling of the camera mounted to
the inside of the windshield, refer to the following.
When all of the following conditions have been met, the auto high-beam indicator 2 Front Sensor Camera P. 465
comes on and the auto high-beam is activated.
• The power mode is in ON. For the auto high-beam to work properly:
Light Switch
• The light switch is in AUTO. • Do not place an object that reflects light on the
dashboard.
• The lever is in the low beam position. • Keep the windshield around the camera clean.
• The headlights have been automatically • When cleaning the windshield, be careful not to
activated. apply the windshield cleanser to the camera lens.
• It is dark outside the vehicle. • Do not attach an object, sticker or film to the area
around the camera.
Auto High-Beam • Do not touch the camera lens.
Indicator
If the camera receives a strong impact, or repairing of
If the auto high-beam indicator does not come on even when all the conditions have
the area near the camera is required, consult a dealer.
been met, carry out the following procedure and the indicator will come on.
• Pull the lever toward you for flashing the high beams then release it while driving.

Continued 189
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 190 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam

■ Automatic switching between high-beam and low-beam 1How to Use the Auto High-Beam
When auto-high beam is active, the headlights switch between high beam and low In the following cases, the auto high-beam system
beam based on the following conditions. may not switch the headlights properly or the
switching timing may be changed. In case of the
Switching to high beam: Switching to low beam: automatic switching operation does not fit for your
driving habits, please switch the headlights manually.
All of the following conditions must One of the following conditions
be met before the high beams turn must be met before the low beams
• The brightness of the lights from the preceding or
on. turn on. oncoming vehicle is intense or poor.
● Your vehicle speed is 25 mph (40 ● Your vehicle speed is 15 mph (24
• Visibility is poor due to the weather (rain, snow,
km/h) or more. km/h) or less.
Controls

fog, windshield frost, etc.).

● There are no preceding or ● There is a preceding or oncoming
• Surrounding light sources, such as street lights,
oncoming vehicle with headlights vehicle with headlights or electric billboards and traffic lights are illuminating
or taillights turned on. taillights turned on. the road ahead.
● There are few street lights on the ● There are many street lights on • The brightness level of the road ahead constantly
road ahead. the road ahead. changes.
• The road is bumpy or has many curves.
• A vehicle suddenly appears in front of you, or a
■ Manual switching between high-beam and low-beam
vehicle in front of you is not in the preceding or
If you want to manually switch the headlights between high beam and low beam,
oncoming direction.
follow either of the procedures below. Note that when you do this, the auto high- • Your vehicle is tilted with a heavy load in the rear.
beam indicator will turn off and the auto high-beam will be deactivated. • A traffic sign, mirror, or other reflective object
ahead is reflecting strong light toward the vehicle.
Using the lever: • The oncoming vehicle frequently disappears under
Pull the lever toward you for flashing the high beams then release it within about roadside trees or behind median barriers.
one second while driving. • The preceding or oncoming vehicle is a motorcycle,
u To reactivate the auto high-beam, pull the lever toward you for flashing the bicycle, mobility scooter, or other small vehicle.
high beams then release it while driving. The auto high-beam indicator will
come on. The auto high-beam system keeps the headlight low
Using the light switch: beam when:
Turn the light switch to . • Windshield wipers are operating at a high speed.
u To reactivate the auto high-beam, turn the light switch to AUTO when the • The camera has detected a dense fog.
lever is in the low beam position, the auto high-beam indicator will come on.
190
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 191 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam

■ How to Turn Off the Auto High-Beam 1How to Use the Auto High-Beam
If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot
You can turn the auto high-beam system off. If you want to turn the system off or
Operate: Camera Temperature Too High message
on, set the power mode to ON, then carry out the following procedures while the appears:
vehicle is stationary. • Use the climate control system to cool down the
To turn the system off: interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode
AUTO Position With the light switch is in AUTO, pull the lever with the airflow directed toward the camera.
toward you and hold it for at least 40 seconds. • Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield
After the auto high-beam indicator light blinks temperature, which cools down the area around
the camera.
twice, release the lever.

Controls
If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot
To turn the system on: Operate: Clean Front Windshield message
With the light switch is in AUTO, pull the lever appears:
toward you and hold it for at least 30 seconds. • Park your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the
After the auto high-beam indicator light blinks windshield. If the message does not disappear after
once, release the lever. you have cleaned the windshield and driven for a
while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

1How to Turn Off the Auto High-Beam

If you turn the auto high-beam system off, the system
does not operate until you turn the system on.

Park in a safe place before turning the system off or

on.

191
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 192 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers

Wipers and Washers

■ Windshield Wipers/Washers 1Wipers and Washers
NOTICE
The windshield wipers and washers can be
Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry.
used when the power mode is in ON.
The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber
blades will get damaged.
■ MIST
The wipers run at high speed until you release NOTICE
Pull to the lever.
use Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out.
washer. The pump may get damaged.
■ Wiper switch (OFF, INT*1/AUTO*2, LO, HI)
Controls

Intermittent Time Move the lever up or down to change the The wiper motor may stop motor operation
Adjustment Ring * wiper settings. temporarily to prevent an overload. Wiper operation
will return to normal within a few minutes, once the
MIST ■ Adjusting wiper operation * circuit has returned to normal.
OFF Turn the adjustment ring to adjust the wiper
Models with intermittent time adjustment ring
INT*1/AUTO*2 operation.
If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are
LO: Low speed wipe Lower speed, fewer sweeps operating intermittently, the length of the wipe
HI: High speed wipe interval shortens.
When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operation’s
Higher speed, more sweeps
shortest delay setting ( ) and the LO setting become
the same.
■ Washer
Sprays while you pull the lever toward you. NOTICE
When you release the lever for more than one second, the spray stops, the wipers sweep two In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the
or three more times to clear the windshield, then stop. windshield.
Operating the wipers in this condition may damage
the wipers. Use the defogger to warm the
windshield, then turn the wipers on.

*1: Models with manual intermittent operation

*2: Models with automatic intermittent operation
192 * Not available on all models
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 193 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers

■ Automatic Intermittent Wipers * 1Wipers and Washers

If the wipers stop operating due to an obstacle such
When you push the lever down to AUTO, the
as the buildup of snow, park the vehicle in a safe
windshield wipers sweep once, and go into place.
the automatic mode. Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, and set the power
mode to ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), then
The wipers operate intermittently, at low remove the obstacle.
speed, or at high speed and stop in
accordance with the amount of rainfall the 1Automatic Intermittent Wipers *
Adjustment Ring rainfall sensor detects. The rainfall sensor is in the location shown below.

Controls
■ AUTO sensitivity adjustment Rainfall Sensor
When the wiper function is set to AUTO, you
can adjust the sensitivity of the rainfall sensor
(using the adjustment ring) so that wipers will
operate in accordance with your preference.

Sensor sensitivity

Low Sensitivity
NOTICE
AUTO should always be turned OFF before the
following situations in order to prevent severe
High Sensitivity damage to the wiper system:
• Cleaning the windshield
• Driving through a car wash
• No rain present

* Not available on all models 193

 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 194 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluRear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button

Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button

Press the rear defogger and heated door mirror button to defog the rear window 1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button
and mirrors when the power mode is in ON. This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off
when the window has been defogged. Also, do not
Models without SYNC button The rear defogger and heated door mirrors use the system for a long time while the power
automatically switch off after 10-30 minutes system is stopped. This may weaken the 12-volt
battery, making it difficult to turn the power system
depending on the outside temperature.
on.
However, if the outside temperature is 32°F
(0°C) or below, it does not automatically When the power mode is set to ON and the outside
switch off. temperature is below 41°F (5°C), the heated door
Controls

mirror may automatically activate for 10 minutes.

Models with SYNC button

194
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 195 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control

Brightness Control
When the power mode is in ON, you can use 1Brightness Control
the brightness control dial to adjust The brightness of the instrument panel will be
instrument panel brightness. reduced when the following conditions:
Brighten: Turn the dial up. • The power mode is in ON.
Dim: Turn the dial down. • The light switch is in any position other than OFF
and it is dark outside.
You will hear a beep when the brightness
To cancel the reduced instrument panel brightness
reaches minimum or maximum. Several when the exterior lights are on, turn the dial up until
Control Dial
seconds after adjusting the brightness, you the brightness display is up to max, the beeper

Controls
will be returned to the previous screen. sounds.

■ Brightness level indicator The brightness can be set differently for when the
exterior lights are on, and when they are off.
The brightness level is shown on the driver
information interface while you are adjusting
it.

195
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 196 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAdjusting the Steering Wheel

Adjusting the Steering Wheel

The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you 1Adjusting the Steering Wheel
can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture.
1. While the vehicle is stopped, pull the 3 WARNING
To adjust steering wheel adjustment lever up. Adjusting the steering wheel position while
u The steering wheel adjustment lever is driving may cause you to lose control of the
under the steering column. vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.
2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and
in or out. Adjust the steering wheel only when the
u Make sure you can see the instrument vehicle is stopped.
Controls

panel gauges and indicators.

3. Push the steering wheel adjustment lever
Lever To lock down to lock the steering wheel in position.
u After adjusting the position, make sure
you have securely locked the steering
wheel in place by trying to move it up,
down, in, and out.

196
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 197 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Adjusting the Mirrors

Interior Rearview Mirror
Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving 1Adjusting the Mirrors
position. Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and
adjusted for best visibility.
■ Rearview Mirror with Day and Night Positions * Adjust the mirrors before you start driving.
Tab
Flip the tab to switch the position. 2 Adjusting the Seats P. 199
The night position will help to reduce the glare
Up from headlights behind you when driving
after dark.

Controls
Daytime
Night Down
Position
Position

■ Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror * 1Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror *

The auto dimming function cancels when the
When you are driving after dark, the transmission is in (R .
Sensor automatic dimming rearview mirror reduces
the glare from headlights behind you, based
on inputs from the mirror sensor. Press the
auto button to turn this function on and off.
When activated, the auto indicator comes on.

Auto Button

* Not available on all models 197

 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 198 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAdjusting the MirrorsuPower Door Mirrors

Power Door Mirrors

Selector You can adjust the door mirrors when the
Switch power mode is in ON.

■ Mirror position adjustment

L/R selector switch: Select the left or right
mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the
switch to the center position.
Mirror position adjustment switch: Press
Adjustment Switch the switch left, right, up, or down to move the
Controls

mirror.

198
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 199 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Adjusting the Seats

Front Seats
Adjust the driver’s seat as far back as possible 1Adjusting the Seats
Allow sufficient
space. while allowing you to maintain full control of
the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright, 3 WARNING
well back in the seat and be able to Sitting too close to a front airbag can result
adequately press the pedals without leaning in serious injury or death if the front
forward, and grip the steering wheel airbags inflate.
comfortably. The passenger’s seat should be
adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far Always sit as far back from the front
Move back. back from the front airbag in the dashboard airbags as possible while maintaining
control of the vehicle.

Controls
as possible.

■ Adjusting the Seat Positions The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
recommends that drivers allow at least 10 inches (25
■ Adjusting the front power seats * cm) between the center of the steering wheel and
the chest.

Always make seat adjustments before driving.

Horizontal Position
Adjustment

Height Adjustment
(Driver’s seat only)

Seat-back Angle
Adjustment

Driver’s seat is shown

* Not available on all models Continued 199

 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 200 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAdjusting the SeatsuFront Seats

■ Adjusting the front manual seats * 1Adjusting the front manual seats *
Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and
Height Adjustment forth to make sure it is locked in position.
(Driver side only)
Pull up or push down the lever
to raise or lower the seat.
Controls

Seat-back Angle
Adjustment
Pull up the lever to
Horizontal Position change the angle.
Adjustment
Pull up on the bar to move the Driver’s seat is shown.
seat, then release the bar.

200 * Not available on all models

22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 201 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAdjusting the SeatsuFront Seats

■ Adjusting the Seat-Backs 1Adjusting the Seat-Backs

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a comfortable, 3 WARNING

upright position, leaving ample space
Reclining the seat-back too far can result in
between your chest and the airbag cover in
serious injury or death in a crash.
the center of the steering wheel.
Adjust the seat-back to an upright position,
The front seat passenger should also adjust and sit well back in the seat.
their seat-back to a comfortable, upright
position.

Controls
Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the
seat-back and your back.

Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the Doing so may interfere with proper seat belt or airbag
occupant’s chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the operation.
chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a
seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury. If you cannot get far enough away from the steering
wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some type of adaptive
equipment may help.

201
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 202 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats

Rear Seats
■ Folding Down the Rear Seats 1Folding Down the Rear Seats
The rear seat-backs can be folded down to
1. Remove the center shoulder belt from the accommodate bulkier items in the trunk.
Guide guide.
Never drive with the seat-back folded down and the
trunk lid open.
2 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 79

To lock a seat-back upright, push it backwards until it

locks.
Center
Controls

When returning the seat-back to its original position,

Shoulder Belt
push it firmly back. Also, make sure all rear shoulder
Release Levers 2. Pull the release lever in the trunk to release belts are positioned in front of the seat-back, and the
the lock. center shoulder belt is re-positioned in the guide.

Make sure that the folded seat-back does not press

against the front passenger seat, as this can cause the
weight sensors in the front passenger seat to work
improperly.
2 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 63

Make sure all items in the trunk or items

3. Fold the seat-back down. extending through the opening into the rear
seat are properly secured. Loose items can fly
forward if you have to brake hard.

The front seat(s) must be far enough forward so they

do not interfere with the rear seats as they fold
down.

202
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 203 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAdjusting the SeatsuMaintain a Proper Sitting Position

Maintain a Proper Sitting Position

After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their 1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their
seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the power 3 WARNING
system is off. Sitting improperly or out of position can
result in serious injury or death in a crash.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or Always sit upright, well back in the seat,
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly with your feet on the floor.
increased.

Controls
In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or
fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.

203
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 204 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAdjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints

Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints in all seating positions. 1Head Restraints

■ Adjusting the Front Head Restraint Positions 3 WARNING

Improperly positioning head restraints
Head restraints are most effective for
reduces their effectiveness and increases
protection against whiplash and other rear-
the likelihood of serious injury in a crash.
impact crash injuries when the center of the
back of the occupant’s head rests against the Make sure head restraints are in place and
center of the restraint. The tops of the positioned properly before driving.
occupant’s ears should be level with the
Controls

center height of the restraint.

In order for the head restraint system to work
Position head in the center
of the head restraint. properly:
• Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or
To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward. from the restraint legs.
To lower the head restraint: Push it down • Do not place any objects between an occupant and
while pressing the release button. the seat-back.
• Install each restraint in its proper location.

204
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 205 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAdjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints

■ Removing and Reinstalling the Front Head Restraints 1Removing and Reinstalling the Front Head Restraints

Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair. 3 WARNING

Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the
To remove a head restraint:
head restraints can result in severe injury
Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then, push the release button and pull the
during a crash.
restraint up and out.
Always replace the head restraints before
To reinstall a head restraint: driving.
Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height

Controls
while pressing the release button. Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked
in position.

205
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 206 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAdjusting the SeatsuArmrest

Armrest
■ Using the Front Seat Armrest
The console lid can be used as an armrest.
To adjust:
Slide the armrest to desired position.
Controls

■ Using the Rear Seat Armrest

Pull down the armrest in the center backrest.

206
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 207 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items

Interior Lights
■ Interior Light Switches 1Interior Light Switches
In the door activated position, the interior lights fade
Front * ■ ON out and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are
The interior lights come on regardless of closed.
whether the doors are open or closed. The lights go off after about 30 seconds in the
■ Door activated following situations:
The interior lights come on in the following • When you unlock the driver’s door but do not open it.
OFF • When you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
situations:
(LOCK) but do not open a door.
• When any of the doors are opened.
• You unlock the driver’s door.

Controls
You can change the interior lights dimming time.
Door Activated Position
• When the power mode is set to VEHICLE 2 Customized Features P. 326
OFF (LOCK).
Rear Door Activated ■ OFF The interior lights go off immediately in the following
Position situations:
The interior lights remain off regardless of
• When you lock the driver’s door.
ON
whether the doors are open or closed. • When you close the driver’s door in ACCESSORY
mode.
OFF
• When you set the power mode to ON.

To avoid draining the 12-volt battery, do not leave

the interior lights on for an extended length of time
when the power system is off.

If you leave any of the doors open in VEHICLE OFF

(LOCK) mode, the interior lights go off after about 15
minutes.

* Not available on all models Continued 207

 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 208 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights

■ Map Lights 1Map Lights

Models with moonroof
The map lights can be turned on and off by When the interior light switch is in the door activated
pressing the lenses. position and any door is open, the map light will not
go off when you press the lens.
Controls

208
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 209 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Interior Convenience Items

■ Glove Box 1Glove Box

Pull the handle to open the glove box. 3 WARNING

An open glove box can cause serious injury
to your passenger in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat belt.

Always keep the glove box closed while

driving.

Controls
Continued 209
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 210 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Console Compartment
Your vehicle has a multi-function center
console. It includes a storage compartment,
an armrest, and a sliding tray *.
Slide the armrest to the rearmost position. Pull
the handle to open the console compartment.
Controls

You can put small items in the sliding tray *

located in the console compartment lid. Slide
the sliding tray * forward or rearward.

Sliding Tray *
You can create more storage space by
removing the removable beverage holder tray
and a divider.

Removable
Beverage
Holder Tray Divider

210 * Not available on all models

22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 211 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Beverage Holders 1Beverage Holders

NOTICE
■ Front seat beverage holders
Spilled liquids can damage the upholstery, carpeting,
Are located in the console between the front and electrical components in the interior.
seats.
u Move the armrest rearward to use the Be careful when you are using the beverage holders.
beverage holders. Hot liquid can scald you.

Controls
To place a short beverage container:
Move the removable beverage holder tray
forward.

To place a tall beverage container: Move

the removable beverage holder tray rearward.

Continued 211
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 212 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Front ■ Door side beverage holders

Are located on the both of the front and rear
door side pockets.

Rear
Controls

■ Rear seat beverage holders

Fold the armrest down to use the rear seat
beverage holders.

212
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 213 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Accessory Power Socket 1Accessory Power Socket

NOTICE
The accessory power socket can be used when the power mode is in ACCESSORY or
Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter
ON. element. This can overheat the power socket.
■ Accessory power socket (console panel)
Open the cover to use it. The accessory power socket is designed to supply
power for 12-volt DC accessories that are rated
180 watts (15 amps) or less.

To prevent 12-volt battery drain, only use the power

Controls
socket with the power system on.

When the accessory power socket is not in use, close

the cover to prevent any small foreign objects from
getting into the accessory power socket.

Continued 213
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 214 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Coat Hooks 1Coat Hooks

The coat hooks are not designed for large or heavy
There is a coat hook on the rear left grab items.
handle. Pull it down to use it.
Controls

There are coat hooks on the left and right

door pillars.

214
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 215 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Seat Heaters * 1Seat Heaters *

The power mode must be in ON to use the 3 WARNING

seat heaters. Heat induced burns are possible when
using seat heaters.

Persons with a diminished ability to sense

temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,
lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or
with sensitive skin should not use seat

Controls
heaters.
Press the seat heater button:
Once - The HI setting (three indicators on) Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the
Twice - The MID setting (two indicators on) power system is off. Under such conditions, the 12-
Three times - The LO setting (one indicator on) volt battery may be weakened, making it difficult to
Four times - The OFF setting (no indicators on) turn the power system on.

After a certain period of time, the strength setting for

When the power mode is turned on after it is
the front seat heaters will automatically be reduced
turned off, the previous setting is maintained. by one level at a time until the front seat heaters
shuts off. The elapsed time varies according to the
interior environment.

* Not available on all models 215

 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 216 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Climate Control System

Using Automatic Climate Control
The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select. 1Using Automatic Climate Control
The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that raises or lowers If any buttons are pressed while using the climate
the interior temperature to your preference as quickly as possible. control system in auto, the function of the button
that was pressed will take priority.
Models without SYNC button
The AUTO indicator will go off, but functions
unrelated to the button that was pressed will be
controlled automatically.
Dashboard Dashboard Floor vents Floor and
To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the
vents and floor defroster
vents vents fan may not start immediately when the AUTO
Controls

button is pressed.

If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down

Temperature Fan Control more rapidly by partially opening the windows,
Control Dial Dial turning the system on auto, and setting the
temperature to low. Change the fresh air mode to
AUTO Button (ON/OFF) recirculation mode until the temperature cools down.
Button
(Recirculation) A/C (Air Conditioning) When you set the temperature to the lower or upper
Button Button limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.

Pressing the button switches the climate

Use the system when the power system is on. control system between on and off. When turned on,
1. Press the AUTO button. the system returns to your last selection.
2. Adjust the interior temperature using the temperature control dial.
3. Press the (ON/OFF) button to cancel. While ECON mode is active, the climate control
system may have reduced cooling performance.

216
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 217 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control

Models with SYNC button

Dashboard Dashboard Floor vents Floor and

vents and floor defroster
vents vents

(ON/OFF) Button

Driver’s Side Passenger’s Side

Controls
Temperature Temperature
Control Dial Control Dial

AUTO Button
SYNC
A/C (Air Conditioning) (Synchronization)
Button Button

(Recirculation) Button Fan Control Button

Use the system when the power system is on.

1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the interior temperature using the driver’s side or passenger’s side
temperature control dial.
3. Press the (ON/OFF) button to cancel.

Continued 217
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 218 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control

■ Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes

Press the (recirculation) button and switch the mode depending on
environmental conditions.
Recirculation mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior through
the system.
Fresh air mode (indicator off): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in
fresh air mode in normal situations.
Controls

218
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 219 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control

■ Defrosting the Windshield and Windows 1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
For your safety, make sure you have a clear view
Models without SYNC button Pressing the button turns the air through all the windows before driving.
conditioning system on and automatically
switches the system to fresh air mode. Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower
limit.
Press the button again to turn off, the When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the
windshield may fog up.
system returns to the previous settings.
If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that

Controls
the air hits the side windows.

Models with SYNC button

Continued 219
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 220 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control

■ To rapidly defrost the windows 1To rapidly defrost the windows

Models without SYNC button 1. Press the button. After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air
2. Press the button. mode. If you keep the system in recirculation mode,
the windows may fog up from humidity. This
impedes visibility.
Controls

Models with SYNC button

220
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 221 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control

■ Synchronization Mode * 1Synchronization Mode *

When you press the button, the system changes
to synchronization mode.

When the system is in dual mode, the driver’s side

temperature and the passenger’s side temperature
can be set separately.

Controls
Driver’s Side
Temperature
Control Dial

Passenger’s Side Temperature Control Dial SYNC Button

You can set the temperature synchronously for the driver’s side and the passenger’s
side in synchronization mode.

1. Press the SYNC button.

u The system will switch to the synchronization mode.
2. Adjust the temperature using the driver’s side temperature control dial.

Press the SYNC button or adjust the interior temperature using the passenger’s side
temperature control dial to return to dual mode.

* Not available on all models 221

 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 222 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuClimate Control SystemuAutomatic Climate Control Sensors

Automatic Climate Control Sensors

The automatic climate control system is
Sensor equipped with sensors. Do not cover or spill
any liquid on them.
Controls

Sensor

222
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 223 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Features
This chapter describes how to operate technology features.

Audio System Playing SiriusXM® Radio ................... 262 General Information on the Audio
About Your Audio System................ 224 Playing an iPod ................................ 273 System ............................................. 304
USB Ports ......................................... 225 Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 276 Customized Features........................ 326
Audio System Theft Protection ......... 226 Playing Bluetooth® Audio................. 279 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver *.. 346
Audio Remote Controls.................... 227 HondaLink® ..................................... 281 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®............. 349
Audio System Basic Operation ........ 230 HondaLink® Service * ........................ 285 Refuel Recommend .......................... 374
Audio/Information Screen ................ 231 Wi-Fi Connection ............................. 290
System Updates ............................... 246 AT&T Hotspot * ................................ 292
Adjusting the Sound ........................ 252 Siri® Eyes Free .................................. 293
Display Setup ................................... 253 Apple CarPlayTM ............................... 294
Voice Control Operation .................. 255 Android AutoTM................................ 298
Playing AM/FM Radio ....................... 258 Audio Error Messages ...................... 302

* Not available on all models 223

 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 224 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Audio System
About Your Audio System
The audio system features AM/FM radio and SiriusXM® Radio service. It can also play 1About Your Audio System
USB flash drives, iPod, iPhone and Bluetooth® devices. iPod®, iPhone® and iTunes® are trademarks of Apple
Inc.
You can operate the audio system from the buttons and knobs on the panel, the
remote controls on the steering wheel, or the icons on the touchscreen interface. State or local laws may prohibit the operation of
handheld electronic devices while operating a
vehicle.
Remote Controls
iPod SiriusXM® Radio is available on a subscription basis
only. For more information on SiriusXM® Radio,
contact a dealer.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 304
Features

SiriusXM® Radio is available in the United States and

USB Flash Drive Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico.

SiriusXM® is a registered trademark of SiriusXM

Radio, Inc.

224
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 225 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio SystemuUSB Ports

USB Ports
Install the device USB connector or the USB flash drive to the USB port. 1USB Ports
The USB ports (2.5A) are for charging devices, • Do not leave the iPod or USB flash drive in the
playing audio files and connecting compatible vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may
phones with Apple CarPlay or Android Auto. damage it.
u To prevent any potential issues, be sure • We recommend that you use a USB cable if you are
attaching a USB flash drive to the USB port.
to use an Apple MFi Certified Lightning
• Do not connect the iPod or USB flash drive using a
Connector for Apple CarPlay, and for hub.
Android Auto, the USB cables should be • Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard
certified by USB-IF to be compliant with disk drive, as the device or your files may be
USB 2.0 Standard. damaged.
• We recommend backing up your data before using
the device in your vehicle.
• Displayed messages may vary depending on the

Features
device model and software version.

USB charge
The USB port can supply up to 2.5A of power. It does
not output 2.5A unless requested by the device.
For amperage details, read the operating manual of
the device that needs to be charged.

Under certain conditions, a device connected to the

port may generate noise to the radio station you are
listening to.

225
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 226 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio SystemuAudio System Theft Protection

Audio System Theft Protection

The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as
when the 12-volt battery is disconnected or goes dead. In certain conditions, the
system may display a code entry screen. If this occurs, reactivate the audio system.

■ Reactivating the audio system

1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. Turn on the audio system.
3. Press and hold the audio system power knob for more than two seconds.
u The audio system is reactivated when the audio control unit establishes a
connection with the vehicle control unit. If the control unit fails to recognize
the audio unit, you must go to a dealer and have the audio unit checked.
Features

226
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 227 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls

Audio Remote Controls

Allow you to operate the audio system while driving. The information is shown on 1Audio Remote Controls
the driver information interface. Some modes appear only when an appropriate
(home) Button
VOL (+ /VOL (- (Volume) Buttons device or medium is used.
Press VOL (+ : To increase the volume.
Left Selector Wheel Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect,
Press VOL (- : To decrease the volume.
some functions may not be available.

Press the (back) button for the driver

/ information interface to go back to the previous
(Seek/Skip) screen or cancel a command.
(back) Buttons
button Press the (home) button to go back to the home
VOL (+ /VOL (- (Volume) Buttons screen of the driver information interface.

Features
Left Selector Wheel
• When selecting the audio mode
Press the (home) button, then roll up or down to select Audio on the driver
information interface, and then press the left selector wheel.

Continued 227
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 228 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls

Roll up or down:
To cycle through the audio modes, roll up or down
and then press the left selector wheel:

FM

AM

SiriusXM®
Features

USB1

USB2

Bluetooth® Audio

Smartphone Connection
(Apple CarPlay/Android Auto)

228
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 229 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls

/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons
• When listening to the radio
Press : To select the next preset radio station.
Press : To select the previous preset radio station.
Press and hold : To select the next strong station.
Press and hold : To select the previous strong station.
• When listening to an iPod, USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio, or Smartphone
Connection
Press : To skip to the next song.
Press : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song.
• When listening to a USB flash drive
Press and hold : To skip to the next folder.

Features
Press and hold : To go back to the previous folder.

229
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 230 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Audio System Basic Operation

To use the audio system function, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.
(Home) Button
(Home) Button: Press to go to the home
(Day/Night) Button screen.
2 Switching the Display P. 132
(Back) Button: Press to go back to the
previous display when it is displayed.
/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons: Press to
change station, channel, song or file.
(Day/Night) Button: Press to change
the audio/information screen brightness.
/ (Seek/Skip)
Press once and select or to make
Buttons an adjustment.
Features

(Back) Button u Each time you press , the mode

switches among the daytime mode,
nighttime mode and off mode.

230
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 231 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Audio/Information Screen
Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this display, you can go to various 1Audio/Information Screen
setup options. Touchscreen Operation
• Use simple gestures - including touching, swiping,
■ Switching the Display and scrolling - to operate certain audio functions.
• Some items may be grayed out during driving to
■ Using the audio/information screen reduce the potential for distraction.
• You can select them when the vehicle is stopped or
(Home) Button Home Screen use voice commands.
• Wearing gloves may limit or prevent touchscreen
response.

You can change the touchscreen sensitivity setting.

2 Customized Features P. 326

Features
All Apps

Press the button to go to the home screen.

Select the following icons on the home screen or after selecting All Apps.

■ Phone
Displays the HFL information.
2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 349

Continued 231
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 232 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Trip Computer
Displays the trip computer information.
• Current Drive tab: Displays the current trip information.
• Trip A/Trip B tab: Displays information for the current and three previous drives.
The information is stored every time you reset Trip A/B.
To reset the Trip A/B, select Settings, then select Delete Trip History.
To change the setting of how to reset Trip A/B, select “Trip A” Reset Timing or
“Trip B” Reset Timing.

■ Clock
Displays the clock.

■ System Updates
Features

Updates the software version of the audio system.

2 System Updates P. 246

■ FM/AM/Sirius XM/USB1/USB2/Bluetooth Audio/Smartphone Connection

Displays the audio information for each.

■ Settings
Enters the customizing menu screen.
2 Customized Features P. 326

■ Navigation *
Displays the navigation screen.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual

232 * Not available on all models

22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 233 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ HondaLink®
Displays the HondaLink® screen.
2 HondaLink® P. 281

■ Apple CarPlay/Android Auto

Displays the Apple CarPlay or Android Auto screen.
2 Apple CarPlayTM P. 294
2 Android AutoTM P. 298

■ Messages
Displays the text message screen.
2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 349

Features
■ AT&T Hotspot *
Displays the AT&T Hotspot screen.
2 AT&T Hotspot * P. 292

■ Compass
Displays the compass screen.

* Not available on all models Continued 233

 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 234 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Power Flow 1Audio/Information Screen

Displays the motor and engine power flow, average fuel economy, and range. The power flow monitor is also displayed on the
driver information interface.
Engine ON 2 Power Flow Monitor P. 153

While the vehicle is stationary with the engine

Engine OFF running, the following may appear on the audio/
Engine information screen.
Features

The auto The auto

engine stop engine stop
does not activates.
activate. (Engine OFF)
Average Fuel Economy Power Flow High Voltage Battery Driving Range (Engine ON)
(Current Drive)

234
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 235 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Displays the power flow, indicating what is supplying power to the vehicle and/or 1Audio/Information Screen
charging the battery. While the engine provides propulsion directly to the
u The indicator for the power transmission appears in blue, and for the battery wheels, the icon appears in the power flow
charging operation, in green. monitor on the screen.

Display Color of indicators Vehicle’s Condition

Power is being supplied by

the High Voltage battery
Blue
and the engine-driven
generator.

Features
Power is being supplied by
Blue
the High Voltage battery.

Power is being supplied by

Blue the engine-driven
generator.

Continued 235
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 236 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Display Color of indicators Vehicle’s Condition

Power is being supplied

directly by the engine and
Blue and Green the High Voltage battery is
being charged by the
engine-driven generator.

The High Voltage battery is

Green being charged through
Features

regenerative braking.

The High Voltage battery is

Green being charged by the
engine-driven generator.

236
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 237 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Wallpaper Setup 1Wallpaper Setup

The wallpaper you set up on Clock Faces cannot be
You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen. displayed on the driver information interface.
• When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
■ Import wallpaper in the USB flash drive’s root directory.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB Images in a folder cannot be imported.
port. • The file name must be fewer than 64 characters.
2 USB Ports P. 225 • The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
2. Select Clock. • The individual file size limit is less than 2 MB.
3. Select Settings. • If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,
4. Select Clock Faces. the No files detected message appears.
5. Select Add New Wallpaper. • Up to five pictures can be imported.
u The Searching... screen is displayed. • The maximum image size is 1,920 × 936 pixels. If

Features
the image size is less the image is displayed in the
middle of the screen with the extra area appearing
6. Import a desired picture.
in black.
u Multiple pictures can be imported at the
same time.
7. Select Start Import.
u The display will return to the Clock Faces
screen.

Continued 237
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 238 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Select wallpaper 1Wallpaper Setup

1. Select Clock. You cannot delete the initial imported wallpapers.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Clock Faces.
4. Select a desired wallpaper.
5. Select Set.
u The display will return to the Clock Faces screen.

■ To view wallpaper once it is set

1. Press the button.
2. Select Clock.

■ Delete wallpaper
Features

1. Select Clock.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Clock Faces.
4. Select a desired wallpaper.
5. Select Delete.
6. Select Yes.
u The display will return to the Clock Faces screen.

238
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 239 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Home Screen 1Home Screen

The home screen has 2 or 3 pages. You can add up
■ To change to a next screen to 7 pages.

Press the button to go directly back to the first

page of the home screen from any page.

Swipe

> Icon < Icon Current page position

Features
Selecting < or > , or swiping the screen left or right changes to the next screen.

Continued 239
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 240 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ To add app icons on the home screen 1To add app icons on the home screen
App icons can be added on the home screen. You can add app icons by the following procedure.
1. Press the button. 1. Press the button.
2. Select and hold the home screen. 2. Select All Apps.
3. Select Add. 3. Select Customize.
4. Select Add.
4. Drag and drop the icon to where you want
5. Drag and drop the icon to where you want it to
it to be.
be.
5. Select Done. 6. Select Done.
u The screen will return to the home uThe screen will return to the home screen.
screen.
Pre-installed apps may not start up normally. If this
occurs, you need to reset the system.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 345
Features

If you perform Factory Data Reset, it may reset all

the settings to their factory default.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 345

In case those apps still do not startup normally even

after Factory Data Reset, contact your dealer.

If a browser shuts down mid-use, the screen will

return to the screen viewed prior to the browser
startup.

240
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 241 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ To move icons on the home screen 1To move icons on the home screen
You can change location on the home screen. Select Tips to show tips. To hide them, select it again.
1. Select and hold an icon.
u The screen switches to the customization
screen.
2. Drag and drop the icon to where you want
it to be.
Select and hold. 3. Select Done.
u The screen will return to the home
screen.

Features
Drag and drop.

Continued 241
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 242 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ To remove icons on the home screen 1To remove icons on the home screen
You can delete the icons on the home screen. Apps will not be deleted by deleting the icon on the
1. Select and hold an icon. home screen.
u The screen switches to the customization
screen. Select Tips to show tips. To hide them, select it again.
2. Drag and drop the icon you want to remove
to the Hide icon.
Select and hold. u The icon is removed from the home
screen.
3. Select Done.
u The screen will return to the home
screen.
Features

Drag and drop to

Hide icon.

242
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 243 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ To shortcut icons on the home screen 1To shortcut icons on the home screen
You can store up to three icons on the upper left of the home screen. Select Tips to show tips. To hide them, select it again.
1. Select and hold an icon.
u The screen switches to the customization
screen.
2. Drag and drop the icon you want to store to
the upper left of the home screen.
Select and hold. u The icon is a shortcut.
3. Select Done.
Shortcut u The screen will return to the home
Icons
screen.

Features
Drag and
drop to
preset icon.

Continued 243
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 244 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Status Area
1. Select the system status icon.
u The status area appears.
2. Select an item to see the details.
3. Press the button or the system status
icon to close the area.

System
Status Icon
Features

Status Area

244
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 245 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Customizing the Meter 1Customizing the Meter

You can store up to three customized configurations.
You can edit, show, or hide the meter contents on the driver information interface. To select or customize a configuration, select Select
1. Press the button. configuration.
2. Select Settings. When you select Select configuration during
3. Select System. customization, the settings you changed will be
4. Select Config. of Instrument Panel. saved.
5. Select and hold the content you wish to
show or hide.
u The checked items are displayed on the
driver information interface.

Features
■ Editing order
To change the order of the contents on the driver information interface, first select:
1. Press the button.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select Config. of Instrument Panel.
5. Select Reorder.
6. Select and hold the contents you want to
move.
7. Drag and drop the contents to where you
want them to be.
8. Select Done.

245
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 246 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates

System Updates
The audio system’s firmware can be updated with a Wi-Fi connection or with a USB
device.

■ How to Update Wirelessly

■ Wireless connection mode setup 1Wireless connection mode setup
1. Press the button. If your vehicle has a telematics control unit (TCU), you
2. Select System Updates. do not need the wireless connection mode setup.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select Connection Setup.
Features

5. Select Change Mode.

6. Select Network, then Confirm.
u The display returns to the network list.
7. Select an access point from the network list,
then Save.
u If the audio system requires a password,
enter a password.

246
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 247 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates

■ How to update 1How to update

When the audio system update is available, the notification is shown on the audio/ You can update the system via Wi-Fi, but cannot use
information screen. Use the following procedure to update the system. the captive portal that require login or agreement the
1. Press the button. terms of use on the browser.
Notification
2. Select System Updates.
Your download will be canceled if:
• Your Wi-Fi connection is severed.
• You turn off the power system when the 12-volt
battery is low on power.

Your download will recommence the next time a Wi-

Fi connection is established.

3. Select via Wireless.

Features
u If a notification is displayed on the
screen, the screen of step 5 will be
displayed.
4. Select Download Now.
u A notification appears on the screen.

Continued 247
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 248 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates

5. Select Install Now or Install while 1How to update

Vehicle OFF. For the 12-volt battery protection, Install while
u A notification appears on the screen if Vehicle OFF cannot be selected when the battery is
the update is successful. low on power. If you want to install the updated
data, recharge the battery or select Install Now.
Features

248
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 249 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates

■ Automatic download settings

Use the following procedure to change to the automatic download setting.
1. Press the button.
2. Select System Updates.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select Auto Download.
5. Select the access point, then Yes.

■ View a version and update status

Features
Use the following procedure to confirm the version and update status.
1. Press the button.
2. Select System Updates.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select Version Status.

Continued 249
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 250 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates

■ How to Update with a USB Device 1How to Update with a USB Device
A USB device with a minimum of 8 GB of free space
■ Download the update files from the server or more is recommended.
1. Press the button.
2. Select System Updates. Be sure to delete any previous inventory or update
3. Select via USB. files from the USB before starting the USB update
u A notification appears on the screen. process.
4. Connect a USB device into the USB port.
u The inventory data is copied into the USB
device.
2 USB Ports P. 225

5. Remove the USB device from the USB port.

Features

6. Connect the USB device into your

computer, and then download the update
files.
u Follow the link to download the required
software update files. Refer to
https://usb.honda.com for instructions.

250
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 251 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates

■ Update the audio system

1. Press the button.
2. Select System Updates.
3. Select via USB.
u A notification appears on the screen.
4. Connect the USB device with the update
files into the USB port.
u A notification appears on the screen.
2 USB Ports P. 225

5. Select Install Now.

u A notification appears on the screen if

Features
the update is successful.

251
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 252 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound

Adjusting the Sound

1. Press the button. 1Adjusting the Sound
2. Select an audio source icon. The SVC adjusts the volume level based on the
3. Select Sound. vehicle speed. As you go faster, audio volume
4. Select the setting you want. increases. As you slow down, audio volume
5. Select Save. decreases.

You can also adjust the sound the following

procedure.
1. Press the button.
2. Select Settings.
Select an item from the following choices: 3. Select Sound.
• Bass / Treble: Treble, Midrange, Bass
• Balance / Fader: Balance, Fader To reset each setting for Bass / Treble, Balance /
• DTS Neural Surround *: DTS Neural Fader, DTS Neural Surround * and Speed Volume
Features

Compensation select Default.

SurroundTM
• Speed Volume Compensation: Speed
Volume Compensation (SVC)

252 * Not available on all models

22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 253 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup

Display Setup
You can change the brightness of the audio/information screen.

■ Changing the Screen Brightness 1Changing the Screen Brightness

You can change the Contrast and Black Level
1. Press the button. settings in the same manner.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Display. To reset the settings, select Default.
4. Select Day Mode or Night Mode.
5. Select the setting you want.
6. Select Save.

Features
Continued 253
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 254 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup

■ Selecting an Audio Source

Select the source icon

Source Select Screen

Source List Icons

Features

Select the current source icon, then select an icon on the source list.

■ Limitations for Manual Operation

Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.

254
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 255 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

Voice Control Operation

Your vehicle has a voice control system that allows hands-free operation. 1Voice Control Operation
The voice control system uses the (talk) and (back) buttons on the steering When you press the button, a helpful prompt asks
wheel and a microphone near the map lights on the ceiling. what you would like to do. Press and release the
button again to bypass this prompt and give a
command.

■ Voice Recognition
To achieve optimum voice recognition when using the voice control system:
• Make sure the correct screen is displayed for the voice command that you are
using.
The system recognizes only certain commands.
Available voice commands.

Features
2 Voice Portal Screen P. 256
• Close the windows and moonroof *.
• Adjust the dashboard and side vents so air does not blow onto the microphone
on the ceiling.
• Speak clearly in a clear, natural speaking voice without pausing between words.
• Reduce any background noise if possible. The system may misinterpret your
command if more than one person is speaking at the same time.

* Not available on all models Continued 255

 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 256 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

■ FM Commands
■ Voice Portal Screen ■ Phone Commands
• FM
These commands can only be used when a • Tune to <87.7-107.9> FM
phone is connected. When the system
recognizes a phone command, the screen ■ AM Commands
will change to the dedicated phone voice • AM
recognition screen. • Tune to <530-1710> AM

■ Phone Commands ■ Sirius XM Commands

• Phone • Sirius XM
• Call <Your Contact Name> • Channel <1-999>
When the (talk) button is pressed, • Call <Phone Number> • Channel <station name>
available voice commands appear on the The system only recognizes contact names
Features

screen. stored in the phonebook of your phone. If a ■ USB Commands

For a complete list of commands, say “Voice full name is registered in the first name • USB
Help” after the beep. field, the system will recognize the first • Play genre <Genre name>
name and last name as one contact name. • Play Artist <Artist name>
The system only recognizes the commands • Play Album <Album name>
on the following pages, at certain screens. Phone commands are not available if using • Play Playlist <Playlist name>
Free-form voice commands are not Apple CarPlay. • Play Song <Song name>
recognized. • Play Music
■ Audio Commands • List Genre <Genre name>
When the system recognizes an audio • List Artist <Artist name>
command, the screen will change to the • List Album <Album name>
dedicated audio voice recognition screen. • List Playlist <Playlist name>

256
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 257 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

■ Navigation Commands*1
The system will accept navigation voice
commands when on the dedicated voice
command screen for navigation.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual

■ Standard Commands
• Voice Help
• Cancel
• Back
Voice Help provides guidance for the

Features
current screen.

*1: Models with navigation system

257
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 258 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

Playing AM/FM Radio

Preset Icons
Tune the radio frequency for preset memory.
Select and hold the preset icon to store that
station. Select > to display beyond preset 5.

Audio/Information Screen Settings Icon

Select whether to tune to HD
RadioTM automatically.

Sound Icon
(Back) Button Select to display the sound
Press to go back to the previous settings.
Features

display.
HD Radio Icon
Select to display the
/ Buttons subchannel list screen.
Press or to search up and
down the selected band for a Station List Icon
station with a strong signal.
Select to display the station
list screen.
VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob Scan Icon
Push to turn the audio system on and off. Select to scan each station
Turn to adjust the volume. with a strong signal.

Seek Icon Tune Icon

Select or to search the selected band Select to use the on-screen
up or down for a station with a strong signal. keyboard for entering the
radio frequency directly.

258
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 259 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

■ Preset Memory 1Preset Memory

The ST indicator appears on the display indicating
To store a station: stereo FM broadcasts.
1. Tune to the selected station. Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
2. Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.
Switching the Audio Mode
■ Station List
Roll up or down to select Audio on the left selector
wheel or select the audio source icon on the screen.
Lists the strongest stations on the selected band. 2 Audio Remote Controls P. 227
1. Select Station List to display a list.
You can store 12 AM/FM stations into preset
2. Select the station.
memory.

■ Manual update HD Radio Technology manufactured under license

Features
Updates your available station list at any time. from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign
1. Select Station List to display a list. Patents. HD RadioTM and the HD, HD Radio, and
2. Select Refresh. “Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity
Digital Corp.

Continued 259
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 260 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

■ Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. To turn
off scan, select Stop or press the button.

■ Radio Data System (RDS) 1Radio Data System (RDS)

When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station. automatically turns on, and the frequency display
changes to the station name. However, when the
■ To find an RDS station from Station List signals of that station become weak, the display
1. Select Station List to display a list while listening to an FM station. changes from the station name to the frequency.
2. Select the station.
Features

■ Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.
1. Select Station List to display a list while listening to an FM station.
2. Select Refresh.

260
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 261 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

■ Radio Frequency Manual Tune Screen 1Radio Frequency Manual Tune Screen
You can tune the range of FM frequency between
1. Select Tune. 87.7 to 107.9MHz and range of AM frequency
2. Enter the desired radio frequency using the between 530 to 1710kHz.
on-screen keyboard.
3. Select Enter to tune into the frequency. / icons:
Select or to tune the radio frequency.

On-screen Keyboard

■ HD Subchannel

Features
Displays the subchannel list when an HD RadioTM station is selected while listening to
an FM station.
1. Select HD Radio.
2. Select the channel number.

■ AM/FM Settings
Change the AM/FM settings.
1. Select Settings.
2. Select an option.

• HD Radio: Automatically choose a digital or an analog channel, or listen to

analog only.
• Artwork: Turns the artwork display on and off.

261
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 262 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio

Playing SiriusXM® Radio

Audio/Information Screen

Album Art Settings Icon

Select settings to display and
customize siriusXM settings.

Sound Icon
(Back) Button Select to display the sound
Press to go back to the previous settings.
display.
Features

Channel List Icon

Select to display the channel list.
/ Buttons Select Keypad to use the on-
screen keyboard for entering the
Select or to the previous
channel number directly.
or next channel.
Select and hold to rapidly skip 10
Preset Icons
channels at a time.
Tune the radio frequency for
VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob preset memory. Select and hold
Push to turn the audio system on and off. the preset icon to store that
channel. Select > to display
Turn to adjust the volume. beyond preset 5.

Channel Icons Category Icons

Select or to the previous or next channel. Select or to display
Select and hold to rapidly skip 10 channels at a time. and select a SiriusXM®
Radio category.

262
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 263 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio

■ To Change the Tune Mode 1Playing SiriusXM® Radio

In the channel mode, all available channels are
1. Select Settings. selectable. In the category mode, you can select a
2. Select Tune Mode. channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).
3. Select Channel or Category.
There may be instances when SiriusXM® Radio does
not broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title).
This does not indicate a problem with your audio
system.

SiriusXM® Radio stations load in ascending order,

which can take about a minute. Once they have
loaded you will be able to scroll up or down to make
your selections.

Features
Switching the Audio Mode
Roll up or down to select Audio on the left selector
wheel or select the audio source icon on the screen.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 227

Tune Start:
When you change to a preset channel, a song being
played on that channel restarts from the beginning
with this function. This can be turned on or off by the
following procedure.
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Tune Start.
3. Select ON or OFF.

To change a category, select Category icons, or

select More and then select Category List.

Continued 263
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 264 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio

■ SiriusXM® Channel Manual Tune Screen 1SiriusXM® Channel Manual Tune Screen
/ icons:
1. Select Channel List. Select or to the previous or next channel.
2. Select Keypad. Select and hold to rapidly skip 10 channels at a time.
3. Enter the desired channel number using the
on-screen keyboard.
4. Select Enter to tune into the channel.

On-screen Keyboard

■ Preset Memory 1Preset Memory

Features

You can store 12 SiriusXM® channels into the preset

To store a channel: memory.
1. Tune to the selected channel.
2. Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.
1Multi-channel preset (for music channels only)

■ Multi-channel preset (for music channels only) TuneMixTM is registered trademarks of SiriusXM®
Radio, Inc.
You can store up to 10 of your preferred music channels per preset.
1. Tune a station. TuneMix:
2. Select and hold the preset number you The multi-channel preset function can be turned on
want to add a music channel. or off by the following procedure.
3. Select Add to TuneMix or Create 1. Select Settings.
TuneMix. 2. Select TuneMix.
3. Select ON or OFF.
u A message appears if there are no
available presets. When you want to replace the channel, select
Replace preset.
If you want to delete a channel, select Edit TuneMix,
and then select the channel you want to delete.
264
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 265 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio

■ Listening to Featured Channels 1Listening to Featured Channels

Up to ten featured channels by SiriusXM® can be
Suggested channel listing received from SiriusXM® can be displayed and selected. displayed.
1. Select Category List.
2. Select Featured Favorites. Featured channel lists are at the top of the channel
list.

To switch the sorting method, select Number or

Name on the upper right of the screen.

Select Keypad to use the on-screen keyboard for

entering the channel number directly.

Features
Continued 265
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 266 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio

■ Replay Function 1Replay Function

The system starts storing broadcast in memory when
The system can record up to the last 60 minutes broadcast of your currently tuned the power mode is turned ON. You can go back to
channel as well as the last 30 minutes broadcast of preset channels, starting from the program from that point.
the moment you turn the vehicle on. If you tuned to preset channel, the system
records up to 60 minutes of a broadcast instead of up to 30 minutes. You can You can no longer replay any program once the
rewind and replay the last 30 or 60 minutes of a broadcast. power mode is turned off as it erases memory.
You can check how long the program has been
stored in memory from the audio/information screen.
Move the position you want to replay by selecting or .
After 30 or 60 minutes of recording the system will
To play or pause on playback mode, select the play/pause icon. automatically start deleting the oldest data.

■ Returning to real-time broadcast Audio/Information Screen

(A)
Features

Select and hold .

(C) (D) (B)

(A): Shows how much time the replayed segment is

behind the real-time broadcast
(B): Replayed segment
(C): Length stored in memory
(D): Play/Pause icon

266
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 267 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio

■ Live Sports Alert 1Live Sports Alert

The Pop-up appears and notifies you of a sports alert
While listening to other channel, you can receive sports alerts such as scores from function.
your favorite teams.

■ To set up a favorite team 1To set up a favorite team

1. Select Settings. Sports alerts cut in only when SiriusXM® mode is on.
2. Select Sports Notifications Setup.
3. Select Favorite Teams.
4. Select + Add Favorite Team.
5. Select a team.

Features
■ To set up an alert message
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Sports Notifications Setup.
3. Select Notifications.
4. Select Game Notifications or SportsFlash Game Play Notifications.
5. Select Notifications.
6. Select ON.
7. Select a favorite team.

Continued 267
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 268 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio

■ Traffic and Weather Information 1Traffic and Weather Information

When traffic and weather information is received, a
You can receive traffic and weather information. notification is displayed in the header area.
1. Select Settings. 2 Status Area P. 244
2. Select Traffic & Weather Now Setup.
3. Select Selected City. Traffic & Weather Now are registered trademarks of
4. Select the region. SiriusXM® Radio, Inc.
Features

268
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 269 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio

■ Channel Schedule 1Channel Schedule

Select Keypad to use the on-screen keyboard for
You can view a channel schedule or receive an alert when your favorite program is entering the channel number directly.
about to start.

■ To view a channel schedule

1. Select More.
2. Select Channel Schedule.

Features
■ To set up an alert message 1To set up an alert message
1. Select More. The Pop-up appears and notifies you of an alert
2. Select Channel Schedule. function.
3. Select a program.
4. Select Set Program Alert. Selecting Just Once disables the alert feature next
time you turn the power mode to ON.
5. Select Just Once or Everytime.
If you want to delete the alert, select Remove Alert.

To enable an alert message, change settings for the

alert function.
2 To enable the alert function P. 270

Continued 269
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 270 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio

■ Manage Program Alert

You can change settings for the alert function.

■ To enable the alert function

1. Select Settings.
2. Select Manage Program Alerts.
3. Select Notifications.
4. Select ON or OFF.
Features

■ To remove an alert
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Manage Program Alerts.
3. Select Alerts Set.
4. Select on the alert you want to delete.
u A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Yes.

270
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 271 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio

■ Scan 1Scan
The “Scan Songs in Presets” function is based on
Sample each channel on the selected mode for 10 seconds. TuneScanTM technology of SiriusXM®.
1. Select More.
2. Select Scan. The “Featured Channels” function is based on
Featured FavoritesTM technology of SiriusXM®.
You can change a scan mode by the following procedure.
TuneScanTM and Featured FavoritesTM are registered
1. Select Settings.
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio, Inc.
2. Select Scan Mode.
3. Select Channel or Preset.

To turn off scan, select Stop.

Features
Continued 271
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 272 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio

■ SiriusXM Settings
Change the SiriusXM settings.
1. Select Settings.
2. Select an option.

• Tune Mix: Turns multiple channel mix preset on and off.

• Tune Mode: Choose whether to group by category or channel number when
changing channels.
• Scan Mode: Select the scan mode from all channels or presets.
• Tune Start: Start the currently playing song at the beginning when you switch to
a music channel preset.
• Sports Notifications Setup: Set to receive sports alerts such as scores from your
Features

favorite teams.
2 Live Sports Alert P. 267
• Traffic & Weather Now Setup: Set to receive traffic and weather information.
2 Traffic and Weather Information P. 268
• Manage Program Alerts: Change settings for the alert function.
2 Manage Program Alert P. 270

272
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 273 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

Playing an iPod
Using your USB connector, connect the iPod to the USB ports, then select the USB
mode.
2 USB Ports P. 225

Cover Art Audio/Information Screen

Sound Icon
(Back) Button Select to display the sound
Press to go back to the previous settings.
display.

Features
Track Buttons
Press or to change songs. Shuffle Icon
Select and hold to move rapidly Select to play all songs in the
within a song. current category in random order.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob Repeat Icon

Push to turn the audio system on and off. Select to repeat the current song.
Turn to adjust the volume.

Browse Icon Play/Pause Icon

Select to display the music search list screen.

Track Icons
Select or to change songs.
Select and hold to move rapidly within a song.

Continued 273
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 274 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

■ How to Select a Song from the Music Search List 1Playing an iPod
Available operating functions vary on models or
1. Select Browse. versions. Some functions may not be available on the
2. Select a search category (e.g., Artists, vehicle’s audio system.
Albums, etc.).
3. Continue making selections until you find a If there is a problem, you may see an error message
file of your choice. on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 302

If you operate the music app on your iPhone/iPod

while the phone is connected to the audio system,
you may no longer be able to operate the same app
on the audio/information screen.
Reconnect the device if necessary.
Features

If an iPhone is connected via Apple CarPlay, the iPod/

USB source will be unavailable and audio files on the
phone will be playable only within Apple CarPlay.

274
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 275 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

■ How to Select a Play Mode 1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items
You can select shuffle and repeat modes when playing a song. Shuffle
■ Shuffle/Repeat (shuffle off): Shuffle mode to off.
Repeatedly select the shuffle or repeat icon (shuffle all songs): Plays all available songs in a
until you find a play mode option of your selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,
or composers) in random order.
preference.
Repeat
(repeat off): Repeat mode to off.
(repeat song): Repeats the current song.
(repeat all): Repeats the all songs.

Features
■ To turn off a play mode
Select the mode you want to turn off.

275
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 276 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

Playing a USB Flash Drive

Your audio system reads and plays audio files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,
WMA, AAC*1, FLAC or WAV format.
Connect your USB flash drive to a USB port, then select the USB mode.
2 USB Ports P. 225

Audio/Information Screen

Sound Icon
Select to display the sound settings.
Features

(Back) Button
Press to go back to the previous
display. Random Icon
Select to play all files in the
current category in random
/ Buttons order.
Press or to change files.
Select and hold to move rapidly Repeat Icon
within a file. Select to repeat the current file.
VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob Play/Pause Icon
Push to turn the audio system on and off.
Track Icons
Turn to adjust the volume.
Select or to change files.
Browse Icon Select and hold to move rapidly
Select to display the music search list screen. within a file.

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.

276
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 277 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

■ How to Select a File from the Music Search List 1Playing a USB Flash Drive
Use the recommended USB flash drives.
1. Select Browse. 2 General Information on the Audio System
2. Select a search category (e.g., Artists, P. 304
Albums, etc.).
3. Continue making selections until you find WMA files protected by digital rights management
the file of your choice. (DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays The selected file cannot
be played, then skips to the next file.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message

on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 302

Features
Continued 277
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 278 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

■ How to Select a Play Mode 1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items
You can select repeat and random modes when playing a file. Random
■ Random/Repeat (random off): Random mode to off.
Select random or repeat icon repeatedly until (random all files): Plays all files in random order.
a desired mode. (random in folder): Plays all files in the current
folder in random order.

Repeat
(repeat off): Repeat mode to off.
(repeat file): Repeats the current file.
(repeat folder): Repeats all files in the current
folder.
Features

■ To turn off a play mode

Select the mode you want to turn off.

278
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 279 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

Playing Bluetooth® Audio

Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible 1Playing Bluetooth® Audio
phone. Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming
This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s audio capabilities are compatible with the system.
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system. For a list of compatible phones, visit
2 Phone Setup P. 354 automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink, or call 1-888-
528-7876.
Audio/Information Screen Bluetooth Indicator
It may be illegal to perform some data device
Appears when your
functions while driving.
(Back) phone is connected
Button to HFL.
Press to go Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time.
back to the When there is more than one phone paired in the
previous vehicle, the first paired phone the system finds is
display. automatically connected.

Features
The connected phone for Bluetooth® Audio can be
different.
/
Buttons If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,
Press or there may be a delay before the system begins to play.
to Play/Pause
change tracks. Icon
In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track
may not appear correctly.
VOL/ AUDIO Track Icons
Some functions may not be available on some
(Volume/Power) Knob Select or to
devices.
Push to turn the audio change tracks.
system on and off.
Browse Icon If a phone is currently connected via Apple CarPlay or
Turn to adjust the
volume. Select to display the Android Auto, Bluetooth® Audio from that phone
menu items. will be unavailable. However, you can have a second
previously paired phone stream Bluetooth® Audio by
selecting from the Bluetooth® device list.
2 Phone Setup P. 354
Continued 279
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 280 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

■ To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files 1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

To play the audio files, you may need to operate your
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and phone. If so, follow the phone maker’s operating
connected to the system. instructions.
2 Phone Setup P. 354
2. Select the Bluetooth® Audio mode. Switching to another mode pauses the music playing
from your phone.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFL-
You can change the connected phone by selecting
compatible phone, which is not compatible
Change device.
for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be 2 Phone Setup P. 354
connected.

■ To pause or resume a file

Features

Select the play/pause icon.

■ Searching for Music 1Searching for Music

Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect,
1. Select Browse. some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
2. Select a search category (e.g., Albums).
3. Select an item.
u The selection begins playing.

280
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 281 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®

HondaLink®
HondaLink® connects you to the latest information from Honda. You can connect 1HondaLink®
your phone wirelessly through Wi-Fi or Bluetooth®. If your vehicle has a telematics control unit (TCU), you
2 Wi-Fi Connection P. 290 can use HondaLink® without connecting the phone.
2 Phone Setup P. 354
The HondaLink® connect app is compatible with most
iPhone and Android phones.
■ To Connect to HondaLink®
Use the following procedure to connect to HondaLink®. If the system is connected to the HondaLink® connect
app through Bluetooth® and another Bluetooth®
audio device is connected, the Bluetooth®
■ To enable the HondaLink® connection to the HondaLink® connect app will be
You need to allow the consent of the location service to enable the HondaLink®. severed.
Disable: Does not allow this consent.
Enable Once: Allows only one time. (Shows Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and

Features
again next time.) smartphone data use. Check your phone’s data
Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Never subscription package.
show again.)

Continued 281
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 282 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®

■ To link with HondaLink®

You may see the connection guide screen
after launching HondaLink® when there is no
connection available.

■ HondaLink® Menu
Features

■ Connect
Displays instruction messages when the vehicle needs service.

■ Help & Support

Displays tips for vehicle usage, and get support via road side or customer service
center.

282
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 283 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®

■ Message
Displays helpful and important information from Honda.

■ Vehicle Information and Message from Honda Tips

You can check the messages that are received quickly in the shortcut operation.
1. A notification appears and notifies you of a
new message in the header area.

Features
Notification

2. A notification is continuously displayed in

the header area until the new message is
read.

Continued 283
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 284 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®

3. Select the system status icon to see the 1Vehicle Information and Message from Honda Tips
messages. When you update HondaLink®, you must keep the
power system on and maintain a constant connection
with HondaLink®.
If the update is interrupted, the system will
automatically resume the process. If, however, a
week has elapsed since the process was first
interrupted, you must repeat the process from the
beginning.

You can update HondaLink® by selecting Message

from Honda on the HondaLink® menu.
4. Select a new message to open.
u If you have selected the update option
Features

for HondaLink®, follow the directions on

the screen to complete the process.

284
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 285 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink® Service *

HondaLink® Service *
Is a subscription-based service that provides convenient features such as voice 1HondaLink® Service *
communication in case of emergency, online security, and one-on-one operator HondaLink® also provides services you can operate
assistance. from the Internet or your smartphone.

■ In Case of Emergency
To subscribe to HondaLink®, or to get more
information about all of its features, contact an
■ Automatic collision notification Honda dealer, or visit hondalink.honda.com
If your vehicle’s airbags deploy or if the unit
detects that the vehicle is severely impacted, 1In Case of Emergency
your vehicle automatically will attempt to Your vehicle may not be able to connect to the
connect to the HondaLink® operator. If operator if the 12-volt battery level is low, the line is
connected, information about your vehicle, its disconnected, or you do not have adequate cellular
location, and its condition can be sent to the coverage.
operator*1; you also can speak to the operator

Features
when connected. You cannot use this emergency services when:
• You travel outside the HondaLink® service coverage
areas.
IMPORTANT: In a crash, HondaLink® will attempt to notify emergency services but • There is a problem with the connecting devices,
NEITHER HONDA NOR ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS GUARANTEE THAT SUCH such as the microphones, speakers, or the unit
NOTIFICATION WILL OCCUR. itself.

You cannot operate other phone-related functions

Honda reserves the right to terminate HondaLink® services at any time or for any
using the screen while talking to the operator.
reason, and in the future may not be able to provide services due to changes in, or Only the operator can terminate the connection to
obsolescence of, technology integral to the service or changes in governmental your vehicle.
regulation.
1Automatic collision notification
*1: Depending on your phone and adequate cellular coverage, your vehicle’s location may not
If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it
be sent to the operator. repeatedly tries until it succeeds.

* Not available on all models Continued 285

 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 286 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink® Service *

■ Manual operator connection 1Manual operator connection

If you need to talk to the HondaLink® operator Do not press the button while driving. When you
ASSIST
Button in a situation where no airbag has deployed, need to contact the operator, park the vehicle in a
you can manually connect to them by pressing safe place.
the ASSIST button with the power mode in
If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it
ACCESSORY or ON.
automatically cancels the action after three minutes.
1. Open the cover attached to the ceiling
console. If necessary, the cover can be broken to access the
2. Press the ASSIST button. ASSIST button.
u You are connected to the HondaLink®
operator.
Features

286
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 287 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink® Service *

■ Security Features 1Security Features

The contact information of your provider, your user
Your subscribed telematics service provider can track your vehicle’s location, ID and PIN will be given when you subscribe to
remotely lock or unlock doors, and help you find your vehicle. HondaLink®. If you forget any of the above, contact a
To use these features, you need your user ID and personal identification number Honda dealer, or go to hondalink.honda.com.
(PIN).
You can also activate the remote door lock/unlock
■ Stolen vehicle tracking and vehicle finder features from the Internet or using
your smartphone app. Ask a dealer, or visit
This feature searches and tracks down your vehicle position even if it is on the move.
hondalink.honda.com.
If you believe that your vehicle has been stolen, contact the police as well as the
provider.

■ Remote door lock/unlock

Features
The provider can remotely lock or unlock doors upon your request.

■ Vehicle finder 1Vehicle finder

This feature is convenient to use when trying to locate your vehicle in large areas, The lights will stop flashing and horn will stop
such as a crowded parking lot. If you cannot locate your vehicle after using the sounding under the following:
remote transmitter’s answerback function, you can contact the provider which can • When conditions 30 seconds have elapsed.
• You unlock the doors using the remote transmitter.
then flash your vehicle’s exterior lights and sound the horn, and sends vehicle • You unlock the doors using the keyless access
location via web/Smartphone. system.
• You unlock the doors using the built-in key.
■ Security alarm notification • The power mode is set to ACCESSORY or ON.
If the security system in your vehicle detects an abnormal condition, such as
someone tampering with the lock on your vehicle, the provider notifies you by email.

Continued 287
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 288 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink® Service *

■ Operator Assistance 1Operator Assistance

Remain attentive to road conditions and driving
Connect to the HondaLink® operator when trying to find a destination or for during operator assistance.
roadside assistance.
1. Press the LINK button. If you want to add or renew a subscription, call the
u Connection to the operator begins. Operator Assistance.
LINK Button
2. Talk to the operator. 1. Press the button.
2. Select HondaLink.
u To disconnect, select Hang Up on the
3. Select HondaLink Subscription Status.
audio/information screen or press the
button on the steering wheel.
Features

Audio/information screen
when connected to the
HondaLink® operator.

288
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 289 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink® Service *

■ Convenient Features 1Convenient Features

The contact information of your provider, your user
Your subscribed telematics service provider can check your vehicle’s condition. ID and PIN will be given when you subscribe to
HondaLink®. If you forget any of the above, contact a
■ Virtual Dashboard Honda dealer, or go to hondalink.honda.com.
You can remotely check the mileage, fuel range, and oil life in your app.

■ Remote Start and stop the engine

You can remotely turn on and off the power system using your app as same as the
keyless remote.

■ Geofence Alert
You can receive a notification anytime your vehicle enters or leaves a region set by

Features
you.

■ Speed Alert
You can receive a notification when your vehicle has exceeded a speed limit set by
you.

■ Personal Data Wipe

You can reset your audio and navigation system settings to factory defaults with the
app.

■ Wi-Fi hotspot
Vehicle provides 4G LTE network environment as Wi-Fi router to use tablet or
smartphone in your vehicle.

289
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 290 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuWi-Fi Connection

Wi-Fi Connection
You can connect the audio system to the Internet using Wi-Fi on the audio/ 1Wi-Fi Connection
information screen. If your phone has wireless hotspot capabilities, the system can Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Direct a registered trademark of Wi-Fi
be tethered to the phone. Use the following steps to set up. Alliance®.

■ Wi-Fi mode (setting for the first time)

1. Press the button.
1Wi-Fi mode (setting for the first time)
2. Select Settings.
You cannot go through the setting procedure while
3. Select Connections.
the vehicle is moving. Park in a safe place to set the
4. Select Wi-Fi. audio system in Wi-Fi mode.
5. Select Change Mode.
Features

6. Select Network or Hotspot, then Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and
Confirm. smartphone data use. Check your phone’s data
u To change the Wi-Fi settings, select subscription package.
Network Options or Hotspot
Check your phone manual to find out if the phone
Options.
has Wi-Fi connectivity.
u Select the access point you want to
connect to the system. You can confirm whether Wi-Fi connection is on or
7. Select Connect. off with the icon on the Wi-Fi network list.
u Enter a password for the access point, Transmission speed and others will not be displayed
and select Done. on this screen.
u When the connection is successful, the
In case of Wi-Fi connection with your phone, make
icon is displayed on the list. sure your phone’s Wi-Fi setting is in access point
8. Press the button to go back to the (tethering) mode.
home screen.

290
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 291 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuWi-Fi Connection

■ Wi-Fi mode (after the initial setting has been made) 1Wi-Fi mode (after the initial setting has been made)
iPhone users
Make sure your phone’s Wi-Fi setting is in access point (tethering) mode. You may need to go through an initial setup for Wi-Fi
connection again after you boot your phone.

Features
291
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 292 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAT&T Hotspot *

AT&T Hotspot *
If you have subscribed to AT&T hotspot services, your vehicle will provide data to 1AT&T Hotspot *
connect your mobile devices to the Internet. You can use the AT&T Hotspot app to To use AT&T Hotspot services, your vehicle must be
turn on/off vehicle data and monitor data usage left on your subscription. subscribed to a data plan. If your vehicle is not
subscribed to a data plan, you can visit www.att.com/
■ AT&T Hotspot Menu honda to add vehicle data services.

Hotspot username and password can be changed in

the Settings of the AT&T Hotspot app. Settings can
not be accessed while driving. Park in a safe place to
adjust Hotspot settings.

Alternatively, you can use your mobile hotspot to

connect the vehicle and other mobile devices to the
Internet.
Features

2 Wi-Fi Connection P. 290

a Hotspot Enable
Turn on/off AT&T Hotspot.
b Data Usage Bar
Check the current status of your data plan. This Usage Bar will show your current
plan and how much data remains on your plan. Subscription plans for AT&T
Hotspot can be added/modified at www.att.com/honda.
c Plan Info
Shows your current AT&T subscription plan for the vehicle.
d Settings
Shows the current username and password for vehicle Hotspot. Settings can be
changed while the vehicle is not in motion.
e Help

292 * Not available on all models

22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 293 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSiri® Eyes Free

Siri® Eyes Free

You can talk to Siri by pressing and holding the (Talk) button on the steering 1Siri® Eyes Free
wheel when your iPhone is paired to the Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system. Siri is a trademark of Apple Inc.
2 Phone Setup P. 354
Check Apple Inc. website for features available for
Siri.

While driving we recommend only using Siri through

the button on the steering wheel (Siri Eyes Free).

■ Using Siri Eyes Free 1Using Siri Eyes Free

Some commands work only on specific phone
(Back) Button features or apps.
Press to deactivate Siri.

Features
Appears when Siri is
activated in Siri Eyes Free

(Talk) Button While in Siri Eyes Free:

Press and hold until the display The display remains the same.
changes as shown. No feedback or commands
appear.

293
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 294 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlayTM

Apple CarPlayTM
If you connect an Apple CarPlay-compatible iPhone to the system via the USB port, 1Apple CarPlayTM
you can use the audio/information screen, instead of the iPhone display, to make a Only iPhone 5 or newer versions with iOS 8.4 or later
phone call, listen to music, view maps (navigation), and access messages. are compatible with Apple CarPlay.
2 USB Ports P. 225
We recommend using the latest OS.

Park in a safe place before connecting your iPhone to

Apple CarPlay and when launching any compatible
apps.

While connected to Apple CarPlay, calls are only

made through Apple CarPlay. If you want to make a
call with Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®, turn Apple
CarPlay off.
Features

2 Setting Up Apple CarPlay P. 296

When your iPhone is connected to Apple CarPlay, it is

not possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio or
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®. However, other
Apple CarPlay Icon
previously paired phones can stream audio via
Bluetooth® while Apple CarPlay is connected.
2 Phone Setup P. 354

Apple CarPlay and Android Auto cannot run at the

same time.

For details on countries and regions where Apple

CarPlay is available, as well as information pertaining
to function, refer to the Apple homepage.

294
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 295 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlayTM

■ Apple CarPlay Menu 1Apple CarPlayTM

Apple CarPlay Operating Requirements &
Limitations
Apple CarPlay requires a compatible iPhone with an
active cellular connection and data plan. Your
carrier’s rate plans will apply.

Changes in operating systems, hardware, software,

and other technology integral to providing Apple
CarPlay functionality, as well as new or revised
governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or
cessation of Apple CarPlay functionality and services.
Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or
• Phone guarantee of future Apple CarPlay performance or

Features
Access the contact list, make phone calls, or listen to voicemail. functionality.
• Music
Play music stored on your iPhone. It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are
• Maps compatible with Apple CarPlay. Refer to the Apple
Display Apple Maps and use the navigation function just as you would on your homepage for information on compatible apps.
iPhone.
Models with navigation system
Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Apple CarPlay) can give
directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior
destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are
currently using will direct you to your destination.
• Messages
Check and reply to text messages, or have messages read to you.

Continued 295
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 296 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlayTM

• Honda
Select the Honda icon to go back to the home screen.
•
Go back to the Apple CarPlay Dashboard screen.
•
Go back to the Apple CarPlay menu screen.

■ Setting Up Apple CarPlay 1Setting Up Apple CarPlay

Only initialize Apple CarPlay when you are safely
After you have connected your iPhone to the system via the USB port, use the parked.
following procedure to set up Apple CarPlay. Use of Apple CarPlay will result in the When Apple CarPlay first detects your iPhone, you
transmission of certain user and vehicle information (such as vehicle location, speed, will need to set up your iPhone. Refer to the
and status) to your iPhone to enhance the Apple CarPlay experience. You will need instruction manual that came with your iPhone.
Features

to consent to the sharing of this information on the audio/information screen. You can also use the method below to set up Apple
CarPlay:
Press the HOME  Select Settings  Connections 
■ Enabling Apple CarPlay Smartphone Connection  Apple CarPlay  Select
1. Connect the iPhone to the USB port using the USB cable. device  Edit Device Permissions
2 USB Ports P. 225
Use of user and vehicle information
u The confirmation screen will be displayed. The use and handling of user and vehicle information
2. Select Enable. transmitted to/from your iPhone by Apple CarPlay is
u If you do not want to connect Apple CarPlay, select Disable. governed by the Apple iOS terms and conditions and
Apple’s Privacy Policy.
You may change the consent settings under the Connections settings menu.

296
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 297 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlayTM

■ Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri 1Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri
Below are examples of questions and commands for
Press and hold the (Talk) button to activate Siri. Siri:
(Talk) Button • What movies are playing today?
• Call dad at work.
• What song is this?
• How’s the weather tomorrow?
• Read my latest email.
• Find a table for four tonight in Chicago.

For more information, please visit

www.apple.com/ios/siri.

(Talk) Button:

Features
Press and hold to activate Siri.
Press again to deactivate Siri.
Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system.

297
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 298 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid AutoTM

Android AutoTM
When you connect an Android phone to the audio system via the USB port, Android 1Android AutoTM
Auto is automatically initiated. When connected via Android Auto, you can use the We recommend that you update Android OS to the
audio/information screen to access the Phone, Google Maps (Navigation), and latest version when using Android Auto.
Google Now functions. When you first use Android Auto, a tutorial will appear on Bluetooth A2DP cannot be used while your phone is
the screen. connected to Android Auto.
We recommend that you complete this tutorial while safely parked before using
To use Android Auto on a smartphone with Android
Android Auto. 9.0 (Pie) or earlier, you need to download the
2 USB Ports P. 225 Android Auto app from Google Play to your
2 Auto Pairing Connection P. 300 smartphone.

Park in a safe place before connecting your Android

phone to Android Auto and when launching any
compatible apps.
Features

To use Android Auto, connect the USB cable to the

USB port.
2 USB Ports P. 225

When your Android phone is connected to Android

Auto, it is not possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio.
However, other previously paired phones can stream
audio via Bluetooth® while Android Auto is
connected.
2 Phone Setup P. 354
Android Auto Icon

298
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 299 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid AutoTM

■ Android Auto Menu 1Android AutoTM

For details on countries and regions where Android
Auto is available, as well as information pertaining to
function, refer to the Android Auto homepage.

Screens may differ depending on the version of the

Android Auto app you are using.

Android Auto Operating Requirements &

Limitations
Android Auto requires a compatible Android phone
with an active cellular connection and data plan.
• Maps Your carrier’s rate plans will apply.
Display Google Maps and use the navigation function just as you would with your

Features
Android phone. When the vehicle is in motion, it is not possible to make keyboard Changes in operating systems, hardware, software,
entries. Stop the vehicle in a safe location to undertake a search or provide other and other technology integral to providing Android
Auto functionality, as well as new or revised
inputs.
governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or
Models with navigation system cessation of Android Auto functionality and services.
Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Android Auto) can give Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or
directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior guarantee of future Android Auto performance or
destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are functionality.
currently using will direct you to your destination.
It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are
The audio/information screen shows you turn-by-turn driving directions to your compatible with Android Auto. Refer to the Android
destination. Auto homepage for information on compatible apps.
• Phone
Make and receive phone calls as well as listen to voicemail.
• Exit
Select the Exit icon to go back to the home screen.

Continued 299
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 300 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid AutoTM

•
Operate Android Auto with your voice.
•
You can check Android notifications.
• (Android Auto Home)
Display useful information organized by Android Auto into simple cards that
appear just when they’re needed.

■ Auto Pairing Connection

When you connect an Android phone to the unit via the USB port, Android Auto is
automatically initiated.
Features

■ Enabling Android Auto 1Enabling Android Auto

To enable Android Auto after connecting an Android phone to the system, select Only initialize Android Auto when you are safely
Enable on the screen. parked. When Android Auto first detects your phone,
you will need to set up your phone so that auto
You may change the consent settings under the Connections settings menu. pairing is possible. Refer to the instruction manual
that came with your phone.

You can use the method below to change Android

Auto settings after you have completed the initial
setup:
Press the HOME  Select Settings  Connections 
Smartphone Connection  Android Auto  Select
device  Edit Device Permissions

Use of user and vehicle information

The use and handling of user and vehicle information
transmitted to/from your phone by Android Auto is
governed by the Google’s Privacy Policy.

300
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 301 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid AutoTM

■ Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition 1Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition
Below are examples of commands you can give with
Press and hold the talk (Talk) button to operate Android Auto with your voice. voice recognition:
(Talk) Button • Reply to text.
• Call my wife.
• Navigate to Honda.
• Play my music.
• Send a text message to my wife.
• Call flower shop.

For more information, please refer to the Android

Auto homepage.

(Talk) Button: You can also activate the voice recognition function

Features
Press and hold to operate Android Auto with your voice. by pressing the icon in the lower-right corner of
Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system. the screen.

301
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 302 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Audio Error Messages

iPod/USB Flash Drive
If an error occurs while playing an iPod or USB flash drive, you may see the following
error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message Solution

Connect Retry Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.

Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are copyright protected or an unsupported
The selected file cannot be played. format. This error message appears for about three or five seconds, then plays the next
song.
Appears when the system does not communicate with a connected device. If it appears
Device No Response
when a device is connected, contact your place of device purchase.

USB hub not supported/USB hub not Appears when only a HUB is connected. If it appears, connect a USB flash drive to the
Features

supported. HUB.

302
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 303 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAudio Error MessagesuAndroid/Apps

Android/Apps
If an error occurs while using the audio system or apps, you may see the following
error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message Solution

Unfortunately, **** has

Error has occurred within app, select OK on the screen to close the app.
stopped.*1
App is not responding.
**** is not responding. Select Wait if you can wait for a response from app a little longer. If it does not respond even if you keep
Would you like to close waiting, select OK to close the app and start it up. If the error message continues, perform Factory Data
it?*1 Reset.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 345

*1:****part is variable characters, and will change depending upon where an error

Features
occurs.

303
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 304 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

General Information on the Audio System

SiriusXM® Radio Service
■ Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio 1Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio
Contact Information for SiriusXM® Radio:
1. You need your radio ID ready before registering for subscription. To see the ID in SiriusXM® Radio at
the screen, select Channel to 0. www.siriusxm.com/subscribenow, or 1-866-635-
2. Have your radio ID ready, and either call or visit the SiriusXM® website to 2349
subscribe.

■ Receiving SiriusXM® Radio 1Receiving SiriusXM® Radio

The SiriusXM® satellites are in orbit over the equator;
Switch to the SiriusXM® mode by using the audio remote controls on the steering therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause
wheel, or through the audio/information screen, and stay in this mode for about 30 satellite reception interruptions. Satellite signals are
minutes until the service is activated. Make sure your vehicle is in an open area with more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and
good reception. mountains the farther north you travel from the
Features

equator.

■ SiriusXM® Radio Display Messages You may experience reception problems under the
Channel **** is not subscribed. Call SiriusXM to subscribe.*1 following circumstances:
• In a location with an obstruction to the south of
You are not subscribed to the channel selected.
your vehicle.
Subscription Updated: • In tunnels
SiriusXM® radio is receiving information update from the network. • On the lower level of a multi-tiered road
Channel Not Available: • Large items carried on the roof rack
No such channel exits, or the artist or title information is unavailable.
No Signal:
The signal is too weak in the current location.
Check Tuner:
There is a problem with the SiriusXM® tuner. Contact a dealer.
Antenna Disconnected, Antenna Shorted:
There is a problem with the SiriusXM® antenna. Contact a dealer.

*1 : ****part is variable characters, and will change depending upon where an subscribe.

304
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 305 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives

Compatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives

■ iPod, and iPhone Model Compatibility 1iPod, and iPhone Model Compatibility
This system may not work with all software versions
Model of these devices.
Made for iPod touch (6th generation), iPod touch (5th generation)
The Lightning connector works with iPhone 7 Plus,
Made for iPhone 7 Plus/iPhone 7/iPhone SE/iPhone 6s Plus/iPhone 6s/iPhone 6 Plus/ iPhone 7, iPhone SE, iPhone 6s Plus, iPhone 6s,
iPhone 6/iPhone 5c/iPhone 5s/iPhone 5/iPhone 4s iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5s, iPhone
5, iPod touch (6th generation), iPod touch (5th
generation).

The 30-pin connector works with iPhone 4s.

USB works with iPhone 7 Plus, iPhone 7, iPhone SE,

iPhone 6s Plus, iPhone 6s, iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6,

Features
iPhone 5c, iPhone 5s, iPhone 5, iPhone 4s, iPod touch
(6th generation), iPod touch (5th generation).

■ USB Flash Drives 1USB Flash Drives

Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored
• A USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher is recommended. order. This order may be different from the order
• Some digital audio players may not be compatible. displayed on your PC or device.
• Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work.
• Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
• Some versions of MP3, WMA, AAC, FLAC, or WAV formats may be unsupported.

305
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 306 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement

Honda App License Agreement

■ END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
PLEASE CAREFULLY READ THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (THIS “AGREEMENT”) WHICH GOVERNS YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE
INSTALLED ON YOUR HONDA OR ACURA VEHICLE (YOUR “VEHICLE”) AS WELL AS THE APPLICATIONS, SERVICES, FUNCTIONS, AND
CONTENT PROVIDED THROUGH THE SOFTWARE (COLLECTIVELY, THE “SERVICES”). YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES WILL
SERVE AS YOUR CONSENT TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THE SOFTWARE IS OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR
OPERATED BY AMERICAN HONDA MOTOR CO. INC., (“HONDA,” “US,” “WE,” OR “OUR”), WITH ITS BUSINESS ADDRESS AT 1919
TORRANCE BLVD., TORRANCE, CA 90501. REFERENCE TO “HONDA” IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES HONDA’S PARENT COMPANY AND
ITS AFFILIATES AND DESIGNATED AGENTS. THE SERVICES ARE OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR OPERATED BY HONDA OR A
THIRD-PARTY SERVICE PROVIDER (A “PROVIDER”). REFERENCE TO A “PROVIDER” IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES SUCH PROVIDER’S
PARENT COMPANY, AFFILIATES, AND DESIGNATED AGENTS.

A. Description of the Software. The SOFTWARE includes the software, firmware and the like, installed and executing on your VEHICLE
Features

during manufacture, and thereafter updated from time to time by HONDA, you or an authorized HONDA dealer (a “DEALER”). The
SOFTWARE allows you to access and use a variety of SERVICES, including but not limited to: (a) HONDA applications, services, and content
provided through the SOFTWARE (together, “HONDA SERVICES”); and (b) PROVIDER applications, services, and content provided through
the SOFTWARE (together, “PROVIDER SERVICES”), each of which may provide access to various information, media, content, and services.

B. SOFTWARE Licensing and Intellectual Property.

1. SOFTWARE. This AGREEMENT grants you a non-exclusive, limited, and revocable license to use the SOFTWARE and SERVICES solely (a)
as installed on your VEHICLE by HONDA, (b) as updated on your Vehicle by HONDA, you (but only as and when directed by HONDA), or a
DEALER and (c) as permitted under the terms of this AGREEMENT.

2. HONDA Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various HONDA SERVICES. Installation, activation, or use of HONDA
SERVICES may require your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies applicable to those HONDA SERVICES (the
“HONDA TERMS”). You acknowledge and agree that any collection, use, sharing of data generated by your VEHICLE or your use of your
VEHICLE, and your use of the HONDA SERVICES shall be subject to this AGREEMENT and any additional HONDA TERMS that may be
specifically applicable to such HONDA SERVICES or data generation. The HONDA SERVICES may collect, use, and share such data while
you are using the SOFTWARE.

306
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 307 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement

3. Open-Source Software. The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may incorporate software licensed to HONDA under free or open-source
licenses which govern HONDA’s distribution and your use of such software. HONDA and the third-party authors, licensors, and distributors
of such software disclaim all warranties and all liability arising from any and all use or distribution of the software. To the extent such
software is provided under terms that differ from the applicable free or open-source licenses, those terms are offered by HONDA alone.
Additional information regarding free and open-source software incorporated in the SOFTWARE and SERVICES is available in this manual
or within the SOFTWARE.

4. Provider Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various PROVIDER SERVICES. Installation or use of such PROVIDER
SERVICES may require your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies of the applicable PROVIDER (the “PROVIDER
TERMS”). This AGREEMENT restricts the manner in which you can install and use PROVIDER SERVICES but does not grant you a license or
permission to use such PROVIDER SERVICES. Your permission to use PROVIDER SERVICES is limited and subject to any license grants,
conditions, and limitations included in the PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge that any collection, use, sharing of your information,

Features
targeted advertising practices by PROVIDERS, and your use of the PROVIDER SERVICES shall be subject to both this AGREEMENT and any
applicable PROVIDER TERMS. The PROVIDER SERVICES may collect, use, and share such information while you are using the SOFTWARE.

5. License Limitations and Restrictions on Use.

(a) Limited License. You understand and agree that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are licensed, not sold, to you solely for use in accordance
with this AGREEMENT and any applicable PROVIDER TERMS, and any documentation for the VEHICLE made available to you by HONDA
(any “DOCUMENTATION”). HONDA and its licensors reserve all rights in the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES not expressly granted to
you under this AGREEMENT. PROVIDERS and their licensors reserve all rights in the PROVIDER SERVICES not expressly granted to you under
the applicable PROVIDER TERMS.

Continued 307
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 308 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement

(b) Restrictions on Use. The licenses granted under this AGREEMENT do not permit you to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES on a device
other than your VEHICLE. As a condition of using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, you agree that you may not and will not:
(1) copy, download, distribute, modify, publish, sell, rent, lease, lend, license, sublicense, reuse, or create derivative works of the
SOFTWARE or SERVICES or any of the content or other material within the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including without limitation,
HONDA or PROVIDER names, logos, or any other trademarks of HONDA or PROVIDERS or used in association with the SOFTWARE or
any SERVICES, except as required to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in accordance with this AGREEMENT, any applicable PROVIDER
TERMS, and the DOCUMENTATION;
(2) access or use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in any manner intended to damage or impair the operation of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES
or interfere with anyone else’s use and enjoyment of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES;
(3) access or attempt to access any system or server on which the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is hosted or modify or alter the SOFTWARE
or SERVICES in any way;
(4) use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES for any unlawful purpose, or in violation of any third party rights;
Features

(5) use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in violation of any applicable traffic regulations, rules or laws, including but not limited to any driver
distraction laws, rules or regulations;
(6) violate the terms of this AGREEMENT, any HONDA TERMS, any PROVIDER TERMS or other applicable third-party terms, conditions,
and privacy policies; or
(7) reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, attempt to derive the source code of, nor permit others to reverse engineer, decompile,
or disassemble, or attempt to derive the source code of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, except and only to the extent that such activity is
expressly permitted (a) by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation or (b) the terms of applicable free or opensource software
licenses.

6. Intellectual Property Rights. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, the accompanying
DOCUMENTATION, and all copies of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are owned by HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their suppliers or licensors. This
AGREEMENT does not grant you any rights in connection with any trademarks or service marks of HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their licensors,
affiliates, or suppliers.

308
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 309 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement

7. Export Restrictions: You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are subject to U.S., European Union, and other export
jurisdictions. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, including
the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use, and destination restrictions issued by the U.S. and other
governments.

C. SOFTWARE Operation
1. HONDA reserves the right to suspend or terminate your access to and use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES if you are found to be in
violation of this AGREEMENT or as reasonably deemed necessary by HONDA.

2. Eligibility/Registration/Activation. The SOFTWARE is intended for and available to individuals who (a) are of legal age of majority in their
jurisdiction of residence (and at least 18 years of age), or are younger than 18 years of age and possess a valid driver’s license issued by
their jurisdiction of residence, and (b) own or have permissive access to a compatible VEHICLE. We do not knowingly collect any

Features
information, including personal information, from children under 13. If we learn or are notified that we have collected personal
information of a child under 13, we will immediately take steps to delete such information.

3. Use of PROVIDER SERVICES through the SOFTWARE. Certain PROVIDER SERVICES made available through the SOFTWARE may require
that you register or otherwise have an account with the PROVIDER and agree to PROVIDER TERMS. Any use of any of such PROVIDER
SERVICES within the SOFTWARE is subject to this AGREEMENT and the applicable PROVIDER TERMS. HONDA does not exercise control
over such PROVIDER SERVICES and is not responsible or liable for the availability, security, or content of such PROVIDER SERVICES, and the
inclusion of any PROVIDER SERVICES does not imply a referral from, the approval of, or the endorsement by HONDA of such PROVIDER
SERVICES. HONDA is not responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for any damage relating to or resulting from your use of the PROVIDER
SERVICES.

4. Links to Third Party Sites: The SOFTWARE may provide you with the ability to access third-party sites and content through the use of the
SOFTWARE or SERVICES. The third-party sites and content are not under the control of HONDA. HONDA is not responsible or liable,
directly or indirectly, for such third-party websites and their content or for any damage relating to or resulting from your access or use of
such websites and content.

Continued 309
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 310 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement

5. Unauthorized Use and Abuse. You are responsible for ensuring your (and any authorized third parties’) use of the SOFTWARE and
SERVICES remains in compliance with this AGREEMENT and all other applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge
and agree that any use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES occurring through your VEHICLE will be deemed your actions and that HONDA and
PROVIDERS may rely upon such actions. You agree to immediately notify us if you suspect fraudulent or abusive activity involving the
SOFTWARE or SERVICES. If you so notify us or if we otherwise suspect fraudulent or abusive activity, you agree to cooperate with us in any
fraud investigation and to use any fraud prevention measures we prescribe. Your failure to immediately notify us or cooperate to use such
measures will result in your liability for all fraudulent usage or abusive activity associated with your VEHICLE.

6. SOFTWARE Updates. The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be updated when your VEHICLE is serviced by a DEALER or remotely, over-the-
air, by HONDA from time to time; such updates may occur with or without further notice or your future consent. The SOFTWARE may be
updated at HONDA’s discretion and for any purpose including, without limitation, to patch or otherwise improve the SOFTWARE or
SERVICES functionality, security, or stability. All updates to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are subject to this AGREEMENT and any other
Features

applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS.

7. Uninstalling, Removing, and Replacing the SOFTWARE. Replacing SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES with software or firmware not
provided and installed by HONDA or a DEALER will render all representations and warranties for the SOFTWARE, HONDA SERVICES, and
VEHICLE functionality reliant upon the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES null and void.

D. SOFTWARE Operational Notices and Warnings

1. Vehicle Geolocation Information. You acknowledge that your VEHICLE may be equipped with certain traffic and map features. The
traffic feature will automatically collect and transmit, through GPS technology, your Vehicle’s current location (longitude and latitude),
travel direction and speed (“VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION”) to HONDA and PROVIDERS. The VEHICLE GEOLOCATION
INFORMATION is used by HONDA and PROVIDERS to provide traffic and navigation-related information to you, but may also be used to
provide other SERVICES or offers to you. HONDA will not use such VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION for its own marketing efforts,
or provide such information to unaffiliated third parties for their own purposes, without your express consent.

310
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 311 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement

2. Potential Map Inaccuracy and Route Safety. Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in roads, traffic controls,
routing, or driving conditions. Always use good judgment and common sense when following suggested routes. Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal driving maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would
be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route you to emergency
services. Not all emergency services such as police, fire stations, hospitals, or clinics are likely to be contained in the map database for such
navigation features. Ask local authorities or an emergency services operator for such locations and routes. The driver is ultimately
responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions. Any
navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing
traffic regulations. Navigation features are not a substitute for your personal judgment. Any route suggestions made by the SOFTWARE or
SERVICES should never replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or knowledge of safe driving practices.

3. Speech Recognition: You acknowledge and understand that HONDA and PROVIDERS may record, retain, and use voices commands

Features
when you use the speech recognition components of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. You and all VEHICLE operators and passengers (a)
consent to the recording and retention of voice commands in support of providing speech recognition components and (b) release HONDA
and PROVIDERS from all claims, liabilities, and losses that may result from any use of such recorded voice commands. Recognition errors
are inherent in speech recognition. It is your responsibility to monitor any speech recognition functions included in the system and address
any errors. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech recognition process.

4. Distraction Hazards. Navigation features may require manual (non-verbal) input or setup. Attempting to perform such set-up or insert
data while driving can seriously distract your attention and could cause a crash or other serious consequences; the ability to undertake such
interactions may also be limited by state or local law, which laws you are responsible to know and follow. Even occasional short scans of
the screen may be hazardous if your attention has been diverted away from your driving at a critical time. Pull over and stop the vehicle in
a safe and legal manner before attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention. Do not raise the volume
excessively. Keep the volume at a level where you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving. Driving while unable
to hear these sounds could result in a crash.

Continued 311
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 312 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement

E. Information Collection and Storage

1. Information Collection, Use, Transmission and Storage of Data. Consent to Use of Data: You agree that HONDA and PROVIDERS may
collect and use your information gathered in any manner as part of product support services related to the SOFTWARE or related services.
HONDA may share such information with third parties, including, without limitation, PROVIDERS, third party software and services
suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agents, solely to improve their products or to provide services or technologies to you.
HONDA, third party software and systems suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may disclose this information to others,
but not in a form that personally identifies you.

2. Information Storage. Depending on the type of multimedia system you have in your VEHICLE, certain information may be stored for ease
of use of the SOFTWARE including, without limitation, search history, location history in certain applications, previous and saved
destinations, map locations within certain applications, and device numbers and contact information.
Features

(a) Vehicle Health Information. Your VEHICLE may remotely transmit information regarding the status and health of your VEHICLE
(“VEHICLE INFORMATION”) to HONDA without notification to you. VEHICLE INFORMATION may contain VEHICLE maintenance and
malfunction status that is derived from VEHICLE diagnostic data and includes, but is not limited to, status of powered doors and windows,
battery life data, battery charging data, VEHICLE speed, coolant temperature, air compressor revolution, output power, warning codes,
diagnostic trouble codes, fuel injection volume, and engine rotations per minute. VEHICLE HEALTH INFORMATION may be used by HONDA
for research and development, to deliver HONDA SERVICES and information to you, and to contact you, and is retained only for a period
of time necessary to fulfill these goals.

(b) VEHICLE Geolocation Data (non-navigation/map based). If you opt-in to geolocation-based SERVICES, your vehicle’s geolocation data
(latitude and longitude) will be automatically sent from your VEHICLE to HONDA and PROVIDERS.

(c) You understand that the inputting or uploading of information to your VEHICLE’s multimedia system or the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is
at your own risk and that HONDA is not responsible for unauthorized access to or use of any personal or other information. All information
uploaded to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be stored on your VEHICLES’s multimedia system and you understand that the security and
safety of your VEHICLE’s multimedia system is your sole responsibility.

312
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 313 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement

F. NO WARRANTY. You understand and agree that your use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are solely at your own risk and that you
will be solely responsible for any damage to your VEHICLE’s multimedia system or any other equipment or any loss of data that may result
from your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. THE SOFTWARE AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED ON AN “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE” BASIS
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESSED, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY. WE SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. HONDA makes no warranties that the
SOFTWARE or SERVICES will meet your requirements, or that the SOFTWARE or SERVICES will be uninterrupted, timely, secure, non-
infringing or error free. You understand and agree that you are responsible for any and all charges, costs or expenses associated with your
use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. Advice or information, whether oral or written, obtained by you from us or through the SOFTWARE
or SERVICES are provided for informational purposes only and will not create any warranty not expressly made herein. You should not rely
on any such information or advice. We assume no liability or responsibility for any errors or omissions in the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. We
do not make any warranty or representation that your use of the material displayed on, or obtained through, the SOFTWARE or SERVICES
is non-infringing of any rights of any third party. Any decision or action taken by you on the basis of information or content provided via

Features
the application is at your sole discretion and risk. HONDA and PROVIDERS are not responsible or liable for any such decision, or for the
accuracy, completeness, usefulness, or availability of any content or information displayed, transmitted, or otherwise made available via
the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. To the extent jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of certain warranties, some of the above exclusions may
not apply to you.

G. LIMITATIONS ON LIABILITY. You and HONDA are each waiving important rights.
1. Limitations on YOUR liability. HONDA cannot recover from you any consequential, indirect, incidental, or special damages, or attorney’s
fees in connection with your use of the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES. HONDA WAIVES TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW
ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN DIRECT, COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT.

Continued 313
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 314 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement

2. Limitation on HONDA and PROVIDER liability. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will be liable to you or any other party for consequential,
indirect, incidental, special, or punitive damages (including without limitation lost profits) in connection with your use of the SOFTWARE
or SERVICES, even if HONDA or PROVIDERS are aware of the possibility of such damages. These limitations apply to all claims, including,
without limitation, claims in contract and tort (such as negligence, product liability and strict liability). To the extent that a jurisdiction does
not permit the exclusion or limitation of liability as set forth herein our liability is limited to the maximum extent permitted by law in such
states. If HONDA or PROVIDERS are found liable to you for any reason, you agree that the aggregate liability of all these parties to you for
any claim is limited to ten U.S. dollars (US $10.00). Neither HONDA nor any PROVIDER would have agreed to provide the SOFTWARE or
SERVICES to you if you did not agree to this limitation. This amount is the sole and exclusive liability of HONDA and PROVIDERS to you,
and is payable as liquidated damages and not as a penalty. Except where prohibited by law, you may not bring any claim against HONDA
or any third-party beneficiary more than two (2) years after the claim arises. We do not have any liability for SOFTWARE or SERVICES
interruptions of any length.
Features

(a) Release of HONDA and PROVIDERS For yourself and anyone else claiming under you, you agree to release and discharge HONDA,
PROVIDERS, their respective officers, directors, and employees, and each third-party beneficiary from all claims, liabilities and losses in
connection with the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including, but not limited to claims for personal injury or property damage arising from the
total or partial failure of performance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, even if caused by or based upon the negligence, gross negligence,
strict products liability, Deceptive Trade Practices Act violations, bad faith, or breach of warranty of us or the malfunction of the SOFTWARE
or SOFTWARE SERVICES. YOU AGREE TO WAIVE TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN
DIRECT, COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT. YOU HEREBY RELEASE AND DISCHARGE HONDA AND ITS
LICENSORS AND CONTRACTORS (INCLUDING ANY THIRD PARTIES PROVIDING ALL OR PART OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES) FROM AND
AGAINST ANY CLAIMS, DAMAGES, EXPENSES AND LIABILITY ARISING FROM OR RELATED TO ANY INJURIES, DAMAGES, OR LOSSES TO
ANY PERSON (INCLUDING DEATH) OR PROPERTY OF ANY KIND RESULTING IN WHOLE OR PART, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, FROM YOUR
USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES.

H. Survival. You agree that the limitations of liability and indemnities in this AGREEMENT will survive even after the AGREEMENT has
ended. These limitations of liability apply not only to you, but to anyone using the SOFTWARE or SERVICES via your VEHICLE, to anyone
making a claim on your behalf, and to any claims made by your family, employees, customers, or others arising out of or relating to your
VEHICLE, the SOFTWARE, or SERVICES.

314
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 315 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement

I. Availability/Interruption. The SOFTWARE and certain SERVICES are made available through your VEHICLE’s compatible multimedia
system when the VEHICLE is turned on. Certain SERVICES may be available only through your compatible mobile device when it is within
the operating range of the VEHICLE and a wireless carrier. The availability of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be subject to transmission
limitation or interruption, including but not limited to technical obsolesce or sunsetting of the hardware, software or firmware, inside of
or external to the Vehicle, required for data transmission or receipt. HONDA does not guarantee that the SOFTWARE, SERVICES, or any
portion thereof will be available at all times or in all areas. You acknowledge and agree that HONDA is not responsible for performance
degradation, interruption or delays. You acknowledge that HONDA shall not be liable to you if the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in a given
location are not available. If the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are not available within your intended location, you agree that your sole remedy
shall be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES.

J. PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support for the SOFTWARE is provided by HONDA. For product support, please refer to HONDA
instructions provided in the DOCUMENTATION. Should you have any questions concerning this AGREEMENT, or if you desire to contact

Features
HONDA for any other reason, please refer to the HONDA contact information provided in the DOCUMENTATION.

K. Termination and Transfer.

1. Termination. This AGREEMENT is effective until terminated by you or US. WE may terminate this AGREEMENT for any or no reason,
and with or without notice to you. Your rights under this AGREEMENT will terminate automatically without notice from US if you fail to
comply with any term of this AGREEMENT. Upon termination of this AGREEMENT, you shall cease all use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES.

2. Transfer: You may permanently transfer your rights under this AGREEMENT only as part of a sale or transfer of the VEHICLE, provided
you retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES (including all component parts, the media and printed
materials, and any upgrades), and the recipient agrees to the terms of this AGREEMENT. You agree to notify HONDA upon the sale or
transfer of the VEHICLE. To contact HONDA, please refer to the HONDA contact information provided in the DOCUMENTATION.

Continued 315
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 316 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement

L. Changes to the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. WE may change, modify, or update the SOFTWARE or SERVICES from time to time. Unless
explicitly stated otherwise, any new features or services that augment or enhance the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in the future shall
respectively be considered part of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES and subject to this AGREEMENT. WE reserve the right at any time and from
time to time to interrupt, restrict, modify, suspend, discontinue, temporarily or permanently, the SOFTWARE or SERVICES (or any portion
thereof), with or without notice to you, and you agree that HONDA shall not be liable to you or to any third party for any modification,
suspension or discontinuance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES.

M. ARBITRATION:
PLEASE READ THIS ARBITRATION PROVISION CAREFULLY TO UNDERSTAND YOUR RIGHTS. YOU AGREE THAT ANY CLAIM THAT YOU
MAY HAVE IN THE FUTURE MUST BE RESOLVED THROUGH BINDING ARBITRATION. YOU WAIVE THE RIGHT TO HAVE YOUR DISPUTE
HEARD IN COURT AND WAIVE THE RIGHT TO BRING CLASS CLAIMS. YOU UNDERSTAND THAT DISCOVERY AND APPEAL RIGHTS ARE
MORE LIMITED IN ARBITRATION.
Features

Arbitration is a method of resolving a claim, dispute or controversy without filing a lawsuit. By agreeing to arbitrate, the right to go to
court is waived and instead claims, disputes or controversies are submitted to binding arbitration. This provision sets forth the terms and
conditions of our agreement. YOU and HONDA agree and acknowledge that this Agreement affects interstate commerce and the
Federal Arbitration Act (“FAA”) applies. By using the Software, Vehicle, or Services, YOU elect to have disputes resolved by arbitration.
YOU, HONDA or any involved third party may pursue a Claim. “Claim” means any dispute between YOU, HONDA, or any involved third
party relating to your use of the Software, the Vehicle, or the Services, this Agreement, or our relationship, including any
representations, omissions or warranties. “Claim” does not include personal injury or wrongful death claims. YOU or HONDA may seek
remedies in small claims court or provisional judicial remedies without arbitrating. In addition, notwithstanding anything herein to the
contrary, YOU or HONDA may seek equitable relief in a court of competent jurisdiction.
YOU or HONDA may select arbitration with American Arbitration Association, JAMS or National Arbitration and Mediation. Contact
these sponsors for their rules. The hearing will be in the federal district where YOU reside. If agreed, it may be by telephone or written
submissions. Filing and arbitrator fees to be paid per the sponsor rules. You may contact the sponsor for a fee waiver. If no fee waivers,
HONDA will pay filing and arbitrator fees up to $5,000, unless law requires more. Each party is responsible for other fees. Arbitrator
may award costs or fees to prevailing party, if permitted by law. HONDA will not seek fees, unless the claims are frivolous.

316
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 317 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement

Arbitrator shall be an attorney or current or retired judge familiar with automotive or consumer software. The arbitrator shall follow
substantive law, statute of limitations and decide all issues relating to the interpretation, construction, enforceability and applicability of
this provision. The arbitrator may order relief permitted by law. This provision is governed and enforceable by the FAA. An award shall
include a written opinion and be final, subject to appeal by the FAA.
This provision survives termination of this Agreement or relationship, bankruptcy, assignment or transfer. If part of this provision is
unenforceable, the remainder remains in effect. If unenforceability allows arbitration as a class action, then this provision is entirely
unenforceable. YOU may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software by sending a signed, written notice to HONDA at
Honda Financial Services, P.O. Box 165007, Irving, TX 75016. HONDA reserves the right to make changes to this provision after
providing written notice and an opportunity to opt out.

N. Miscellaneous: You may not assign this AGREEMENT without HONDA’s prior written consent. This AGREEMENT and any additional
HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS represents the entire agreement between you and US. HONDA may amend the terms of this

Features
AGREEMENT by providing you with notices of such updated terms. If you do not consent to be bound by the updated terms, your sole
remedy will be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES. If any part of this AGREEMENT is found invalid, void, or unenforceable, the
balance of the AGREEMENT will remain valid and enforceable according to its terms. To the fullest extent permitted by law, and except as
explicitly provided otherwise, this AGREEMENT and any disputes arising out of or relating to it will be governed by the laws of the State of
California, except that California laws concerning choice of law or conflicts shall not apply if they would cause the substantive law of
another jurisdiction to apply. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Section M shall be governed by the Federal Arbitration Act and the laws of
the State of California, as applicable, as set forth therein. The failure to enforce any term of this AGREEMENT on one occasion shall not
prevent enforcement on any other occasion or the enforcement of any other term. Headings and captions shall not be considered included
for purposes of interpretation or application hereof, but are for convenience only.

317
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 318 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto

Legal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto

■ OWNER’S MANUAL LICENSE/LIABILITY STATEMENTS
USE OF APPLE CARPLAY IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE, WHICH ARE INCLUDED AS PART OF THE
APPLE iOS TERMS OF USE. IN SUMMARY, THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ LIABILITY IF THE
SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ OTHER
LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND
VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS
ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF CARPLAY, INCLUDING THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE APPLE’S PRIVACY POLICY FOR
DETAILS REGARDING APPLE’S USE AND HANDLING OF DATA UPLOADED BY CARPLAY.

USE OF ANDROID AUTO IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE WHICH MUST BE AGREED TO WHEN
THE ANDROID AUTO APPLICATION IS DOWNLOADED TO YOUR ANDROID PHONE. IN SUMMARY, THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE
DISCLAIM GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED,
Features

STRICTLY LIMIT GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ OTHER LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING,
FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY GOOGLE AND ITS
SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF ANDROID AUTO, INCLUDING THE
POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE GOOGLE’S PRIVACY POLICY FOR DETAILS REGARDING GOOGLE’S USE AND HANDLING OF
DATA UPLOADED BY ANDROID AUTO.

318
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 319 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto

■ DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES; LIMITATION ON LIABILITY

YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF APPLE CARPLAY OR ANDROID AUTO (“THE APPLICATIONS”) IS AT YOUR
SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU TO THE
MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, AND THAT THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS IS
PROVIDED “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE,” WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND HONDA HEREBY
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS,
EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ACCURACY, QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NON-
INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY HONDA OR AN AUTHORIZED
REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY. AS EXAMPLES, AND WITHOUT LIMITATION, HONDA DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF DATA PROVIDED BY THE APPLICATIONS, SUCH AS THE ACCURACY OF DIRECTIONS, ESTIMATED
TRAVEL TIME, SPEED LIMITS, ROAD CONDITIONS, NEWS, WEATHER, TRAFFIC, OR OTHER CONTENT PROVIDED BY APPLE, GOOGLE, THEIR

Features
AFFILIATES, OR THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE AGAINST LOSS OF APPLICATION DATA, WHICH MAY BE LOST
AT ANY TIME; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE THAT THE APPLICATIONS OR ANY SERVICES PROVIDED THROUGH THEM WILL BE
PROVIDED AT ALL TIMES OR THAT ANY OR ALL SERVICES WILL BE AVAILABLE AT ANY PARTICULAR TIME OR LOCATION. FOR EXAMPLE,
SERVICES MAY BE SUSPENDED OR INTERRUPTED WITHOUT NOTICE FOR REPAIR, MAINTENANCE, SECURITY FIXES, UPDATES, ETC.,
SERVICES MAY BE UNAVAILABLE IN YOUR AREA OR LOCATION, ETC. IN ADDITION, YOU UNDERSTAND THAT CHANGES IN THIRD PARTY
TECHNOLOGY OR GOVERNMENT REGULATION MAY RENDER THE SERVICES AND/OR APPLICATIONS OBSOLETE AND/OR UNUSABLE.

TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA OR ITS AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR PERSONAL INJURY, OR ANY
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR
LOSS OF PROFITS, CORRUPTION OR LOSS OF DATA, FAILURE TO TRANSMIT OR RECEIVE ANY DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR ANY
OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THE APPLICATIONS OR YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO
USE THE APPLICATIONS OR INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS, HOWEVER CAUSED, REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY
(CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE) AND EVEN IF HONDA WERE ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME STATES AND
JURISDICTIONS DISALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES, SO THESE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS MAY
NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA’S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL DAMAGES (OTHER THAN AS MAY BE REQUIRED
BY APPLICABLE LAW IN CASES INVOLVING PERSONAL INJURY) EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF FIVE DOLLARS ($5.00). THE FOREGOING
LIMITATIONS WILL APPLY EVEN IF THE ABOVE STATED REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.

319
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 320 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuAbout Open Source Licenses

About Open Source Licenses

To see the open source license information, follow these steps. 1About Open Source Licenses
1. Press the button. Models with Telematics Control Unit
2. Select Settings. Free/Open Source Software Information
3. Select System.
4. Select About. This product contains Free/Open Source
Software(FOSS).
5. Select Legal Information.
The license information and/or the source code of
6. Select License. such FOSS can be found at the following URL.

https://www.denso.com/global/en/opensource/tcu/
honda/
Features

320
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 321 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information *

License Information *
■ DOLBY DIGITAL
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Audio, Pro
Logic, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

■ DTS

Features
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS
Licensing Limited. DTS, DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are
registered trademarks of DTS, Inc.©DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

* Not available on all models Continued 321

 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 322 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information *

■ Bluetooth
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by PANASONIC CORPORATION is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

■ Windows Media
Features

This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft. Use or

distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a
license from Microsoft.

322
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 323 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information *

■ Apple
“Made for iPod,” and “Made for iPhone,” mean that an electronic accessory has
been designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has been
certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not
responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and
regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, or iPhone,
may affect wireless performance.
Apple, the Apple Logo, iPhone, iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered
in the U.S. and other countries. Apple CarPlay, and Lightning are trademarks of
Apple Inc. App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.

Features
Continued 323
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 324 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information *

■ MPEG
Mpeg4 Visual
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE MPEG-4 VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO
LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER FOR
(i) ENCODING VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE MPEG-4 VISUALA STANDARD
(“MPEG-4 VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODING MPEG-4 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED
BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL ACTIVITY
AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED BY MPEG LA TO
PROVIDE MPEG-4 VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY
OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION INCLUDING THAT RELATING TO
PROMOTIONAL, INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES AND LICENSING MAY BE
OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, LLC.
Features

SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.

VC-1
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE VC-1 PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE
PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO
IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE VC-1 STANDARD (“VC-1 VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE
VC-1 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL
AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO
PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE VC-1 VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL
BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE
HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.

324
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 325 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information *

AVC/H.264
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE
PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN
COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE
AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL
AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO
PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL
BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE
HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.

■ SDHC Memory Card

Features
microSDHC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.

325
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 326 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Customized Features

Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features. 1Customized Features

When you customize settings:
■ How to customize • Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.
With the power mode in ON, select Settings, then select a setting item. • Put the transmission into (P .

To customize features detail, refer to the following.

2 Customization flow P. 327
2 List of customizable options P. 333
Features

Audio/Information Screen

326
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 327 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuCustomized Featuresu

■ Customization flow
Press the button.
Day & Time Set Date & Time Automatic Date &
Time
Select Settings. Set Date
Set Time
Time Zone Automatic Time
Zone *
(Select time zone)
Auto Daylight Saving
Time
Date Format

Features
Time Format

Language
System
Touch Panel
Sensitivity

System Volumes System Volumes

Reading/Warning Verbal Reminder
Config. of
Select configuration
Instrument Panel
Security Password
Unknown sources

* Not available on all models Continued 327

 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 328 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Accessibility Caption Caption

Text-to-speech output Language
Text Size
Caption style
Refuel
recommend *

About Status
Features

Legal Information

Factory Data
Reset

Detail App Manager

Information
Recent Location
Requests Apps

328 * Not available on all models

22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 329 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Wi-Fi Change Mode

(Available Networks/Connected Devices)
Connections
Bluetooth Options Bluetooth
+ Connect New Device
(Saved Devices)
Smartphone Apple CarPlay
Connection Android Auto

Display Day Mode

Features
Night Mode

Sound Bass / Treble Treble

Midrange
Bass
Subwoofer *
Balance / Fader
DTS Neural
Surround *
Speed Volume
Compensation

* Not available on all models Continued 329

 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 330 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuCustomized Featuresu

TPMS Calibration

Driver Assist Blind Spot Info

System Setup Traffic Sign Recognition System
Forward Collision Warning Distance
ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep
Vehicle Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep
Road Departure Mitigation Setting
Driver Attention Monitor

Meter Setup Language Selection

Features

Adjust Outside Temp. Display

Adjust Alarm Volume
Reverse Alert Tone
Config. of Instrument Panel
Fuel Efficiency Backlight
“Trip A” Reset Timing
“Trip B” Reset Timing
Speed/Distance Units

330
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 331 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Keyless Access Door Unlock Mode

Setup Smart Entry Light Flash
Smart Entry Beep
Remote Start System ON/OFF

Lighting Setup Auto Light Sensitivity

Auto Interior Illumination Sensitivity
Auto Headlight On with Wiper On
Headlight Auto OFF Timer

Features
Interior Light Dimming Time

Door/Window Auto Door Lock

Setup Key and Remote Unlock Mode
Keyless Lock Answer Back
Security Relock Timer
Auto Door Unlock
Walk Away Auto Lock

Maintenance Info. Select Reset Items

Continued 331
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 332 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Camera Rear Camera Fixed Guideline

Dynamic Guideline

Cross Traffic
Monitor
Features

332
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 333 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuCustomized Featuresu

■ List of customizable options

Setup
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Group

Automatic
Selects ON to have the GPS automatically adjust
Date & ON*1/OFF
the clock. Select OFF to cancel this function.
Time
Set
Date & Adjusts date.
Set Date —
Time 2 Adjusting the Clock P. 156

Adjusts clock.
Set Time —
2 Adjusting the Clock P. 156
System Day & Time

Features
Automatic Sets the audio system to automatically adjust the
ON*1/OFF
Time Time Zone * clock when driving through different time zones.
Zone (Select time
Changes the time zone manually. —
zone)

Select ON to have the GPS automatically adjust the

Auto Daylight Saving
clock to daylight savings time. Select OFF to cancel ON*1/OFF
Time
this function.

*1:Default Setting

* Not available on all models Continued 333

 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 334 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Group

MM/DD/YYYY*1/
Date Format Sets the date format. DD/MM/YYYY/
Day & Time YYYY/MM/DD

Time Format Selects the digital clock display from 12H to 24H. 12H*1/24H

English (United
Language Changes the display language. States)*1/Español/
System Français

Touch Panel
Features

Sets the sensitivity of the touch panel screen. High/Normal*1

Sensitivity

System Volumes Changes the system sounds volume. —

System
Volumes Reading/ Verbal
Turns the verbal reminders on and off. ON*1/OFF
Warning Reminder

*1:Default Setting

334
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 335 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Group

Config. of
Selects whether the apps display comes on or not Config.1*1/Config.2/
Instrument Select configuration
on the driver information interface. Config.3
Panel

Password Set the value of password display. ON*1/OFF

Security
Unknown sources — ON/OFF*1

Caption Turns the subtitles on and off. ON/OFF*1

Default*1/English

Features
Language Change the subtitle language. (United States)/
Español/Français

System Very small/Small/

Text Size Change the subtitle Text Size.
Caption Normal*1/Large

Use app defaults/

Accessibility White on black*1/
Caption Black on white/
Change the subtitle Caption style.
style Yellow on black/
Yellow on blue/
Custom
Current
Text-to-
TTS
speech TtsService — —
engine
output
TtsService

*1:Default Setting
Continued 335
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 336 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Group

Refuel Turns the refuel recommend function on and off.

ON*1/OFF
recommend * 2 Refuel Recommend P. 374

Status
About Displays the Android setting items. —
Legal Information

System Factory Data Resets all the settings to their factory default. Continue/Cancel
Reset 2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 345

Displays the Android system memory and apps

App Manager —
Features

Detail information.
Information Recent Location
Displays the recent location requests from apps. —
Requests Apps

*1:Default Setting

336 * Not available on all models

22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 337 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Group

Network*1/Hotspot/
Change Mode Changes the Wi-Fi mode.
OFF
Wi-Fi
(Available Networks/ Displays the available network(s) or current
—
Connected Devices) connected device(s).
Options Bluetooth Turns the Bluetooth® on and off. ON*1/OFF
Connec-
+ Connect New Pairs a new phone to HFL.
tions —
Bluetooth Device 2 Phone Setup P. 354

Features
Connects, disconnects, or deletes a paired phone.
(Saved Devices) —
2 Phone Setup P. 354

Smartphone Apple CarPlay Sets up the Apple CarPlay connection. —

Connection Android Auto Sets up the Android Auto connection. —

*1:Default Setting

Continued 337
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 338 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Group
Day Mode Changes between the daytime mode and nighttime
Display mode. —
Night Mode 2 Display Setup P. 253

Treble
Midrange
Bass / Treble
Bass
Adjusts the settings of the audio speakers’ sound.
Sound Subwoofer * —
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 252
Features

Balance / Fader

DTS Neural Surround *

Speed Volume Compensation

Cancels/Calibrates the tire pressure monitoring

TPMS Calibration Calibrate/Cancel
system (TPMS).
Vehicle
Driver Assist Traffic Sign Select On/Off to indicate small displaying traffic Small Icons ON*1/
System Setup Recognition System sign icon on the driver information interface. Small Icons OFF

*1:Default Setting

338 * Not available on all models

22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 339 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Group
Audible and Visual
Blind Spot Info Changes the setting for the blind spot information.
Alert*1/Visual Alert

Forward Collision Changes Collision Mitigation Braking System Normal*1/Short/

Warning Distance (CMBSTM) alert distance. Long

Causes the system to beep when the system

ACC Forward Vehicle
detects a vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out of ON/OFF*1
Detect Beep
the ACC with Low Speed Follow range.
Driver Assist
System Setup Lane Keeping Assist Causes the system to beep when Lane Keeping

Features
ON/OFF*1
Suspend Beep Assist System (LKAS) is suspended.
Vehicle Normal*1/Wide/
Road Departure Changes the setting for the road departure
Warning Only/
Mitigation Setting mitigation system.
Narrow
OFF/Tactile Alert/
Driver Attention Changes the setting for the driver attention
Tactile And Audible
Monitor monitor.
Alert*1
English*1/Français/
Language Selection Changes the display language.
Español
Meter Setup
Adjust Outside
Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees. -5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F
Temp. Display

*1:Default Setting

Continued 339
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 340 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Group
Changes the alarm volume, such as the buzzers,
Adjust Alarm Volume High/Mid*1/Low
warnings, turn signal sound, and so on.

Reverse Alert Tone Turns the reverse alert tone on and off. ON*1/OFF

Config. of Selects whether the apps display comes on or not Config.1*1/Config.2/

Instrument Panel on the driver information interface. Config.3

Fuel Efficiency
Turns the ambient meter feature on and off. ON*1/OFF
Backlight
Vehicle Meter Setup
Features

When Fully
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A
“Trip A” Reset Timing Refueled/Manually
and average fuel economy A.
Reset*1/IGN OFF

When Fully
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B
“Trip B” Reset Timing Refueled/Manually
and average fuel economy B.
Reset*1/IGN OFF
km/h·km/
Speed/Distance Units Selects the trip computer units.
mph·miles*1

*1:Default Setting

340
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 341 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Group

Changes which doors unlock when you grab the Driver Door Only*1/
Door Unlock Mode
driver’s door handle. All Doors

Smart Entry Light Causes some exterior lights to flash when you
ON*1/OFF
Keyless Access Flash unlock/lock the doors.
Vehicle
Setup Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/lock
Smart Entry Beep ON*1/OFF
the doors.
Remote Start System
Turns the remote engine start feature on and off. ON*1/OFF
ON/OFF

Features
*1:Default Setting

Continued 341
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 342 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Group
Auto Light Min/Low/Mid*1/
Changes the timing for the headlights to come on.
Sensitivity High/Max

Auto Interior Changes the sensitivity of the brightness of the

Min/Low/Mid*1/
Illumination instrument panel when the headlight switch is in
High/Max
Sensitivity AUTO.
Used to automatically come on the headlights
Lighting
Vehicle Auto Headlight On when the wipers are used several times within a
Setup ON*1/OFF
with Wiper On certain number of intervals with the headlight
Features

switch is in AUTO.
Headlight Auto OFF Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay 0sec/15sec*1/30sec/
Timer on after you close the driver’s door. 60sec

Interior Light Changes the length of time the interior lights stay
15sec/30sec*1/60sec
Dimming Time on after you close the doors.

*1:Default Setting

342
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 343 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Group

Changes the setting for the automatic locking OFF/With Vehicle

Auto Door Lock
feature. Speed*1/Shift From P

Sets up either the driver’s door or all doors to

Key and Remote Driver Door Only*1/
unlock on the first push of the remote or built-in
Unlock Mode All Doors
key.
Keyless Lock Answer LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.
ON*1/OFF
Back LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.

Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock

Features
Door/Window Security Relock Timer and the security system to set after you unlock the 30sec*1/60sec/90sec
Setup vehicle without opening any door.
Vehicle
OFF/All Doors When
Driver’s Door
Changes the setting for when the doors unlock Opens*1/All Doors
Auto Door Unlock
automatically. When Shifted to
Park/All Doors With
IGN OFF
Walk Away Auto Changes the settings for the auto lock function
ON/OFF*1
Lock when you walk away from the vehicle.
Maintenance Resets the Maintenance MinderTM display when you
Select Reset Items —
Info. have performed the maintenance service.

*1:Default Setting

Continued 343
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 344 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Group

Selects whether the guidelines come on the rear

Fixed Guideline camera monitor. ON*1/OFF
2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 483
Rear Camera
Camera Selects whether the guidelines come on the rear
Dynamic Guideline camera monitor. ON*1/OFF
2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 483

Cross Traffic Monitor Turns the cross traffic monitor feature on and off. ON*1/OFF

*1:Default Setting
Features

344
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 345 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings

Defaulting All the Settings

Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults. 1Defaulting All the Settings
When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset
■ Defaulting System Settings all settings to default and delete all personal data.

1. Press the button. If you perform Factory Data Reset, it will reset the
2. Select Settings. preinstalled apps to their factory default.
3. Select System.
4. Select Factory Data Reset. If you perform Factory Data Reset, you cannot use
the HondaLink® because it goes offline.
u A confirmation message appears on the
2 HondaLink® P. 281
screen.
5. Select Continue to reset the settings.
6. Select Continue again to reset the settings.
u The system will reboot.

Features
■ Defaulting Vehicle Settings
1. Press the button.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Vehicle.
4. Select Default.
5. Select Yes.

345
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 346 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver *

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver can be programmed to operate up to three 1HomeLink® Universal Transceiver *
remote controlled devices around your home, such as garage doors, lighting, or Before programming HomeLink to operate a garage
home security systems. door opener, confirm that the opener has an external
entrapment protection system, such as an “electronic
■ Important Safety Precautions
eye,” or other safety and reverse stop features. If it
does not, HomeLink may not be able to operate it.
Refer to the safety information that came with your garage door opener to test that
the safety features are functioning properly. If you do not have the safety NOTE:
Some LED lightbulbs installed in the garage door
information, contact the manufacturer.
opener can interfere with the training and consistent
operation of your HomeLink device. Please consider
Before programming HomeLink, make sure that people and objects are out of the use of Low RF interference bulbs in your garage door
way of the garage or gate to prevent potential injury or damage. opener.
Features

When programming a garage door opener, park just outside the garage door’s path.

346 * Not available on all models

22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 347 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHomeLink® Universal Transceiver * uTraining HomeLink

Training HomeLink
I HomeLink Button If it is necessary to erase a previously entered
Indicator learned code:
• Press and hold the I and III HomeLink
buttons for about 10 seconds, until the
green indicator blinks. Release the buttons,
and proceed to step 1.
• If you are training the second or third
button, go directly to step 1.

III HomeLink Button

Features
The instructions on the next page should work for most gate or garage openers, but
may not work for all. For detailed instructions about your specific remote opener,
visit http://www.homelink.com or call (800) 355-3515.

Continued 347
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 348 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHomeLink® Universal Transceiver * uTraining HomeLink

■ Programming a Button 1Training HomeLink

Reprogramming a Button
1. Position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 to 3 inches (3 - 8 cm) from the If you want to retrain a programmed button for a
HomeLink® button you want to program. new device, you do not have to erase all button
memory. You can replace the existing memory code
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Is the HomeLink indicator (LED) slowly using this procedure:
flashing orange?
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until
the HomeLink indicator begins to slowly flash
YES NO orange. This should take about 20 seconds.
3a. Hold the button on the remote 3b. Canadian Garage Door Opener
transmitter. Does HomeLink indicator A. Press and release the HomeLink 2. Release the HomeLink button and position the
(LED) change from slowly flashing button. Press, hold and release the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 - 3 inches
orange to rapidly flashing green or (3 - 8 cm) from the HomeLink button you want to
button on the remote every 2 secs. program, then follow steps 3 - 6 under
continuously on green? The process
Does the HomeLink indicator (LED) “programming a button.”
Features

should take less than 60 seconds.

change from slowly flashing orange to
rapidly flashing or continuously on Erasing Button Memory
4. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink To erase programming from the buttons, press and hold
green? The process should take less
button for about a second. Does the device the two outside HomeLink buttons until the HomeLink
(garage door opener) work? than 60 seconds.
indicator changes from orange to rapidly flashing green.
This should take about 10 seconds. You should erase all
YES NO programming before selling the vehicle.

5. Press and hold the HomeLink button again. Operating

Training To operate, simple press and release the
Complete HomeLink LED is HomeLink indicator rapidly flashes programmed HomeLink button. Activation will now
continuously on green. green. occur for the trained device.

6. Press and hold the HomeLink button 5a. The remote has a rolling code. Press the Questions
again. “learn” button on the remote-controlled For questions or comments, visit
www.HomeLink.com, www.youtube.com/
The remote-controlled device should device (e.g. garage door opener).
HomeLinkGentex, or by calling the HomeLink Hotline
operate. (North America only) at (800) 355-3515.
5b. Within 30 secs, press and hold the
Training Complete programmed HomeLink button for 2 HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Gentex
secs. Corporation.

348
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 349 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using 1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone. Place your phone where you can get good reception.

To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell

Using HFL phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature capabilities, visit
■ HFL Buttons automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1-
888-528-7876.
VOL (+ /VOL (- (Volume) Buttons
To use the system, the Bluetooth setting must be
(home) Button ON.
Left Selector Wheel 2 Phone Setup P. 354

Voice control tips

Features
Microphone • Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere
with the microphones.
• Press the button when you want to call a
number using a phonebook name or a number.
Speak clearly and naturally after a beep.
• If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
(Back) Button the command may be misinterpreted.
• To change the volume level, select the audio
(Talk) Button system’s VOL (Volume) or use the remote audio
(Hang-up) Button controls on the steering wheel.
(Pick-up) Button
If there is no Favorite Contact entry in the system, the
pop-up notification appears on the screen.
2 Favorite Contacts P. 359

Continued 349
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 350 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL

(Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the phone menu on the driver 1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
information interface, or to answer an incoming call. Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
(Hang-up) button: Press to end a call. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
(Back) button: Press to go back to the previous screen, or cancel a command. trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any
(Talk) button: Press to access Voice Portal. use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under
license. Other trademarks and trade names are those
Left Selector Wheel: Press the (home) button, then roll up or down to select
of their respective owners.
Phone on the driver information interface, and then press the left selector wheel.
(home) button: Press to go back to the home screen of the driver information HFL Limitations
interface. An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio
system when it is playing. It will resume when the call
To go to the phone screen of the driver information interface: is ended.
1. Press the (home) button on the steering wheel.
Features

2. Select Phone.
u You can select Favorite Contacts or Recent Calls.

350
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 351 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL

■ HFL Status Display 1HFL Status Display

The information that appears on the audio/
The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call. information screen varies between phone models.

Bluetooth Indicator Signal Strength

Appears when your phone is Battery Level Status
connected to HFL.
HFL Mode

Caller’s Name
(If registered)/

Features
Caller’s Number
(If not registered)

■ Limitations for Manual Operation

Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.

Only previously stored phonebook names or numbers can be called using voice
commands while the vehicle is in motion.
2 Favorite Contacts P. 359

351
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 352 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

HFL Menus
The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use the system. 1HFL Menus
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth-
■ Phone settings screen compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle
1. Press the button. is parked.
2. Select Phone.
Some functions are limited while driving.
3. Select Settings.
Features

Change Devices + Connect New Device Pair a new phone to the system.

(Existing entry list) Connect, disconnect, or delete a paired device.

Auto Sync Phone Set phonebook and call history data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to HFL.

Auto Phone Call Transfer Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle.

Ringtone Select a fixed ringtone or the one from the connected cell phone.

HondaLink Assist * Turn HondaLink® Assist on and off.

352 * Not available on all models

22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 353 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Phone menu screen

1. Press the button.
2. Select Phone.

Recent Calls All Display the last outgoing, incoming and missed calls.

Features
Dialed Display the last outgoing calls.
Missed Display the last missed calls.
Received Display the last incoming calls.

Favorite Contacts (Existing entry list) Dial the selected number in the speed dial list.

Contacts Display the phonebook of the paired phone.

Keypad Enter a phone number to dial.

Continued 353
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 354 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Phone Setup
■ Bluetooth® setup
You can turn Bluetooth® function on and off.
1. Press the button.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Connections.
4. Select Bluetooth.
5. Select Options.
6. Select Bluetooth, then ON.
Features

354
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 355 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To pair a cell phone (when there is no 1Phone Setup

phone paired to the system) Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to
1. Press the button. the system before you can make and receive hands-
2. Select Phone. free calls.
3. Select Connect Phone.
Phone Pairing Tips:
4. Make sure your phone is in search or
• You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
discoverable mode, then select + Connect
moving.
New Device. • Up to six phones can be paired.
u HFL automatically searches for a • Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is
Bluetooth® device. paired to the system.
5. Select your phone when it appears on the
list. Once you have paired a phone, you can see it
displayed on the screen with one or more icons on

Features
u If your phone still does not appear,
the right side.
search for Bluetooth® devices using your These icons indicate the following:
phone. : The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.
From your phone, search for : The phone can be used with HFL.
HandsFreeLink.
6. The system gives you a pairing code on the If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlay
audio/information screen. pairing of additional Bluetooth compatible devices is
unavailable.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by phone.
7. Select desired functions and then select
Save.

Continued 355
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 356 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To change the currently paired phone 1To change the currently paired phone
1. Go to the phone settings screen. If no other phones are found or paired when trying to
2 Phone settings screen P. 352 switch to another phone, HFL will inform you that the
2. Select Change Devices. original phone is connected again.
3. Select a phone to connect.
To pair other phones, select + Connect New Device
u HFL disconnects the connected phone
from the Bluetooth screen.
and starts searching for another paired
phone.
4. Select or .
5. Select Save.

■ To delete a paired phone

Features

1. Go to the phone settings screen.

2 Phone settings screen P. 352
2. Select Change Devices.
3. Select a phone you want to delete.

4. Select Delete.
5. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Yes.

356
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 357 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Ringtone 1Ringtone
Vehicle: The fixed ringtone sounds from the
You can change the ringtone setting. speakers.
1. Go to the phone settings screen. Phone: Depending on the make and model of the
2 Phone settings screen P. 352 cell phone, the ringtone stored in the phone will
2. Select Ringtone. sound if the phone is connected.
3. Select Vehicle or Phone.

Features
■ Automatic Transferring
If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically
transferred to HFL.
1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 352
2. Select Auto Phone Call Transfer.
3. Select ON or OFF.

Continued 357
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 358 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History 1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
On some phones, you will be asked to allow your
■ When Auto Sync Phone is set to On: cellular phonebook to be imported.
When your phone is paired, the contents of its
phonebook and call history are automatically When you select a name from the list in the cellular
imported to the system. phonebook, you can see a category icon. The icons
indicate what types of numbers are stored for that
name.

Mobile Work

Home Other
■ Changing the Auto Sync Phone setting
1. Go to the phone settings screen.
Features

Pager Fax
2 Phone settings screen P. 352
2. Select Auto Sync Phone. Car Voice
3. Select ON or OFF.
Pref

On some phones, it may not be possible to import the

category icons to the system.

The phonebook is updated after every connection.

Call history is updated after every connection or call.

358
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 359 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Favorite Contacts
To store a speed dial number:
Recent Calls Screen
1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 353
2. Select the Recent Calls, Contacts, or
Keypad screen.
3. Select the star icon.
u A notification appears on the screen if
Star Icon the Favorite Contact is successfully
Contacts Screen stored.
u To remove the Favorite Contact, select
the star icon again.

Features
Star Icon
Keypad Screen

Star Icon

Continued 359
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 360 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To edit a Favorite Contact

1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 353
2. Select Favorite Contacts.
3. Select Edit on the speed dial entry you
want to edit.
4. Select a setting you want.
5. Select Save.

■ To delete a speed dial

1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 353
Features

2. Select Favorite Contacts.

3. Select Edit on the speed dial entry you
want to delete.
4. Select Remove.
5. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Yes.

360
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 361 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Making a Call 1Making a Call

Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of
You can make calls by inputting any phone the person you are calling through the audio
number, or by using the imported speakers.
phonebook, call history, or Favorite Contact
entries. While there is an active connection with Apple
CarPlay, phone calls cannot be made with
HandsFreeLink® and are only made from Apple
CarPlay.

Features
Continued 361
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 362 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To make a call using the imported

phonebook
1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 353
2. Select Contacts.
3. Select a name.
u You can sort by First Name or Last
Name. Select the icon on the upper right
of the screen.
4. Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.

■ To make a call using a phone number

Features

1. Go to the phone menu screen.

2 Phone menu screen P. 353
2. Select Keypad.
3. Select a number.
u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for
entering numbers.
4. Select Call.
u Dialing starts automatically.

362
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 363 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To make a call using the call history 1To make a call using the call history
Call history is stored by All, Dialed, Missed, The call history appears only when a phone is
and Received. connected to the system.
1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 353
2. Select Recent Calls.
u You can sort by All, Dialed, Missed, or
Received. Select the icon on the upper
right of the screen.
3. Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.

■ To make a call using a Favorite Contact

Features
entry
1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 353
2. Select Favorite Contacts.
u You can change the order of Favorite
Contact entries by selecting Reorder.
3. Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.

Continued 363
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 364 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Receiving a Call 1Receiving a Call

Call Waiting
When there is an incoming call, an audible Press the button to put the current call on hold to
notification sounds (if activated) and the answer the incoming call.
Incoming Call... screen appears. Press the button again to return to the current
call.
Press the button to answer the call.
Select Ignore to ignore the incoming call if you do
Press the button to decline or end the
not want to answer it.
call.
Press the button if you want to hang up the
current call.

You can select the icons on the audio/information

screen instead of the and buttons.
Features

■ Options During a Call 1Options During a Call

You can select the icons on the audio/information
The following options are available during a call. screen.
Mute: Mute your voice.
Use Handheld: Transfer a call from the system to your phone.
Keypad: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven
phone system.
Mute Icon The available options are shown on the lower
half of the screen.

Select the option.

u The mute icon appears when Mute is
selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.

364
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 365 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To Set Up Text Message Options 1To Set Up Text Message Options

■ To turn on or off the text message To use the text message function, it may be necessary
to set up on your phone.
notice
1. Press the button.
1To turn on or off the text message notice
2. Select Messages.
ON: A pop-up notification comes on every time you
3. Select Settings.
receive a new message.
4. Select Pop-up Notification. OFF: The message you receive is stored in the system
5. Select ON or OFF. without notification.

Features
Continued 365
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 366 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Receiving a Text Message 1Receiving a Text Message

Some cell phones might not be able to read the
HFL can display newly received text messages as well as the last 20 messages transmission log of data sent and data received.
received on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be read aloud and
replied to using a fixed common phrase. The system does not display any received messages
1. Select the system status icon. while you are driving. You can only hear them read
u The status area appears. aloud.
2. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new
The system can only receive messages that are sent as
text message.
text (SMS) messages. Messages sent using the data
3. Select Open to display the message. services will not be displayed in the list.
u The text message is displayed.
4. Select Play to listen to the message. To With some phones, you may be able to display up to
discontinue the message read-out, select 20 of the last text messages received.
Features

Stop.
State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text
message feature. Only use the text message feature
when conditions allow you to do so safely.

366
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 367 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Selecting a Phone 1Selecting a Phone

You can only receive notifications from one phone at
You can select one from the Bluetooth® device list to be active and receive a time.
notifications.
1. Press the button.
2. Select Messages.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select Change Connected Phone.
5. Change a desired phone.
2 To change the currently paired phone
P. 356

Features
Continued 367
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 368 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Displaying Messages 1Displaying Messages

The (blue) icon appears next to an unread
Message List 1. Press the button. message.
2. Select Messages.
u Select a phone if necessary. If you delete a message on the phone, the message
3. Select a message. will also be deleted from the system. If you send a
u The text message is displayed. message from the system, the message goes to your
phone’s outbox.

To see the previous or next message, select Prev.

or Next on the message screen.

Text Message
Features

368
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 369 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Read or Stop reading a message

1. Go to the text message screen.
2. Select Play.
u The system starts reading the message
aloud.
3. Select Stop to stop reading.
Select Play again to start reading the 1Reply to a message
message.
The available reply messages are as follows:
• Talk to you later, I’m driving.
• I’m on my way.
■ Reply to a message • I’m running late.
1. Go to the text message screen. • OK
2. Select Reply. • Yes

Features
3. Select the reply message. • No
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
The default reply messages are displayed only in
4. Select Send to send the message.
English. If you want to use reply messages in
u Message sent. appears on the screen languages other than English, please edit them.
when the reply message was successfully 2 To edit a reply message P. 370
sent.
You can add a reply message by selecting + Create
New Message.
2 To edit a reply message P. 370

Only certain phones receive and send messages when

paired and connected. For a list of compatible
phones, visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,
or call 1-888-528-7876.

Continued 369
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 370 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ To edit a reply message 1To edit a reply message

1. Press the button. You can change the order of reply messages by
2. Select Messages. selecting Reorder.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select Edit Replies.
5. Select the reply message you want to edit
or + Create New Message.
u The on-screen keyboard screen is
displayed.
6. Enter a reply message, and then select
Save.

■ To delete a reply message

Features

1. Press the button.

2. Select Messages.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select Delete Replies.
5. Select on the reply message you want to
delete.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
6. Select Yes.

370
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 371 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

■ Making a call to a sender

1. Go to the text message screen.
2. Select Call.

Features
371
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 372 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHondaLink® Assist *

HondaLink® Assist *
1HondaLink® Assist *
■ In Case of Emergency HondaLink® Assist also provides services you can
operate from the Internet or your smartphone.
■ Automatic collision notification
If your vehicle’s airbags deploy or if the unit To subscribe to HondaLink® Assist, or to get more
detects that the vehicle is severely impacted, information about all of its features, contact an
your vehicle automatically will attempt to Honda dealer, or visit hondalink.honda.com
connect to the HondaLink® operator. If
connected, information about your vehicle, its 1In Case of Emergency
location, and its condition can be sent to the
Your vehicle may not be able to connect to the
operator*1; you also can speak to the operator
operator if the battery level is low, the line is
when connected.
disconnected, or you do not have adequate cellular
coverage.
Features

IMPORTANT: For vehicles equipped with HondaLink® Assist, owner activation

You cannot use this emergency services when:
constitutes authorization for Honda to collect information from your vehicle needed
• You travel outside the HondaLink® service coverage
to provide the service, and agreement to the Terms of Use at www.hondalink.com/ areas.
TermsAndConditions. In a crash, HondaLink® Assist will attempt to notify emergency • There is a problem with the connecting devices,
services but NEITHER HONDA NOR ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS GUARANTEE THAT such as the microphones, speakers, or the unit
SUCH NOTIFICATION WILL OCCUR. itself.
• HondaLink Assist is not enabled.
2 To enable notification P. 373
Honda reserves the right to terminate HondaLink® Assist services at any time or for
any reason, and in the future may not be able to provide services due to changes in, You cannot operate other phone-related functions
or obsolescence of, technology integral to the service or changes in governmental using the screen while talking to the operator.
regulation. Only the operator can terminate the connection to
your vehicle.
*1: Depending on your phone and adequate cellular coverage, your vehicle’s location may not
be sent to the operator. 1Automatic collision notification
If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it
repeatedly tries until it succeeds.

372 * Not available on all models

22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 373 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHondaLink® Assist *

■ To enable notification 1To enable notification

1. Go to the phone settings screen. Setting options:
2 Phone settings screen P. 352 • Enable: Notification is available.
2. Select HondaLink Assist. • Cancel: Disable the feature.
3. Select Enable or Cancel.

Features
373
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 374 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Refuel Recommend

Models with navigation system 1Refuel Recommend

Your vehicle is equipped with a feature that automatically calculates when to refuel. You can turn the Refuel Recommend function on and
This feature will notify you when refueling is recommended as well as enable you to off.
search for gas stations that are located in the vicinity of your vehicle. 2 Customized Features P. 326
1. When it is time to refuel the vehicle, a
notification is displayed and a notification When you turn off this feature, the refuel
recommend notification will not display.
icon is displayed in the header.
2. Touch the box that contains the icon. This feature can only be used when the gas tank fuel
level is below 30 percent.

If you select Find Gas Station Now or put more

Notification than 5 liters of gasoline into the gas tank, the
icon notification for refueling will disappear. If you prefer
Features

not to be notified, select OFF in the settings for Refuel

3. Select Find Gas Station Now. Recommend.

When you drive on a rough road or ascend or

descend a hill for an extended period of time, the
notification may disappear or may not be displayed at
all.

4. Choose a gas station from the search

screen of the navigation system.
u For instructions on how to use the
navigation system, refer to the
navigation system manual.

374
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 375 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Driving
This chapter discusses driving and refueling.

Before Driving................................... 376 Agile Handling Assist ............................. 405 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM)
Towing a Trailer................................ 381 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .. 406 System........................................454
When Driving Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Traffic Sign Recognition System ....... 459
Turning on the Power ...................... 382 Required Federal Explanation ......... 409 Front Sensor Camera ....................... 465
Precautions While Driving................. 388 Blind spot information System.......... 411 Radar Sensor ................................... 467
Transmission .................................... 390 High Voltage Battery........................ 414 Braking
Shifting ............................................ 391 Honda Sensing® ................................ 415 Brake System ................................... 468
SPORT Mode.................................... 397 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ........... 476
Deceleration Paddle Selector ............ 398 (CMBSTM) ....................................... 418 Brake Assist System ......................... 477
ECON Mode .................................... 401 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Parking Your Vehicle........................ 478
Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System...... 402 Speed Follow ................................. 428 Multi-View Rear Camera.................. 483
Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS).... 446 Refueling........................................... 485
Stability Control (ESC), System ...............403 Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions.... 488

375
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 376 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Before Driving
Driving Preparation
Check the following items before you start driving.

■ Exterior Checks 1Exterior Checks

NOTICE
• Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior
When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around
lights, or other parts of the vehicle. the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force
u Remove any frost, snow, or ice. them open, as this can damage the rubber trim
u Remove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid
vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened. further freezing.
u When removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel
or wheel components. Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder.
You will be unable to insert the key if the water
• Make sure the hood is securely closed.
freezes in the hole.
u If the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked.
• Make sure the tires are in good condition. Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite
u Check air pressures, and check for damage and excessive wear. flammable materials left under the hood, causing a
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 519 fire. If you’ve parked your vehicle for an extended
Driving

• Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle. period, inspect and remove any debris that may have
u There are blind spots from the inside. collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have
fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a
small animal. Also, check under the hood for leftover
flammable materials after you or someone else has
performed maintenance on your vehicle.

376
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 377 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation

■ Interior Checks 1Interior Checks

The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
• Store or secure all items on board properly. need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
u Carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle’s heavy items in the trunk, have the aiming readjusted
handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe. at a dealer or by a qualified technician.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 379
• Do not pile items higher than the seat height.
u They can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden
braking.
• Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor
mat.
u An object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator
pedal operation while driving.
• If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle.
u They may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.
• Securely close and lock all doors and the trunk.

Driving
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 167
• Adjust your seating position properly.
u Adjust the head restraint, too.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 199
2 Adjusting the Front Head Restraint Positions P. 204
• Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly.
u Adjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.
2 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 197
2 Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 196

Continued 377
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 378 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation

• Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the
seats.
u They can interfere with the driver’s ability to operate the pedals, the operation
of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats.
• Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 47
• Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the
vehicle, and go off soon after.
u Always have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated.
2 Indicators P. 82
Driving

378
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 379 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit

Maximum Load Limit

The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg). 1Maximum Load Limit
See the Tire and Loading Information label attached to the driver’s
doorjamb. 3 WARNING
Overloading or improper loading
Label Example can affect handling and stability
and cause a crash in which you
can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this manual.

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR):

This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all accessories and all cargo.
accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer. 2 Specifications P. 588

Driving
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit - Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR):
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your 2 Specifications P. 588
vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers
that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
Continued 379
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 380 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit

(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being 1Maximum Load Limit
loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the Towing a Trailer:
available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4. See Towing a Trailer to determine whether your
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will vehicle is designed to tow a trailer.
2 Towing a Trailer P. 381
be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.

In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants,

accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
Load Limits Example
Driving

Example1

Max Load Passenger Weight Cargo Weight

850 lbs 150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs 550 lbs
(385 kg) (68 kg x 2 = 136 kg) (249 kg)

Example2

Max Load Passenger Weight Cargo Weight

850 lbs 150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs 100 lbs
(385 kg) (68 kg x 5 = 340 kg) (45 kg)

380
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 381 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Towing a Trailer

Your vehicle is not designed to tow a trailer. Attempting to do so can void your
warranties.

Towing Your Vehicle

Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motorhome. If your vehicle needs
to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information.
2 Emergency Towing P. 583

Driving
381
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 382 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

When Driving
Turning on the Power
1. Make sure the parking brake is applied. 1Turning on the Power
u The parking brake indicator (red) comes Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when
on for 30 seconds when you pull up the starting the power system.
electric parking brake switch.
The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in
thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters).

Electric Parking Brake Switch When turning on the power system in cold weather,
turn off all electrical accessories such as the lights,
2. Depress the brake pedal. climate control system, and rear defogger in order to
reduce 12-volt battery drain.

If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold,

an engine block heater will improve starting and
warming of the engine. Consult a dealer for details.
Driving

If exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can smell

exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle
Brake Pedal checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with
the engine or exhaust system.

The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from

theft.
If an improperly coded key (or other device) is used,
the power system does not activate.
2 Immobilizer System P. 174

When you turn the power system on, you may feel
the brake pedal slightly sink down. This is normal.

382
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 383 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuWhen DrivinguTurning on the Power

3. Without depressing the accelerator pedal, 1Turning on the Power

press the POWER button while depressing Bring the keyless remote close to the POWER button
the brake pedal. if the battery in the keyless remote is weak.
4. Check the READY indicator. 2 If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak
u Keep depressing the brake pedal until P. 562
the READY indicator comes on.
The power system may not activate if the keyless
u The READY indicator comes on when
remote is subjected to strong radio waves.
the power system is on and you can start
driving. The engine may not run when the vehicle is ready for
u If the outside temperature is extremely driving.
low, you cannot drive until conditions are You can start driving with the READY indicator on.
improved. In this case, the READY If you press the POWER button while depressing the
brake pedal with the READY indicator on, the power
indicator does not come on and a
mode is set to VEHICLE OFF and you cannot start
warning message appears on the driver driving.
information interface. 2 READY Indicator P. 87

Driving
2 Driver Information Interface
Warning and Information Messages Do not hold the POWER button to start the power
P. 104 system.
If the power system does not start, wait at least 30
seconds before trying again.
■ Stopping the Power System
You can turn the power system off when the vehicle is completely stopped.

1. Put the transmission into (P .

2. Press the POWER button.

Continued 383
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 384 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuWhen DrivinguTurning on the Power

■ Remote Engine Start with Vehicle Feedback 1Remote Engine Start with Vehicle Feedback

You can remotely turn the power system on using the button on the keyless 3 WARNING
remote.
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic and can
rapidly accumulate in closed or even partly
■ To turn the power system on enclosed areas.
Press the button, then press and hold
the button. Go within the range, Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and
Some exterior lights flash once. and try again. even kill you.
LED: Blinks when any button is pressed.
Never use the remote engine starter with
the vehicle parked in a garage or other
areas with limited ventilation.

The remote engine start may violate local laws.

Before using the remote engine start, check your
Driving

local laws.

If there are buildings and obstacles between your

vehicle and the keyless remote, the range will be
Some exterior lights flash six Some exterior lights will not
reduced.
times if the power system flash if the power system This distance may vary by external electrical
turns on successfully. turns on unsuccessfully. interference.
The power system may not be turned on by the
remote engine start if:
The power system is on for up to 10 minutes without you starting the vehicle. • You have disabled a remote engine start setting
To extend the time for another 10 minutes during the first 10 minutes, press the using the audio/information screen.
button, then press and hold the button. 2 Customized Features P. 326
u Some exterior lights flash six times if a 10-minute extension request was • The power mode is not in VEHICLE OFF.
transmitted successfully. • The transmission is in a position other than (P .
• The hood is open, or any door or the trunk is
unlocked.
384
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 385 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuWhen DrivinguTurning on the Power

■ To turn the power system off 1Remote Engine Start with Vehicle Feedback

Go within the range, • You have already used the keyless remote twice to
and try again. turn the power system on.
• Another registered keyless remote is in the vehicle.
The exterior lights will not flash when the keyless remote • There is any antenna failure.
is out of the keyless access system range. • The door is unlocked with the built-in key.
The power system will not be turned off. • The engine oil pressure is low.
• The engine coolant temperature is extremely high.
• The telematics unit * malfunctions.
• The security system alarm is not set.

The power system may be turned off while it is

running if:
• You do not start the vehicle within 10 minutes of
turning the power system on with the keyless
remote.
• The power system is turned off by using the keyless

Driving
remote.
Press and hold the • The security system alarm is activated.
button for one second. The exterior lights flash once if the power system turned off • The door is unlocked with the built-in key.
successfully. • The hood is open.
• The engine coolant temperature is extremely high.
• The 12-volt battery is low.
• The engine oil pressure is low.
• The malfunction indicator lamp comes on if there is
a problem with the emissions control systems.
• You press the POWER button without depressing
the brake pedal.
• The transmission is in a position other than (P .

* Not available on all models Continued 385

 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 386 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuWhen DrivinguTurning on the Power

1Remote Engine Start with Vehicle Feedback

While the power system is on, the vehicle will
automatically precondition inside the vehicle.
When it is warm outside:
• The climate control system is activated in auto
mode.
When it is cold outside:
• The defroster is activated at a moderately warm
temperature.
• The rear defogger and door mirror heaters are
activated.
• The seat heaters * are activated.
2 Seat Heaters * P. 215
Driving

386 * Not available on all models

22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 387 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuWhen DrivinguTurning on the Power

■ Starting to Drive 1Starting to Drive

When the power system is turned on using the
When the power system is turned on using the button on the keyless remote button on the keyless remote
1. Depress the brake pedal and press the POWER button simultaneously. The power system is off when the transmission
When the power system is turned on in any case position is changed from (P before the POWER
button is pressed. Follow step 1 when starting to
2. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, check that the READY indicator is on,
drive.
then press the (D button. Select (R when reversing.
3. With the parking brake applied, release the brake pedal and gently depress the You can also release the parking brake by pressing
accelerator pedal. the electric parking brake switch while depressing the
u Make sure the parking brake indicator (red) goes off. brake pedal.
2 Parking Brake P. 468 When facing downhill, you can start your vehicle
more smoothly by manually releasing it with the
electric parking brake switch than by releasing it with
the accelerator pedal.

As a hybrid vehicle, the sounds and vibrations from

Driving
the engine may be absent even though the vehicle is
ready for driving. It also makes you fail to recognize
that you can start.
Make sure to check if the READY indicator is on
before you start to drive.

■ Hill start assist system 1Hill start assist system

Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from
rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator. rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and
will not operate on small inclines.
Put the transmission into (D when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill, then
Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking
release the brake pedal.
brake.

387
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 388 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving

Precautions While Driving

■ In Rain 1Precautions While Driving
NOTICE
Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the power
Do not change the transmission while pressing the
system or driveline, or cause electrical component failure. accelerator pedal. You could damage the
transmission.
■ Other Precautions
NOTICE
If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location. If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an
Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks. extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel in
the full left or right position for a while, the electric
power steering (EPS) system heats up. The system
goes into a protective mode, and limits its
performance. The steering wheel becomes harder
and harder to operate. Once the system cools down,
the EPS system is restored.
Repeated operation under these conditions can
eventually damage the system.
Driving

If the power mode is set to ACCESSORY while

driving, the power system will shut down and all
steering and brake power assist functions will stop,
making it difficult to control the vehicle.

Do not put the transmission into (N , as you will lose

regenerative braking (and acceleration) performance.

During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation,

avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so
as not to damage the power system or powertrain.

Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km)
after purchasing your new vehicle or replacing the
brake pads or rotors, to allow for proper break-in.

388
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 389 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving

1Precautions While Driving

NOTICE
The following can damage the under spoiler:
• Parking the vehicle by a parking block
• Parallel parking along the road shoulder
• Driving towards the bottom of a hill
• Driving up or down to a different surface level
(such as a road shoulder)
• Driving on a rutted or bumpy road
• Driving on a road with potholes

Driving
389
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 390 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuWhen DrivinguTransmission

Transmission
■ Creeping
As with a conventional gasoline-powered vehicle with an automatic transmission,
this vehicle will creep.
Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped.

■ Kickdown
The accelerator pedal is equipped with a kickdown switch. When you depress the
accelerator pedal to the point at which the switch is activated, the vehicle will
suddenly accelerate with greater power, similar to what happens in a vehicle
equipped with an automatic transmission.
Driving

390
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 391 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Shifting
Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs. 1Shifting

■ Shift button positions 3 WARNING

Park The vehicle can roll away if left unattended
Used when parking, before turning off or without confirming that Park is engaged.
starting the power system
Transmission is locked A vehicle that rolls away could cause a crash
Reverse resulting in serious injury or death.
Used when reversing
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal
Neutral
Transmission is not locked
until you have confirmed that (P is shown
on the shift position indicator.
Drive
Used for:
Normal driving While the High Voltage battery level is full, or the
● The deceleration paddle selector can be used High Voltage battery temperature is low,
temporarily. regenerative braking may become less effective.

Driving
The deceleration paddle selector can be used
when SPORT mode is on. To prevent malfunction and unintended
engagement:
• Do not spill any liquids on or around shift buttons.
• Do not place or drop any objects on or around shift
buttons.
• Do not let passengers or children operate the shift
buttons.

You may occasionally find that it takes longer than

usual for the vehicle to start moving when you select
(R , release the brake pedal, and/or depress the
accelerator pedal. This may occur when the High
Voltage battery level is extremely low, and does not
indicate a vehicle malfunction.

Continued 391
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 392 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

■ (P (parking) button 1Shifting

The shift position changes to (P when you The beeper sounds and a message appears on the
(P Button press the (P button while the vehicle is driver information interface when you depress the
parked with the power mode in ON. accelerator pedal with the transmission in (N .
The indicators on the sides of the (P button 2 Driver Information Interface Warning and
Information Messages P. 104
come on.
Put the transmission into (D or (R with the brake
pedal depressed.

When shifting gears in extremely low temperatures

(−22°F/−30°C), there may be a short delay before the
shift is indicated in the display. Always confirm you
are in the correct gear before driving.
Driving

392
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 393 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

■ Shift Operation 1Shift Operation

NOTICE
When you change (D to (R and vice versa, come to
a complete stop and keep the brake pedal depressed.
Operating the shift button before the vehicle has
Shift Position Indicator
come to a complete standstill can damage the
transmission.

Deceleration Paddle Use the shift position indicator and the shift button
Selector Indicator indicator to check the shift position before selecting a
shift button.

If the indicator of the currently selected shift position,

or all the shift position indicators are blinking
simultaneously, there is a problem with the
Press the (P button.
transmission.
Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission

Driving
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
Pull back the (R button.
The beeper sounds once when you change to (R .
2 Customized Features P. 326
Press the (N button.

Press the (D button.

Shift Button Indicator

Continued 393
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 394 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

■ When opening the driver’s door 1When opening the driver’s door
If you open the driver’s door under the following conditions, the shift position While the system is designed to automatically change
automatically changes to (P ; the shift position to (P under the described
• The vehicle is stationary with the power mode in ON, or moving at 1 mph (2 km/h) conditions, in the interest of safety you should always
or slower. select (P before opening the driver's door.
• The transmission is other than (P . Make sure to park the vehicle in a safe place.
2 When Stopped P. 478
• You have unfastened the driver side seat belt.
u If you manually put the transmission from (P with the brake pedal depressed, If you want to drive the vehicle after the shift position
the transmission will automatically return to (P once you release the brake has automatically changed to (P under the described
pedal. conditions, close the door, fasten the seat belt,
depress the brake pedal, then change the shift
■ When turning off the power mode position.
If you turn the power system off while the vehicle is stationary, and the transmission
If you leave the vehicle, turn off the power system
is in other than (P , the shift position automatically changes to (P .
and lock the doors.
Driving

394
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 395 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

■ If you want to keep the transmission in (N position [car wash mode] 1If you want to keep the transmission in (N position [car wash
With the power system on: mode]
1. Press and hold the brake pedal. To keep the vehicle in (N position, you can also
2. Press and release the (N button. follow this procedure:
u (N (Neutral) hold mode will appear on the driver information interface. While the power mode is on, select (N , and then
3. Press the (N button again and hold it for two seconds. within five seconds, press the POWER button.
u The vehicle will enter car wash mode, which must be used when your vehicle
Note that the transmission may not stay in (N
is pulled through a conveyor type automatic car wash where you or an position while any of the following indicators is on:
attendant do not remain in the vehicle. • Transmission system indicator.
If the POWER button is pressed after car wash • Malfunction indicator lamp.
mode has been activated, the power mode • Charging system indicator.
will change to ACCESSORY and a message
will be displayed on the driver information
interface.
u For 15 minutes the transmission remains

Driving
in (N with the power mode will remain
in ACCESSORY. After that, the
transmission automatically changes to
(P and the power mode changes to OFF.
u Manually changing to (P cancels
ACCESSORY mode. The (P indicator
comes on and the power mode changes
to OFF. You must always put the
transmission into (P when car wash
mode is no longer needed.

Continued 395
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 396 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

■ Restrictions on selecting a shift position

You cannot select a shift position under certain circumstances that may lead to a crash.

When the transmission 1. Under these 2. If you try to change to 3. The transmission How to change
is in: circumstances: the following: remains in/changes to: the transmission

The brake pedal is not

depressed.
(P (P
The accelerator pedal is
depressed.
Release the
The vehicle is moving at accelerator pedal
low speed without the Other transmission
and depress the
brake pedal depressed. brake pedal.
(N The vehicle is moving at
low speed with the
Driving

accelerator pedal
depressed. (N
The vehicle is moving Stop your vehicle in
(N or (D (R
forward. a safe place, depress
the brake pedal, and
The vehicle is moving
(R or (N (D select the
backward.
appropriate
(R , (N or (D The vehicle is moving. (P transmission.

Make sure that the

The READY indicator is not A shift position other than
(P or (N (P or (N READY indicator
on. (P or (N
comes on.

396
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 397 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuWhen DrivinguSPORT Mode

SPORT Mode
SPORT Mode Indicator

SPORT Button

To turn the SPORT mode on and off, press the SPORT button.

Driving
The SPORT mode increases engine performance.
This mode is not recommended for fuel economy enhancement, but suitable for
driving on hills or through curves on mountain roads.

The SPORT mode is turned off every time you start the power system, even if you
turned it on the last time you drove the vehicle.

397
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 398 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuWhen DrivinguDeceleration Paddle Selector

Deceleration Paddle Selector

When you release the accelerator pedal, you can control the rate of deceleration 1Deceleration Paddle Selector
without releasing your hands from the steering wheel. Using the deceleration
paddle selector situated on the steering wheel, you can sequentially shift through 3 CAUTION
three stages of deceleration. Rapidly increasing the deceleration rate by
When descending a hill, you can use the deceleration paddle selector to help quickly shifting the deceleration paddle
maintain the rate of deceleration, thereby allowing you to keep a safe distance selector can cause the tires to skid, resulting
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. in a crash that could injure or kill someone.
The default deceleration stage is . Each
Decrease Always maintain a reasonable rate of
paddle selector operation makes a single
stage deceleration change. deceleration.
u The deceleration stage may not change if
Deceleration
you pull the paddle selector If you are descending a hill when you select stage ,
Stage
continuously. the vehicle may enter stage .

If you pull back right and left paddle selector at the

Increase same time, the deceleration stage may not change.
Driving

To select the different stages of deceleration:

• Pull back the (+ selector (right side) to decrease the deceleration stage.
• Pull back the (- selector (left side) to increase the deceleration stage.
Pull the (+ selector for a few seconds when you want to cancel the deceleration
paddle selector.

398
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 399 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuWhen DrivinguDeceleration Paddle Selector

When to use 1Deceleration Paddle Selector

In the following situations, the stage may not change
Shift position is in (D and the stage icon will blink even if you pull back the
selector. The deceleration stage may decrease or
When SPORT mode is OFF, Deceleration Stage When SPORT mode is ON, cancel automatically:
the deceleration stage the deceleration stage • The high voltage battery is fully charged or its
appears. and M appear.
temperature is too cold or too hot.
• The speed of the vehicle is beyond the deceleration
range with SPORT mode off.
• Hybrid system protection is needed.
• The paddle selector is operated while your vehicle is
stopped automatically by ACC with Low Speed
Follow.

If either paddle selector is operated, ACC with Low

Speed Follow will cancel automatically.

Driving
Paddle Selector
Increase the deceleration Decrease the deceleration
stage when pulling the (- stage when pulling the (+
paddle selector (left side) paddle selector (right side)

Continued 399
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 400 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuWhen DrivinguDeceleration Paddle Selector

■ When SPORT mode is OFF

If you pull back the paddle selector, the rate of deceleration will change temporarily,
and the stage will appear in the driver information interface.
When you want to cancel the deceleration paddle selector, pull the (+ selector
(right side) for a few seconds.
The deceleration paddle selector will cancel automatically and deceleration stage in
the driver information interface disappear when you drive with constant speed,
situations of acceleration and decelerate just before stopping your vehicle.

■ When SPORT mode is ON

If you pull back the paddle selector, the rate of deceleration will change and the
stage along with M will appear in the driver information interface. The deceleration
stage is not cancel automatically while SPORT mode is ON.
When you want to cancel the deceleration paddle selector, turn the SPORT mode
OFF, or pull the (+ selector (right side) for a few seconds. When canceled,
Driving

deceleration stage in the driver information interface disappear.

400
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 401 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuWhen DrivinguECON Mode

ECON Mode
1ECON Mode
While in ECON mode, the climate control system has
greater temperature fluctuations.

Due to emergency brakes operation or driving

conditions, you may not be able to change the mode.

The ECON button turns the ECON mode on and off.

The ECON mode helps you improve your fuel economy by adjusting the
performance of the climate control system and the accelerator pedal response.

Driving
401
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 402 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuWhen DrivinguAcoustic Vehicle Alerting System

Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System

Alerts pedestrians when the vehicle transmission is in a position other than (P and
is traveling at speeds of 22 mph (36 km/h) or less.
Driving

402
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 403 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic

Stability Control (ESC), System 1Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), System
VSA® helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less
than what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces. The VSA® may not function properly if tire type and
size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and
It does so by regulating engine and motor output and selectively applying the
type of tire, and the air pressures as specified.
brakes.
When the VSA® system indicator comes on and stays
■ VSA® Operation on while driving, there may be a problem with the
system. While this may not interfere with normal
When VSA® activates, you may notice that the driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer
engine and motor does not respond to the immediately.
accelerator. You may also notice some noise
from the hydraulic brake system. You will also VSA® cannot enhance stability in all driving situations
see the indicator blink. and does not control the entire braking system. You
still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate
for the conditions and always leave a sufficient
margin of safety.

Driving
VSA® System
Indicator The main function of the VSA® system is generally
known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The
system also includes a traction control function.

The vehicle stability assistTM (VSA®) system, vehicle

stability assistTM (VSA®) OFF, adaptive cruise control
(ACC) with low speed follow, safety support and low
tire pressure/TPMS indicators may come on in amber
along with a message in the driver information
interface when you set the power mode to ON after
re-connecting a 12-volt battery.
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.

Continued 403
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 404 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

■ VSA® On and Off 1Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), System
This button is on the driver side control panel.
VSA® OFF Indicator In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets
To partially disable VSA® functionality/features, stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
press and hold it until you hear a beep. to free it with the VSA® temporarily switched off.

Your vehicle will have normal braking and When the button is pressed, the traction control
cornering ability, but traction control function function becomes less effective. This allows for the
wheels to spin more freely at low speed. You should
will be less effective.
only attempt to free your vehicle with the VSA® off if
you are not able to free it when the VSA® is on.
To restore VSA® functionality/features, press
the (VSA® OFF) button until you hear a Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to
beep. switch VSA® on again. We do not recommend driving
your vehicle with the VSA® system switched off.
VSA® is turned on every time you turn the
You may hear a motor sound coming from the
power system on, even if you turned it off the
Driving

engine compartment while system checks are being

last time you drove the vehicle. performed immediately after turning the power
system on or while driving. This is normal.

404
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 405 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuWhen DrivinguAgile Handling Assist

Agile Handling Assist

Lightly brakes the front wheels, as needed, when you turn the steering wheel, and 1Agile Handling Assist
helps support the vehicle’s stability and performance during cornering. The agile handling assist cannot enhance stability in
all driving situations. You still need to drive and
corner at speeds appropriate for the conditions and
always leave a sufficient margin of safety.

When the VSA® system indicator comes on and stays

on while driving, the agile handling assist does not
activate.

You may hear a sound coming from the engine

compartment while the agile handling assist is
activated. This is normal.

Driving
405
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 406 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Instead of directly measuring the pressure in each tire, the TPMS on this vehicle 1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
monitors and compares the rolling radius and rotational characteristics of each The system does not monitor the tires when driving
wheel and tire while you are driving to determine if one or more tires are at low speed.
significantly under-inflated.
This will cause the low tire pressure/TPMS Conditions such as low ambient temperature and
Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can
indicator to come on and a message to appear
trigger the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come on.
on the driver information interface.
Tire pressure checked and inflated in:
• Warm weather can become under-inflated in
colder weather.
• Cold weather can become over-inflated in warmer
weather.
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator will not come
on as a result of over inflation.

■ TPMS Calibration The TPMS may not function properly if tire type and
Driving

size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and
You must start TPMS calibration every time you:
type of tire.
• Adjust the pressure in one or more tires. 2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 519
• Rotate the tires.
• Replace one or more tires. The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on
with a delay or may not come on at all when:
Before calibrating the TPMS: • You rapidly accelerate, decelerate, or turn the
steering wheel.
• Set the cold tire pressure in all four tires.
• You drive on snowy or slippery roads.
2 Checking Tires P. 519
• Tire chains are used.

Make sure:
• The vehicle is at a complete stop.
• The transmission is in (P .
• The power mode is in ON.

406
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 407 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

You can calibrate the system from the 1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
customized feature on the audio/information The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on
screen. under the following conditions:
2 Audio System Basic Operation P. 230 • A compact spare tire * is used.
1. Set the power mode to ON. • There is a heavier and uneven load on the tires,
than the condition at calibration.
2. Press the button.
• Tire chains are used.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select Vehicle.
1TPMS Calibration
5. Select TPMS Calibration.
TPMS cannot be calibrated if a compact spare tire * is
6. Select Calibrate.
installed.
The calibration process requires approximately 30
• If the Calibration Failed To Start. minutes of cumulative driving at speeds between 30-
message appears, repeat steps 5-6. 60 mph (48-97 km/h).
• The calibration process finishes During this period, if the power mode is set to ON
automatically. and the vehicle is not moved within 45 seconds, you
may notice the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator

Driving
comes on briefly. This is normal and indicates that the
calibration process is not yet complete.

* Not available on all models Continued 407

 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 408 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

1TPMS Calibration
If the tire chains are installed, remove them before
calibrating the TPMS.

If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on even

when the properly inflated specified regular tires are
installed, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

We recommend that the tires be replaced with the

same brand, model, and size as the originals. Ask a
dealer for details.

The vehicle stability assistTM (VSA®) system, vehicle

stability assistTM (VSA®) OFF, adaptive cruise control
(ACC) with low speed follow, safety support and low
tire pressure/TPMS indicators may come on in amber
along with a message in the driver information
Driving

interface when you set the power mode to ON after

re-connecting a 12-volt battery.
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20
km/h).
Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.

408
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 409 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required

Federal Explanation
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label.

(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with

a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low
tire pressure telltale

Driving
when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you

should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to

overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's
handling and stopping ability.

Continued 409
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 410 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction

indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may

not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
Driving

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including

the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or

more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.

410
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 411 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuWhen DrivinguBlind spot information System

Blind spot information System

Is designed to detect vehicles in specified alert zones adjacent to your vehicle, 1Blind spot information System
particularly in harder to see areas commonly known as “blind spots.”
3 WARNING
When the system detects vehicles approaching from behind in adjacent lanes, the Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to
appropriate indicator comes on for a few seconds, providing assistance when you change lanes before doing so may result in
change lanes. a crash and serious injury or death.
Do not rely only on the blind spot
■ How the system works information system when changing lanes.
● The transmission is in (D . Always look in your mirrors, to either side
● Your vehicle speed is between 20 mph of your vehicle, and behind you for other
(32 km/h) and 100 mph (160 km/h)
vehicles before changing lanes.
Alert zone range Radar Sensors:
underneath the Alert Zone
A: Approx. 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) Important Safety Reminder
rear bumper A
B: Approx. 9.5 ft. (2.9 m) corners
Like all assistance systems, blind spot information
B system has limitations. Overreliance on blind spot
C: Approx. 10 ft. (3 m)

Driving
information system may result in a collision.

C The blind spot information system alert indicator may

not come on under the following conditions:
• A vehicle does not stay in the alert zone for more
than two seconds.
• A vehicle is parked in a side lane.
• The speed difference between your vehicle and the
vehicle you are passing is greater than 6 mph (10
km/h).
• An object not detected by the radar sensors
approaches or passes your vehicle.
• A vehicle running in the adjacent lane is a
motorcycle or other small vehicle.

Continued 411
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 412 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuWhen DrivinguBlind spot information System

■ When the system detects a vehicle 1Blind spot information System

Blind spot information System Alert Indicator: The system is for your convenience only. Even if an
Comes On
Located on the outside rearview mirror on object is within the alert zone, the following
both sides. situations may occur.
• The blind spot information system alert indicator
may not come on due to obstruction (splashes,
Comes on when:
Blinks etc.) even without the Blind Spot Information
• A vehicle enters the alert zone from behind
System Not Available driver information
to overtake you with a speed difference of interface appearing.
no more than 31 mph (50 km/h) from your • The blind spot information system alert indicator
vehicle. may come on even with the message appearing.
• You pass a vehicle with a speed difference
of no more than 12 mph (20 km/h). You can change the setting for the blind spot
information system.
2 Customized Features P. 326
Blinks and a beeper sounds when:
You move the turn signal lever in the direction Blind spot information system may be adversely
Driving

of the detected vehicle. The beeper sounds affected when:

three times. • Objects (guard rails, poles, trees, etc,.) are
detected.
• An object that does not reflect radio waves well,
such as a motorcycle, is in the alert zone.
• Driving on a curved road.
• A vehicle is moving from a far lane to the adjacent
lane.
• The system picks up external electrical interference.
• The rear bumper or the sensors have been
improperly repaired or the rear bumper has been
deformed.
• The orientation of the sensors has been changed.
• In bad weather (Heavy rain, snow, and fog).

412
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 413 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuWhen DrivinguBlind spot information System

■ Blind spot information System On and Off 1Blind spot information System
When you turn the blind spot information For a proper blind spot information system operation:
system on and off, do the following. • Always keep the rear bumper corner area clean.
1. Press the safety support switch. • Do not cover the rear bumper corner area with
2. Roll the left selector wheel to the symbol labels or stickers of any kind.
and push it. • Take your vehicle to a dealer if you need the rear
bumper corner area or the radar sensors to be
u The message appears on the driver
repaired, or the rear bumper corner area is strongly
information interface when the system impacted.
turns on or off.

Left Selector Wheel The blind spot information system is in the

Safety Support Switch previously selected ON or OFF setting each
time you start the engine.

Driving
413
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 414 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuWhen DrivinguHigh Voltage Battery

High Voltage Battery

The High Voltage battery gradually discharges even if the vehicle is not in use. As a 1High Voltage Battery
result, if your vehicle is parked for an extended period of time, the battery charge Be careful not to let the High Voltage battery drain
level will become low. Extended periods of time at a low state of charge will shorten too much. If the battery level becomes close to zero,
battery life. To maintain the battery state of charge, drive your vehicle for more than it will make it impossible to start the power system.
30 minutes at least once every three months.
Extreme high temperatures can affect the battery life. You can minimize the effects
by parking the vehicle in the shade during the summer.
Driving

414
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 415 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Honda Sensing®

Honda Sensing® is a driver support system which employs the use of two distinctly
different kinds of sensors: a radar sensor located in the front lower grille and a front
sensor camera mounted to the interior side of the windshield, behind the rearview
mirror.

Honda Sensing® has following functions.

■ The functions which do not require switch operations to activate

• Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) 2 P. 418
• Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System 2 P. 454
• Traffic Sign Recognition System 2 P. 459

■ The functions which require switch operations to activate

• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow 2 P. 428
• Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) 2 P. 446

Driving
Continued 415
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 416 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®u

■ Operation Switches for the ACC with Low Speed Follow/

LKAS
■ MAIN Button
MAIN button CANCEL button
Press to activate standby mode for ACC with
Low Speed Follow and LKAS. Or press to
cancel these systems.

■ LKAS Button
Press to activate or cancel the LKAS.

Interval Button LKAS Button ■ RES/+/SET/− Button

Press RES/+ to resume the ACC with Low
RES/+ Button
Speed Follow or increase the vehicle speed.
Press SET/− to set the ACC with Low Speed
Follow or decrease the vehicle speed.
Driving

■ Interval Button
Press the (interval) button to change the
ACC with Low Speed Follow following-
SET/− Button
interval.

■ CANCEL Button
Press to cancel ACC with Low Speed Follow.

416
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 417 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®u

■ Driver Information Interface Content

You can see the current state of ACC with
Low Speed Follow and LKAS.

a Indicates
that ACC with Low Speed Follow
and LKAS are ready to be activated.

b Indicates that LKAS is activated and

whether or not traffic lane lines are
detected.

c Indicates
whether or not ACC with Low
Speed Follow detected the vehicle ahead.

d Indicates
that ACC with Low Speed Follow

Driving
shows the set vehicle speed.

e Indicates
that ACC with Low Speed Follow
shows the set vehicle interval.

417
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 418 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

The system can assist you when it determines there is a possibility of your vehicle 1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
colliding with a vehicle or a pedestrian detected in front of your vehicle. The CMBSTM Important Safety Reminder
is designed to alert you when the potential for a collision is determined, as well as to The CMBSTM is designed to reduce the severity of an
reduce your vehicle speed to help minimize collision severity when a collision is unavoidable collision. It does not prevent a collision
deemed unavoidable. nor stop the vehicle automatically. It is still your
responsibility to operate the brake pedal and steering
wheel appropriately according to the driving
conditions.

The CMBSTM may not activate or may not detect a

vehicle in front of your vehicle under certain
conditions:
2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 423

You can read about handling information for the

camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 465
Driving

For directions on the proper handling of the radar

sensor, refer to the following page.
2 Radar Sensor P. 467

When the CMBSTM activates, it may automatically

apply the brake. It will be canceled when your vehicle
stops or a potential collision is not determined.

418
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 419 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

■ How the system works 1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

When to use The camera in the CMBSTM is also designed to detect
pedestrians.
However, this pedestrian detection feature may not
The camera is located
activate or may not detect a pedestrian in front of
behind the rearview
mirror. your vehicle under certain conditions.
Refer to the ones indicating the pedestrian detection
limitations from the list.
2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 423

The radar sensor is at the

lower part of the front
bumper.

Driving
The system starts monitoring the roadway ahead when your vehicle speed is about
3 mph (5 km/h) or above and will search for a vehicle in front of you.
The CMBSTM activates when:
● The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian detected in

front of you becomes about 3 mph (5 km/h) and over with a chance of a collision.
● Your vehicle speed is about 62 mph (100 km/h) or less and the system determines

there is a chance of a collision with:

- Vehicles detected in front of you that are stationary, oncoming, or traveling in your
same direction.
- A pedestrian who is detected in front of you.
● Your vehicle speed is above 62 mph (100 km/h), and the system determines there

is a chance of a collision with a vehicle detected in front of you traveling in your

same direction.

Continued 419
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 420 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

■ When the system activates

The system provides visual and audible alerts of a possible collision, and stops if the
collision is avoided.
u Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change
lanes, etc.).
Visual Alerts

Beep
Audible Alert
Driving

You can change the distance (Long/Normal/Short) between vehicles at which the
system’s earliest collision alert will come on through audio/information screen
setting options.
2 Customized Features P. 326

420
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 421 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

■ Collision Alert Stages

The system has three alert stages for a possible collision. However, depending on circumstances, the CMBSTM may not go through all of
the stages before initiating the last stage.

CMBSTM
Distance between vehicles
The radar sensor detects a vehicle Audible & Visual WARNINGS Braking

Normal Vehicle When in Long, visual and audible alerts come

Long Short Ahead
Stage There is a risk of a collision with the on at a longer distance from a vehicle ahead
—
one vehicle ahead of you. than in Normal setting, and in Short, at a
Your Vehicle shorter distance than in Normal.

Your Vehicle
Stage Vehicle Ahead The risk of a collision has increased, Lightly
two time to respond is reduced. applied

Driving
Visual and audible alerts.
Your Vehicle
Stage Vehicle Ahead The CMBSTM determines that a Forcefully
three collision is unavoidable. applied

Continued 421
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 422 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

■ CMBSTM On and Off 1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

The CMBSTM may automatically shut off, and the
Left Selector Wheel
When you turn the CMBSTM on and off, do the safety support indicator (amber) will come and stay
following. on under certain conditions:
1. Press the safety support switch. 2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 423
2. Roll the left selector wheel to the
symbol and push it. When the CMBSTM is activated, it will continue to
operate even if the accelerator pedal is partially
u The message appears on the driver
depressed. However, it will be canceled if the
information interface when the system accelerator pedal is deeply depressed.
turns on or off.
The vehicle stability assistTM (VSA®) system, vehicle
The CMBSTM is turned on every time you start stability assistTM (VSA®) OFF, adaptive cruise control
the power system, even if you turned it off the (ACC) with low speed follow, safety support and low
Safety Support Switch tire pressure/TPMS indicators may come on in amber
last time you drove the vehicle.
along with a message in the driver information
interface when you set the power mode to ON after
Driving

re-connecting the 12-volt battery.

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.

422
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 423 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

■ CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations 1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any
The system may automatically shut off and the safety support indicator (amber) will unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning
come on under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed message appears too frequently).
below. Other conditions may reduce some of the CMBSTM functions.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 465

■ Environmental conditions
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
• Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
• There is little contrast between objects and the background.
• Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
• Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
• Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
• Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as vehicles and pedestrians.
• Reflections on the interior of the windshield.

Driving
• Driving at night or in a dark place such as a tunnel (due to low-light conditions,
pedestrians or other vehicles may not be detected).

■ Roadway conditions
• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
• Driving on curvy, winding, or undulating roads.
• The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.

Continued 423
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 424 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

■ Vehicle conditions
• Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted.
• The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
• The inside of the windshield is fogged.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire *, etc.).
• When tire chains are installed.
• The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
• The camera temperature gets too high.
• Driving with the parking brake applied.
• When the radar sensor at the lower part of the front bumper gets dirty.
• Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off.

■ Detection limitations
• A vehicle or pedestrian suddenly crosses in front of you.
• The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you is
too short.
Driving

• A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly.

• When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you
at high speed.
• The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter or other small
vehicle.
• When there are animals in front of your vehicle.
• When you drive on a curved, winding or undulating road that makes it difficult for
the sensor to properly detect a vehicle in front of you.
• The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian in front of
you is significantly large.
• An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you.
• Another vehicle suddenly comes in front of you at an intersection, etc.
• Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle.
• When driving through a narrow iron bridge.
• When the lead vehicle suddenly slows down.

424 * Not available on all models

22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 425 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

Limitations applicable to pedestrian detection only

• When there is a group of people in front of your vehicle walking together side by
side.
• Surrounding conditions or belongings of the pedestrian alter the pedestrian’s
shape, preventing the system from recognizing that the person is a pedestrian.
• When the pedestrian is shorter than about 3.3 feet (1 meter) or taller than about
6.6 feet (2 meters) in height.
• When a pedestrian blends in with the background.
• When a pedestrian is bent over or squatting, or when their hands are raised or
they are running.
• When several pedestrians are walking ahead in a group.
• When the camera cannot correctly identify that a pedestrian is present due to an
unusual shape (holding luggage, body position, size).

■ Automatic shutoff

Driving
The CMBSTM may automatically shut itself off and the safety support indicator
(amber) comes and stays on when:
• The temperature inside the system is high.
• You drive off-road or on a mountain road, or curved and winding road for an
extended period.
• An abnormal tire condition is detected (wrong tire size, flat tire, etc.).
• The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, gets dirty.

Once the conditions that caused the CMBSTM to shut off improve or are addressed
(e.g., cleaning), the system comes back on.

Continued 425
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 426 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

■ With Little Chance of a Collision 1With Little Chance of a Collision

Do not paint, or apply any coverings or paint to radar
The CMBSTM may activate even when you are aware of a vehicle ahead of you, or sensor area. This can impact CMBSTM operation.
when there is no vehicle ahead. Some examples of this are:

■ When Passing
Your vehicle approaches another vehicle ahead of you and you change lanes to pass.

■ At an intersection
Your vehicle approaches or passes another vehicle that is making a left or right turn.
Driving

426
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 427 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

■ On a curve
When driving through curves, your vehicle comes to a point where an oncoming
vehicle is right in front of you.

■ Through a low bridge at high speed

You drive under a low or narrow bridge at high speed.

Driving
■ Speed bumps, road work sites, train tracks, roadside objects, etc.
You drive over speed bumps, steel road plates, etc., or your vehicle approaches train
tracks or roadside objects (such as a traffic sign and guard rail) on a curve or, when
parking, stationary vehicles and walls.

427
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 428 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow 1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following interval behind a vehicle
detected ahead of yours and, if the detected vehicle comes to a stop, can decelerate
3 WARNING
and stop your vehicle, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the Improper use of ACC with Low Speed
accelerator. Follow can lead to a crash.
When ACC with Low Speed Follow slows your vehicle by applying the brakes, your
Use ACC with Low Speed Follow only when
vehicle’s brake lights will illuminate.
driving on expressways or freeways and in
When to use good road and weather conditions.

The camera is
located behind 3 WARNING
the rearview
mirror. ACC with Low Speed Follow has limited
braking capability and may not stop your
vehicle in time to avoid a collision with a
vehicle that quickly stops in front of you.
Driving

Always be prepared to apply the brake

pedal if the conditions require.
The radar sensor is at the
lower part of the front
bumper. Important Reminder
As with any system, there are limits to ACC with Low
Speed Follow. Use the brake pedal whenever
■ Vehicle speed for ACC with Low Speed Follow: A vehicle is detected ahead necessary, and always keep a safe interval between
within ACC with Low Speed Follow range – ACC with Low Speed Follow your vehicle and other vehicles.
operates at speeds up to 90 mph (145 km/h).
No vehicle is detected within ACC with Low Speed Follow range – ACC with For directions on the proper handling of the radar
Low Speed Follow operates at the speed of 25 mph (40 km/h) or above. sensor, refer to the following page.
■ Shift position for ACC with Low Speed Follow: In (D .
2 Radar Sensor P. 467

428
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 429 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

■ How to activate the system 1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
How to use You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
ACC (green) is on in the instrument panel. 2 Front Sensor Camera P. 465
ACC with Low Speed Follow is ready to use.
When the MAIN button is pressed, both ACC with
■ Press the MAIN button on Low Speed Follow and the Lane Keeping Assist
the steering wheel.
System (LKAS) are either turned on or off.

ACC with Low Speed Follow may not work properly

under certain conditions.
2 ACC with Low Speed Follow Conditions
and Limitations P. 435

When not using ACC with Low Speed Follow: Turn

off adaptive cruise by pressing the MAIN button. This
also will turn off the Lane Keeping Assist System

Driving
(LKAS).

Do not use ACC with Low Speed Follow under the

following conditions:
• On roads with heavy traffic or while driving in
continuous stop and go traffic.
• On roads with sharp turns.
• On roads with steep downhill sections, as the set
vehicle speed can be exceeded by coasting. In such
cases, ACC with Low Speed Follow will not apply
the brakes to maintain the set speed.
• On roads with toll collection facilities or other
objects between lanes of traffic, or in parking
areas, or facilities with drive through access.

Continued 429
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 430 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

■ To Set the Vehicle Speed 1To Set the Vehicle Speed

You can switch the displayed set speed
measurements on the audio/information screen
SET/− button
between mph and km/h.
2 Speed Unit P. 131
2 Customized Features P. 326

The vehicle stability assistTM (VSA®) system, vehicle

On when ACC with Low stability assistTM (VSA®) OFF, adaptive cruise control
Speed Follow begins (ACC) with low speed follow, safety support and low
Press and release tire pressure/TPMS indicators may come on in amber
along with a message in the driver information
interface when you set the power mode to ON after
When driving at about 25 mph (40 km/h) or above: Take your foot off the re-connecting the 12-volt battery.
pedal and press the SET/– button when you reach the desired speed. The moment Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).
you release the button, the set speed is fixed, and ACC with Low Speed Follow Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your
begins. vehicle checked by a dealer.
Driving

When driving slower than about 25 mph (40 km/h): If the vehicle is moving
and the brake pedal is not depressed, pressing the button fixes the set speed to
about 25 mph (40 km/h) regardless of current vehicle speed. If your vehicle is
stationary, you can set the vehicle speed even with the brake pedal depressed.

430
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 431 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

Set Vehicle Interval When ACC with Low Speed Follow starts
operating, the vehicle icon, interval bars and
set speed appear on the driver information
interface.

When you use ACC with Low Speed Follow,

Straight Driving Assist (a feature of the Electric
Set Vehicle Speed Power Steering system) is activated.
By enabling the steering system to
automatically compensate for natural steering
pull, Straight Driving Assist makes it easier for
you to keep your vehicle in a straight line.

Driving
Continued 431
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 432 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

■ When in Operation 1When in Operation

If the vehicle ahead of you slows down abruptly, or if
■ There is a vehicle ahead another vehicle cuts in front of you, the beeper
ACC with Low Speed Follow monitors if a vehicle ahead of you enters the ACC with sounds, a message appears on the driver information
Low Speed Follow range. If a vehicle is detected doing so, the ACC with Low Speed interface.
Follow system maintains or decelerates your vehicle’s set speed in order to keep the
vehicle’s set following-interval from the vehicle ahead.
2 To Set or Change Following-interval P. 439

ACC with Low Speed Follow Range: 394 ft. (120 m) Depress the brake pedal, and keep an appropriate
Driving

interval from the vehicle ahead.

When a vehicle whose speed is slower than
your set speed is detected in front of you, your
vehicle starts to slow down.

A vehicle icon appears on the

Beep
driver information interface.

432
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 433 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

■ There is no vehicle ahead 1When in Operation

Your vehicle maintains the set speed without Even if the interval between your vehicle and the
having to keep your foot on the brake or vehicle detected ahead is short, ACC with Low Speed
accelerator pedal. Follow may start accelerating your vehicle under the
following circumstances:
If there previously was a vehicle detected • The vehicle ahead of you is going at almost the
ahead that kept your vehicle from traveling at same speed as, or faster than, your vehicle.
the set speed, ACC with Low Speed Follow • A vehicle that cuts in front of you is going faster
accelerates your vehicle to the set speed, and than your vehicle, gradually increasing the interval
between the vehicles.
A vehicle icon with dotted-line then maintains it.
contour appears on the driver You can also set the system to beep when a vehicle in
information interface. front of you comes in and goes out of the ACC with
Low Speed Follow detecting range. Change the ACC
Forward Vehicle Detect Beep setting.
■ When you depress the accelerator pedal 2 Speed Unit P. 131
You can temporarily increase the vehicle speed. In this case, there is no audible or 2 Customized Features P. 326
visual alert even if a vehicle is in the ACC with Low Speed Follow range.

Driving
Limitations
ACC with Low Speed Follow stays on unless you cancel it. Once you release the
You may need to use the brake to maintain a safe
accelerator pedal, the system resumes an appropriate speed for keeping the interval when using ACC with Low Speed Follow.
following interval while a vehicle ahead is within the ACC with Low Speed Follow Additionally, ACC with Low Speed Follow may not
range. work properly under certain conditions.
2 ACC with Low Speed Follow Conditions
and Limitations P. 435

Continued 433
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 434 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

■ A vehicle detected ahead is within ACC with Low Speed Follow range and 1A vehicle detected ahead is within ACC with Low Speed Follow
slows to a stop range and slows to a stop
Your vehicle also stops, automatically. The
Stopped message appears on the driver 3 WARNING
information interface. Exiting a vehicle that has been stopped
When the vehicle ahead of you starts again, while the ACC with Low Speed Follow
the vehicle icon on the driver information system is operating can result in the vehicle
interface blinks. If you press the RES/+ or moving without operator control.
SET/– button, or depress the accelerator
pedal, ACC with Low Speed Follow operates A vehicle that moves without operator
again within the prior set speed. control can cause a crash, resulting in
If no vehicle is ahead of you before you serious injury or death.
resume driving, depress the accelerator pedal
Never exit a vehicle when the vehicle is
and ACC with Low Speed Follow will operate
stopped by ACC with Low Speed Follow.
again within the prior set speed.
Driving

434
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 435 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

■ ACC with Low Speed Follow Conditions and Limitations 1ACC with Low Speed Follow Conditions and Limitations
The radar sensor for ACC with Low Speed Follow is
The system may automatically shut off and the ACC with Low Speed Follow shared with the collision mitigation braking system
indicator will come on under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions (CMBS).
are listed below. Other conditions may reduce some of the ACC with Low Speed 2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM
Follow functions. (CMBSTM) P. 418
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 465
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any
unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning
■ Environmental conditions message appears too frequently).
Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).

■ Roadway conditions
Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks, reflected
lights, road spray, high contrast).

■ Vehicle conditions

Driving
• The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire *, etc.).
• The camera temperature gets too high.
• The parking brake is applied.
• When the radar sensor cover is dirty.
• The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
• When tire chains are installed.

* Not available on all models Continued 435

 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 436 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

■ Detection limitations
• A vehicle suddenly crosses in front of you.
• The interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short.
• A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly.
• When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle ahead of you at high
speed.
• The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter, or other small
vehicle.
• When there are animals in front of your vehicle.
• When you drive on a curved or winding or undulating road that makes it difficult
for the sensor to properly detect a vehicle in front of you.
Driving

• The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle in front of you is
significantly large.
• An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you.
• Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle.

436
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 437 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

• When driving through a narrow iron bridge.

• When the vehicle ahead of you brakes suddenly.

• When the vehicle ahead of you has a unique shape.

Sensor detects upper section of Panel truck, tanker

an empty carrier truck. truck, etc.

Driving
• When your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you is driving on one edge of the lane.

Continued 437
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 438 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

■ To Adjust the Vehicle Speed 1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

If a vehicle detected ahead is going at a speed slower
Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or SET/– button on the than your increased set speed, ACC with Low Speed
steering wheel. Follow may not accelerate your vehicle. This is to
maintain the set interval between your vehicle and
To increase speed the vehicle ahead.

When you depress the accelerator pedal and then

push and release the SET/– button, the current speed
of the vehicle is set.

You can switch the displayed set speed

measurements on the audio/information screen
between mph and km/h.
2 Speed Unit P. 131
To decrease speed 2 Customized Features P. 326

• Each time you press the RES/+ or SET/– button, the vehicle speed is increased or
Driving

decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.

• If you press and hold the RES/+ or SET/– button, the vehicle speed increases or
decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly.

438
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 439 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

■ To Set or Change Following-interval

Press the (Interval) button to change the
ACC with Low Speed Follow following-
interval.
Each time you press the button, the following-
interval (the interval behind a vehicle detected
ahead of you) setting cycles through extra
long, long, middle, and short following-
Interval
Button intervals.

Determine the most appropriate following-

interval setting based on your specific driving
conditions. Be sure to adhere to any
following-interval requirements set by local
regulation.

Driving
Continued 439
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 440 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

The higher your vehicle’s following-speed is, the longer the short, middle, long or
extra long following-interval becomes. See the following examples for your
reference.

When the Set Speed is:

Following-interval
50 mph (80 km/h) 65 mph (104 km/h)

81.0 feet 103.3 feet

Short 24.7 meters 31.5 meters
1.1 sec 1.1 sec

112.2 feet 142.4 feet

Middle 34.2 meters 43.4 meters
1.5 sec 1.5 sec
Driving

153.5 feet 199.4 feet

Long 46.8 meters 60.8 meters
2.1 sec 2.1 sec

208.3 feet 273.6 feet

Extra
63.5 meters 83.4 meters
Long
2.9 sec 2.9 sec

When your vehicle stops automatically because a vehicle detected ahead of you has
stopped, the interval between the two vehicles will vary based on the ACC with Low
Speed Follow interval setting.

440
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 441 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

■ To Cancel 1To Cancel

Resuming the prior set speed: After you have
To cancel ACC with Low Speed Follow, do any canceled ACC with Low Speed Follow, you can
MAIN
Button
of the following: resume the prior set speed while it is still displayed.
• Press the CANCEL button. Press the RES/+ button.
• Press the MAIN button.
u The ACC with Low Speed Follow The set speed cannot be set or resumed when ACC
with Low Speed Follow has been turned off using the
indicator (green) goes off.
MAIN button. Press the MAIN button to activate the
• Depress the brake pedal while the vehicle is
system, then set the desired speed.
CANCEL moving forward.
Button

Driving
Continued 441
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 442 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

■ Automatic cancellation 1Automatic cancellation

The beeper sounds and a message appears on the driver information interface when Even though ACC with Low Speed Follow has been
ACC with Low Speed Follow is automatically canceled. Any of these conditions may automatically canceled, you can still resume the prior
cause the ACC with Low Speed Follow to automatically cancel: set speed. Wait until the condition that caused ACC
• Bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.) with Low Speed Follow to cancel improves, then
• When the radar sensor at the lower part of the front bumper gets dirty. press the SET/– button.
• The vehicle ahead of you cannot be detected.
• An abnormal tire condition is detected, or the tires are skidding.
• Driving on a mountainous road, or driving off road for extended periods.
• Abrupt steering wheel movement.
• When the ABS, VSA® or CMBSTM is activated.
• When the ABS or VSA® system indicator comes on.
• When the vehicle is stopped on a very steep slope.
• When you manually apply the parking brake.
• When the detected vehicle within the ACC with Low Speed Follow range is too
Driving

close to your vehicle.

• The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, gets dirty.
• When the Maximum Load Limit is exceeded.
• When passing through an enclosed space, such as tunnel.

442
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 443 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

In the following cases, a buzzer sounds, ACC with Low Speed Follow is deactivated,
and the Cruise Cancelled: Slope Too Steep. Watch Downhill Speed message
appears in the driver information interface.
• While descending a long slope and the vehicle has repeatedly applied the brakes
to maintain the set speed.

The ACC with Low Speed Follow automatic cancellation can be also triggered by the
following causes. In these cases, the parking brake will be automatically applied.
• The driver’s seat belt is unfastened when the vehicle is stationary.
• The vehicle stops for more than 10 minutes.
• The power system is turned off.

Driving
Continued 443
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 444 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

■ To Switch ACC with Low Speed Follow to Cruise Control 1To Switch ACC with Low Speed Follow to Cruise Control
Always be aware which mode you are in. When you
Press and hold the (interval) button for one are driving in Cruise mode, the system will not assist
ACC with
second. Cruise Mode Selected appears on you to maintain a following interval from a vehicle
Low Speed Cruise
Follow ON Control ON the driver information interface for two ahead of you.
seconds, and then the mode switches to
Cruise. You can switch the displayed set speed
measurements on the audio/information screen
To switch back to ACC with Low Speed
between mph and km/h.
Follow, press and hold the button again for
2 Speed Unit P. 131
one second. 2 Customized Features P. 326

■ When to use
Desired speed in a range above roughly 25 mph (40 km/h).

■ To Set the Vehicle Speed

Driving

Take your foot off the pedal and press the SET/– button when you reach the desired
speed.
The moment you release the SET/– button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control
begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on.

When you use cruise control, Straight Driving Assist (a feature of the Electric Power
Steering system) is activated.
By enabling the steering system to automatically compensate for natural steering
pull, Straight Driving Assist makes it easier for you to keep your vehicle in a straight
line.

444
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 445 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

■ To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

Each time you press the RES/+ or SET/– button, the vehicle speed is increased or
decreased by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
If you keep the RES/+ or SET/– button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or
decreases until you release it. This speed is then set.

■ To Cancel 1To Cancel

Resuming the prior set speed:
To cancel cruise control, do any of the following: After cruise control has been canceled, you can still
• Press the CANCEL button. resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/+
• Press the MAIN button. button while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40
• Depress the brake pedal. km/h) or more.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off.
You cannot set or resume in the following situations:
• When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h)
• When the MAIN button is turned off.

Driving
At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise
control is canceled automatically.

445
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 446 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

Provides steering input to help keep the vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and 1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
provides tactile and visual alerts if the vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane. Important Safety Reminders
The LKAS is for your convenience only. It is not a
■ Steering input assist substitute for your vehicle control. The system does
The system applies torque to the steering to keep the vehicle between the left and not work if you take your hands off the steering
right lane lines. The applied torque becomes stronger as the vehicle gets closer to wheel or fail to steer the vehicle.
either of the lane lines. 2 Driver Information Interface Warning and
Information Messages P. 104
■ Front Sensor Camera ■ Tactile and visual alerts
Monitors the lane Rapid vibrations on the steering Do not place objects on the instrument panel.
lines. wheel and a warning display alert Objects may reflect on the windshield and prevent
you that the vehicle is drifting out of correct detection of the traffic lanes.
a detected lane.
The LKAS only alerts you when lane drift is detected
without a turn signal in use. The LKAS may not detect
all lane markings or lane departures; accuracy will
vary based on weather, speed, and lane marker
Driving

condition.
It is always your responsibility to safely operate the
vehicle and avoid collisions.

The LKAS is convenient when it is used on freeways.

The LKAS may not work properly or may work

improperly under the certain conditions:
2 LKAS Conditions and Limitations P. 451

When you operate the turn signals to change lanes, the system is suspended, and You can read about handling information for the
resumes after the signals are off.
camera equipped with this system.
If you make a lane change without operating the turn signals, the LKAS alerts
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 465
activate, and torque is applied to the steering.

446
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 447 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

■ Lane Keep Support Function 1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

The LKAS may not function as designed while driving
Provides assistance to keep the vehicle in the center of the lane. When the vehicle in frequent stop and go traffic, or on roads with
nears a white or yellow line, steering force of the electric power steering will become sharp curves.
stronger.
When it fails to detect lanes, the system will
temporarily be canceled. When a lane is detected, the
system will recover automatically.

■ Lane Departure Warning Function

Driving
When the vehicle enters the warning area, the LKAS alerts you with slight steering
wheel vibration as well as a warning display.

Warning Area

Warning Area

Continued 447
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 448 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

■ When the System can be Used 1When the System can be Used
If the vehicle drifts toward either left or right lane line
The system can be used when the following conditions are met. due to the system applying torque, turn off the LKAS
• The lane in which you are driving has detectable lane markers on both sides, and and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
your vehicle is in the center of the lane.
• The vehicle is traveling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h).
• You are driving on a straight or slightly curved road.
• The turn signals are off.
• The brake pedal is not depressed.
• The wipers are not in continuous operation.

■ How to activate the system

1. Press the MAIN button.
u The LKAS is on in the driver information
MAIN Button interface.
The system is ready to use.
Driving

2. Press the LKAS button.

u Lane outlines appear on the driver
LKAS Button
information interface.
The system is activated.

448
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 449 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

3. Keep your vehicle near the center of the

lane while driving.
u The dotted outer lines change to solid
ones once the system starts operating
after detecting the left and right lane
markings.

■ To Cancel 1To Cancel

Pressing the MAIN button also turns ACC with Low
To cancel the LKAS: Speed Follow on and off.
Press the MAIN or LKAS button.

MAIN Button The LKAS is turned off every time you turn the

Driving
power system off, even if you turned it on the
last time you drove the vehicle.
LKAS
Button

Continued 449
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 450 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

■ The system operation is suspended if 1The system operation is suspended if you:

you: You can change the setting for the LKAS.
• The wipers are set to HI. LKAS suspended beep on and off can be selected.
u Turning the wipers off resumes the 2 Customized Features P. 326
LKAS.
Models with automatic intermittent wipers
• Set the wiper switch to AUTO and the
wipers operate at high speed.
When the LKAS is suspended, u The LKAS resumes when the wipers stop
the lane lines on the driver
information interface change to or operate at low speed.
contour lines, and the beeper All models
sounds (if activated). • Decrease the vehicle speed to about 40 mph
(64 km/h) or less.
u Increasing the vehicle speed to about
45 mph (72 km/h) or more resumes the
Driving

LKAS.
• Depress the brake pedal.
u The LKAS resumes and starts detecting
the lane lines again once you release the
brake pedal.

■ The LKAS may be automatically suspended when:

• The system fails to detect lane lines.
• The steering wheel is quickly turned.
• You fail to steer the vehicle.
• Driving through a sharp curve.
• Driving at a speed in excess of approximately 90 mph (145 km/h).
Once these conditions no longer exist, the LKAS automatically resumes.

450
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 451 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

■ The LKAS may be automatically canceled when:

• The camera temperature gets extremely high or low.
• The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, gets dirty.
• The ABS or VSA® system engages.
The beeper sounds if the LKAS is automatically canceled.

■ LKAS Conditions and Limitations

The system may not detect lane markings and therefore may not keep the vehicle in
the middle of a lane under certain conditions, including the following:

■ Environmental conditions
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
• Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
• There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface.

Driving
• Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
• Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
• Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
• Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings.
• Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markers.
• Reflections on the interior of the windshield.
• Driving at night or in a dark condition such as a tunnel.

Continued 451
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 452 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

■ Roadway conditions
• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
• Driving on a road with temporary lane markings.
• Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road
repairs or old lane markings.
Faded lines Duplicate lines Tire tracks

• The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines (e.g., such as at an intersection
or crosswalk).
Driving

• The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.

Very wide or narrow traffic lane

• The vehicle in front of you is driving near the lane lines.

• The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
• Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces.

452
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 453 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

• When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white
lines (or yellow lines).
• Driving on roads with double lines.

Lane void of lines at junction

■ Vehicle conditions
• Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted.
• The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet

Driving
snow, etc.
• The inside of the windshield is fogged.
• The camera temperature gets too high.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire *, etc.).
• The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.

* Not available on all models 453

 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 454 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System

Alerts and helps to assist you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle 1Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
unintentionally crossing over detected lane markings and/or leaving the roadway Important Safety Reminder
altogether. Like all assistance systems, the RDM system has
limitations.
■ How the System Works Over-reliance on the RDM system may result in a
collision. It is always your responsibility to keep the
The front camera behind the rearview mirror vehicle within your driving lane.
monitors left and right lane markings (in white
The RDM system only alerts you when lane drift is
or yellow). If your vehicle is getting too close detected without a turn signal in use. The RDM
to detected lane markings without a turn system may not detect all lane markings or lane or
signal activated, the system, in addition to a roadway departures; accuracy will vary based on
visual alert, applies steering torque and alerts weather, speed and lane marker condition. It is
always your responsibility to safely operate the
you with rapid vibrations on the steering vehicle and avoid collisions.
wheel, to help you remain within the detected
lane. You can read about handling information for the
2 Customized Features P. 326 camera equipped with this system.
Driving

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 465

As a visual alert, the Lane Departure The RDM system may not work properly or may work
message appears on the driver information improperly under the certain conditions:
interface. 2 RDM Conditions and Limitations P. 457

There are times when you may not notice RDM

functions due to your operation of the vehicle, or
If the system determines that its steering input is insufficient to keep your vehicle on road surface conditions.
the roadway, it may apply braking.
u Braking is applied only when the lane markings are solid continuous lines. In the following case, a beeper sounds, a message
The system cancels assisting operations when you turn the steering wheel to avoid related to the ACC with Low Speed Follow appears
crossing over detected lane markings. on the driver information interface, and the braking
function controlled by the RDM system is canceled.
• The vehicle has repeatedly applied the brakes to
If the system operates several times without detecting driver response, the system maintain the set speed (for example, you are
beeps to alert you. descending a long slope).
454
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 455 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System

■ How the System Activates 1Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System

If LKAS is off and you have selected Narrow from the
The system activates when all the following conditions are met:
customized options using the audio/information
• The vehicle is traveling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h). screen, the message below will appear in case the
• The vehicle is on a straight or slightly curved road. system determines a possibility of your vehicle
• The turn signals are off. crossing over detected lane markings.
• The brake pedal is not depressed. 2 Customized Features P. 326
• The wipers are not in continuous operation.
• The system makes a determination that the driver is not actively accelerating,
braking or steering.

Driving
1How the System Activates
The RDM system may automatically shut off and the
safety support indicator (amber) comes and stays on.
2 Indicators P. 82

RDM system function can be impacted when the

vehicle is:
• Not driven within a traffic lane.
• Driven on the inside edge of a curve, or outside of
a lane.
• Driven in a narrow lane.

Continued 455
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 456 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System

■ RDM On and Off 1RDM On and Off

When you have selected Warning Only from the
Left Selector Wheel When you turn the RDM on and off, do the customized options using the audio/information
following. screen, the system does not operate the steering
1. Press the safety support switch. wheel and braking.
2. Roll the left selector wheel to the 2 Customized Features P. 326
symbol and push it.
u The message appears on the driver The vehicle stability assistTM (VSA®) system, vehicle
stability assistTM (VSA®) OFF, adaptive cruise control
information interface when the system
(ACC) with low speed follow, safety support and low
turns on or off. tire pressure/TPMS indicators may come on in amber
along with a message in the driver information
The RDM is in the previously selected ON or interface when you set the power mode to ON after
OFF setting each time you turn the power re-connecting the 12-volt battery.
Safety Support Switch Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).
system on.
Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
Driving

456
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 457 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System

■ RDM Conditions and Limitations

The system may not properly detect lane markings and the position of your vehicle
under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below.

■ Environmental conditions
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
• Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
• There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface.
• Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
• Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
• Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
• Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings.
• Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markers.
• Reflections on the interior of the windshield.
• Driving at night or in a dark condition such as a tunnel.

Driving
Continued 457
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 458 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System

■ Roadway conditions
• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
• Driving on a road with temporary lane markings.
• Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road
repairs or old lane markings.
• The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines (e.g., such as at an intersection
or crosswalk).
• The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.
• The vehicle in front of you is driving near the lane lines.
• The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
• Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces.
• When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white
lines (or yellow lines).
• Driving on roads with double lines.
Driving

■ Vehicle conditions
• Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted.
• The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet
snow, etc.
• The inside of the windshield is fogged.
• The camera temperature gets too high.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire *, etc.).
• The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
• When tire chains are installed.

458 * Not available on all models

22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 459 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Sign Recognition System

Traffic Sign Recognition System

Reminds you of road sign information, such as the current speed limit your vehicle 1Traffic Sign Recognition System
has just passed through, showing it on the driver information interface. Not all signs may be displayed, but any signs posted
on roadsides should not be ignored. The system does
■ How the System Works not work on the designated traffic signs of all the
countries you travel, nor in all situations.
When the camera located behind the rearview mirror captures traffic signs while Do not rely too much on the system. Always drive at
driving, the system displays the ones that are recognized as designated for your speeds appropriate for the road conditions.
vehicle. The sign icon will be displayed until the vehicle reaches a predetermined
Never apply a film or attach any objects to the
time and distance.
windshield that could obstruct the camera’s field of
vision and cause the system to operate abnormally.
Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield
within the camera’s field of vision can cause the
system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we
recommend that you replace the windshield with a
genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making
even minor repairs within the camera’s field of vision

Driving
or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield
may also cause the system to operate abnormally.
After replacing the windshield, have a dealer
The sign icon also may switch to another one or disappear when: recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the
camera is necessary for the system to operate
properly.
• The other designated limit is detected.
• You make a turn with a turn signal at an intersection.

Continued 459
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 460 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Sign Recognition System

If the system does not detect any traffic signs while you are driving, the image below 1Traffic Sign Recognition System
may appear. To help reduce the likelihood that high interior
temperatures will cause the camera’s sensing system
to shut off, when parking, find a shady area or face
the front of the vehicle away from the sun. If you use
a reflective sun shade, do not allow it to cover the
camera housing.
Covering the camera can concentrate heat on it.

If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot

Operate: Camera Temperature Too High message
appears, the traffic sign recognition system does not
work, and will be displayed.
• Use the climate control system to cool down the
interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode
with the air flow directed towards the camera.
• Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield
Driving

temperature, which cools down the area around

the camera.

If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot

Operate: Clean Front Windshield message
appears, the traffic sign recognition system does not
work, and will be displayed.
Park your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the
windshield. If the message does not disappear after
you have cleaned the windshield and driven for a
while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

460
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 461 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Sign Recognition System

■ Traffic Sign Recognition System Conditions and Limitations 1Traffic Sign Recognition System Conditions and Limitations
When the traffic sign recognition system
The traffic sign recognition system may not be able to recognize a traffic sign in the malfunctions, appears on the driver information
following cases. interface. If this message does not disappear, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.
■ Vehicle conditions
• Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted.
• The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
• The inside of the windshield is fogged.
• There are portions remaining to be wiped.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire *, etc.).
• The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.

■ Environmental conditions
• Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).

Driving
• Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
• Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
• When you drive in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
• Driving at night, in dark areas such as long tunnels.
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
• A vehicle in front of you is kicking up spray or snow.

* Not available on all models Continued 461

 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 462 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Sign Recognition System

■ The position or the condition of the traffic sign

• A sign is hard to be found since it is in a complicated area.
• A sign is located far away from your vehicle.
• A sign is located where the beam of the headlight is hard to reach.
• A sign is on a corner or bend in the road.
• Faded or bent signs.
• Rotated or damaged signs.
• A sign is covered with mud, snow, or frost.
• A part of the sign is hidden by the trees, or the sign itself is hidden by a vehicle
and others.
• Light (a streetlight) or a shadow is reflected on the surface of the sign.
• A sign is too bright or too dark (an electric sign).
• A sign of a small size.

■ Other conditions
Driving

• When you are driving at a high speed.

462
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 463 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Sign Recognition System

The traffic sign recognition system may not operate correctly, such as displaying a
sign that does not follow the actual regulation for the roadway or does not exist at
all in the following cases.
u A speed limit sign may display at a higher or lower speed than the actual speed
limit.
• There is a supplementary sign with further information such as weather, time,
vehicle type, school zone, etc.
• Figures on the sign are hard to read (electric signs, numbers on the sign are
blurred, etc.).
• A sign is in the vicinity of the lane you are driving in, even though it is not for the
lane (speed limit sign situated at the junction between the side road and the main
road, etc.).
• There are things that look similar to the color or shape of the recognition object
(similar sign, electric sign, signboard, structure, etc.).
• A truck or another large vehicle with a sticker of the speed limit sign on the back

Driving
is traveling in front of you.

Continued 463
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 464 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Sign Recognition System

■ Signs Displayed on the Driver Information Interface

The speed limit sign icon is displayed on the right half of the screen.
■ When main mode is selected

Speed Limit Sign

■ When main mode is not selected

Driving

Speed Limit Sign

■ Selecting to display traffic signs when main mode is off

You can continue displaying a reduced-size traffic sign icon on the driver
information interface even while the main mode is not selected.
2 Customized Features P. 326

464
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 465 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uFront Sensor Camera

Front Sensor Camera

The camera, used in systems such as LKAS, RDM, ACC with Low Speed Follow, 1Front Sensor Camera
CMBSTM and traffic sign recognition system, is designed to detect an object that Never apply a film or attach any objects to the
triggers any of the systems to operate its functions. windshield, the hood, or the front grille that could
obstruct the camera’s field of vision and cause the

■ Camera Location and Handling Tips

system to operate abnormally.
Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield
This camera is located behind the rearview within the camera’s field of vision can cause the
Front Sensor mirror. system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we
Camera recommend that you replace the windshield with a
genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making
To help reduce the likelihood that high interior even minor repairs within the camera’s field of vision
temperatures will cause the camera’s sensing or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield
system to shut off, when parking, find a shady may also cause the system to operate abnormally.
area or face the front of the vehicle away from After replacing the windshield, have a dealer
the sun. If you use a reflective sun shade, do recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the
not allow it to cover the camera housing. camera is necessary for the system to operate
properly.
Covering the camera can concentrate heat on

Driving
it. Do not place an object on the top of the instrument
panel. It may reflect onto the windshield and prevent
the system from detecting lane lines properly.

Continued 465
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 466 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uFront Sensor Camera

1Front Sensor Camera

If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot
Operate: Camera Temperature Too High message
appears:
• Use the climate control system to cool down the
interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode
with the airflow directed towards the camera.
• Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield
temperature, which cools down the area around
the camera.

If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot

Operate: Clean Front Windshield message
appears:
• Park your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the
windshield. If the message does not disappear after
you have cleaned the windshield and driven for a
Driving

while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

466
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 467 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuHonda Sensing®uRadar Sensor

Radar Sensor
The radar sensor is at the lower part of the 1Radar Sensor
front bumper. Avoid strong impacts to the radar sensor cover.

For the CMBSTM to work properly:

Radar Always keep the radar sensor cover clean.

Sensor
Never use chemical solvents or polishing powder for
cleaning the sensor cover. Clean it with water or a
mild detergent.

Do not put a sticker on the radar sensor cover or

replace the radar sensor cover.

If you need the radar sensor to be repaired, or

removed, or the radar sensor cover is strongly
impacted, turn off the system by using the safety

Driving
support switch and take your vehicle to a dealer.
2 CMBSTM On and Off P. 422

If the vehicle is involved in any of the following

situations, the radar sensor may not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer:
• Your vehicle is involved in a frontal collision
• Your vehicle drives through deep water or is
submerged in deep water
• Your vehicle strongly strikes a bump, curb, chock,
or embankment that could jar the radar sensor

467
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 468 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Braking
Brake System
■ Parking Brake 1Braking
When you depress the brake pedal, you may hear a
Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parked. When the
whirring sound from the engine compartment. This is
parking brake is applied, you can manually or automatically release it. because the brake system is in operation, and it is
■ To apply normal.
The electric parking brake can be applied any
time the vehicle has battery, no matter which
1Parking Brake
position the power mode is in.
You may hear the electric parking brake system
motor operating from the rear wheel area when you
Pull the electric parking brake switch up gently apply or release the parking brake. This is normal.
and securely.
u The indicator in the switch comes on. The brake pedal may slightly move due to the electric
Electric Parking Brake Switch parking brake system operation when you apply or
u The parking brake indicator (red) comes
on. release the parking brake. This is normal.

You cannot apply or release the parking brake if the

Driving

12-volt battery goes dead.

2 If the 12-Volt Battery Is Dead P. 564

If you pull up and hold the electric parking brake

switch while driving, the brakes on all four
wheels are applied by the electric servo brake
system until the vehicle comes to a stop. The
electric parking brake then applies, and the
switch should be released.

468
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 469 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuBrakinguBrake System

■ To release 1Parking Brake

The power mode must be in ON in order to In the following situations, the parking brake
release the electric parking brake. automatically operates.
1. Depress the brake pedal. • When the vehicle stops more than 10 minutes
2. Press the electric parking brake switch. while ACC with Low Speed Follow is activated.
u The indicator in the switch goes off. • When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened while
your vehicle is stopped automatically by ACC with
u The parking brake indicator (red) goes
Low Speed Follow.
off. • When the power system is turned off while ACC
Electric Parking Brake Switch
with Low Speed Follow is activated.
Manually releasing the parking brake using • When the vehicle stops with the automatic brake
the switch helps your vehicle start slowly and hold system activated for more than 10 minutes.
smoothly when facing downhill on steep hills. • When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened while
your vehicle is stopped and the automatic brake
hold is applied.
• When the power system is turned off while the
automatic brake hold is applied.

Driving
• When there is a problem with the automatic brake
hold system while brake hold is applied.

Continued 469
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 470 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuBrakinguBrake System

■ Automatic parking brake feature operation 1Parking Brake

If the automatic parking brake feature has been activated: If the parking brake cannot be released
• The parking brake is applied automatically when you set the power mode to automatically, release it manually.
VEHICLE OFF.
• To confirm that the parking brake is applied, check if the parking brake indicator When the vehicle is traveling uphill, the accelerator
pedal may need to be pressed farther to
(red) is on.
automatically release the electric parking brake.
2 Activating and deactivating the automatic parking brake feature P. 471
The parking brake cannot be released automatically
■ To release automatically while the following indicators are on:
Depressing the accelerator pedal releases the parking brake. • Malfunction indicator lamp
Use the accelerator pedal to release the parking brake when you are starting the • Transmission system indicator
vehicle facing uphill, or in a traffic jam.
The parking brake may not be released automatically
Gently depress the accelerator pedal. while the following indicators are on:
When on a hill, it may require more • Brake system indicator
accelerator input to release. • VSA® system indicator
Driving

u The indicator in the switch goes off. • ABS indicator

u The parking brake indicator (red) goes • Supplemental restraint system indicator
off.

Accelerator Pedal

You can release the parking brake automatically when:

• You are wearing the driver’s seat belt.
• The power system is on.
• The transmission is not in (P or (N .

470
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 471 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuBrakinguBrake System

■ Activating and deactivating the automatic parking brake feature 1Parking Brake
With the power mode is in ON, carry out the following steps to either activate or In cold climates, the parking brake may freeze in
deactivate the automatic parking brake feature. place if applied.
1. Put the transmission into (P . When parking the vehicle, chock the wheels and
2. Without depressing the brake pedal, pull up and release the parking brake switch. make sure the automatic parking brake feature is
deactivated.
u Check that the parking brake indicator (red) has come on.
Also, when putting your vehicle through a conveyor-
3. Pull up and hold the parking brake switch. When you hear a beeping sound,
type car wash or when having your vehicle towed,
release the switch and within 3 seconds pull up and hold the switch again. deactivate the automatic parking brake feature and
4. When you hear a sound indicating that the procedure is completed, release the leave the parking brake released.
switch.
u Two beeps indicates that the feature has been activated.
u One beep indicates that the feature has been deactivated.
u When you have completed activating the feature, the parking brake will
remain applied after you turn off the engine.
u To confirm that the parking brake is applied, check if the parking brake

Driving
indicator (red) is on.

If you need to temporarily deactivate the feature while putting your vehicle through
a conveyor type car wash, you can follow the procedure explained below.
1. Depress the brake pedal and bring the vehicle to a stop.
2. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF and then within 2 seconds push down the
parking brake switch.
u Activation and deactivation settings for the feature will not be affected.
u Before temporarily deactivating the feature, make sure to first turn off both
ACC with Low Speed Follow and the automatic brake hold system.
u To confirm that the parking brake is applied, check if the parking brake
indicator (red) is on.

Continued 471
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 472 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuBrakinguBrake System

■ Foot Brake 1Foot Brake

Check the brakes after driving through deep water,
Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. The brake assist system or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If
increases the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the
emergency situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering pedal several times.
control when braking very hard.
2 Brake Assist System P. 477 If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 476 applying the brakes, this is caused by the brake wear
indicator rubbing on the brake rotor and indicates
that the brake pads need to be replaced. Have the
vehicle checked by a dealer. If you hear only an
occasional squeak or squeal when you initially apply
the brake pedal, this may be normal and caused by
high frequency vibration of the brake pads against
the rotating brake disc.

Applying constant pressure to the brakes while going

Driving

down a long hill can cause the brakes to heat up,

resulting in a loss of stopping power. Therefore,
when descending a long hill, release the accelerator
pedal and allow regenerative braking to slow the
vehicle down. To adjust the rate of deceleration, use
the deceleration paddle selector.
2 POWER/CHARGE Gauge P. 131
2 High Voltage Battery Charge Level Gauge
P. 130
2 Deceleration Paddle Selector P. 398

Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while

driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause
them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad
life. It will also confuse drivers behind you.

472
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 473 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuBrakinguBrake System

■ Automatic Brake Hold 1Automatic Brake Hold

Keeps the brake applied after releasing the brake pedal until the accelerator pedal is 3 WARNING
pressed. You can use this system while the vehicle is temporarily stopped, like at
Activating the automatic brake hold system
traffic lights and in heavy traffic. on steep hills or slippery roads may still
allow the vehicle to move if you remove
■ Turning on the system ■ Activating the system ■ Canceling the system your foot from the brake pedal.

Comes If a vehicle unexpectedly moves, it may

On On On cause a crash resulting in serious injury or
Comes Goes death.
On Off
Never activate the automatic brake hold
Automatic Brake Brake Pedal Accelerator Pedal system or rely on it to keep a vehicle from
Hold Button
moving when stopped on a steep hill or
slippery roads.
Fasten your seat belt Depress the brake pedal Depress the accelerator
properly, then start the to come to a complete pedal while the

Driving
power system. Press the stop. The transmission transmission must be in
automatic brake hold must be in (D or (N . (D . The system is
3 WARNING
button. ● The automatic brake canceled and the vehicle Using the automatic brake hold system to
● The automatic brake
hold indicator comes starts to move. park the vehicle may result in the vehicle
● The automatic brake
hold system indicator on. Braking is kept for unexpectedly moving.
comes on. The system up to 10 minutes. hold indicator goes
is turned on. ● Release the brake pedal off. The system If a vehicle moves unexpectedly, it may
after the automatic continues to be on. cause a crash, resulting in serious injury or
brake hold indicator
death.
comes on. Never leave the vehicle when braking is
temporarily kept by automatic brake hold
and always park the vehicle by putting the
transmission in (P and applying the parking
brake.

Continued 473
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 474 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuBrakinguBrake System

■ The system automatically cancels when: 1Automatic Brake Hold

• You engage the parking brake. While the system is activated, you can turn off the
• You depress the brake pedal and put the transmission into (P or (R . power system or park the vehicle through the same
procedure as you normally do.
■ The system automatically cancels and the parking brake is applied when: 2 When Stopped P. 478
• Braking is kept for more than 10 minutes.
Whether the system is on, or the system is activated,
• The driver’s seat belt is unfastened.
the automatic brake hold turns off once the power
• The power system is turned off. system is off.
• There is a problem with automatic brake hold system.
Driving

474
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 475 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuBrakinguBrake System

■ Turning off the automatic brake hold system 1Turning off the automatic brake hold system
While the system is on, press the automatic Make sure to turn off the automatic brake hold
brake hold button again. system before using an automated car wash.
Goes u The automatic brake hold system
Off indicator goes off. You may hear an operating noise if the vehicle moves
while the automatic brake hold system is in
operation.
If you want to turn off automatic brake hold
Automatic Brake while the system is in operation, press the
Hold Button automatic brake hold button with the brake
pedal depressed.

Driving
475
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 476 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuBrakinguAnti-lock Brake System (ABS)

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

■ ABS 1Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
NOTICE
Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by
The ABS may not function correctly if you use a tire of
pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you can. the incorrect size or type.

The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also If the ABS indicator comes on while driving, there
balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading. may be a problem with the system. While normal
braking will not be affected, there is a possibility that
the ABS will not be operating. Have your vehicle
You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always
checked by a dealer immediately.
keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as
“stomp and steer.” The ABS is not designed for the purpose of reducing
the time or distance it takes for a vehicle to stop: It is
■ ABS operation designed to limit brake lockup which can lead to
You may hear an operating noise when the ABS is working. Depress the brake pedal skidding and loss of steering control.
and keep holding the pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to press
In the following cases, your vehicle may need more
on the brake pedal very hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the
Driving

distance to stop than a vehicle without the ABS:

ABS activate immediately if you are trying to stop on snow or ice. • You are driving on rough or uneven road surfaces,
such as gravel or snow.
ABS may activate when you depress the brake pedal when driving on: • The tires are equipped with tire chains.
• Wet or snow covered roads.
The following may be observed with the ABS system:
• Roads paved with stone.
• Motor sounds coming from the engine
• Roads with uneven surfaces, such as potholes, cracks, manholes, etc.
compartment when the brakes are applied, or
when system checks are being performed after the
When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops. power system has been turned on and while the
vehicle accelerates.
• Brake pedal and/or the vehicle body vibration when
ABS activates.
These vibrations and sounds are normal to ABS
systems and are no cause for concern.

476
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 477 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuBrakinguBrake Assist System

Brake Assist System

Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress
the brake pedal hard during emergency braking.

■ Brake assist system operation

Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking.

When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise
may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down.

Driving
477
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 478 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Parking Your Vehicle

When Stopped
1. Depress the brake pedal firmly. 1Parking Your Vehicle
2. With the brake pedal depressed, pull up the electric parking brake switch slowly,
but fully. 3 WARNING
3. Change the shift position to (P . The vehicle can roll away if left unattended
4. Turn off the power system. without confirming that Park is engaged.

Always confirm the electric parking brake is set, in particular if you are parked on an A vehicle that rolls away could cause a crash
incline. resulting in serious injury or death.

Always keep your foot on the brake pedal

until you have confirmed that (P is shown
on the shift position indicator.

Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects,

such as dry grass, oil, or timber.
Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire.
Driving

1When Stopped
NOTICE
The following can damage the driveline:
• Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals
simultaneously.
• Changing to (P before the vehicle stops
completely.

When facing uphill, do not hold the vehicle by

depressing the accelerator pedal.
Doing so may cause the power system to overheat
and fail.

478
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 479 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuParking Your VehicleuWhen Stopped

1When Stopped
In extremely cold temperatures, the parking brake
may freeze up if applied. If such temperatures are
expected, do not apply the parking brake but, if
parking on a slope, either turn the front wheels so
they will contact the curb if the vehicle rolls down the
slope or block the wheels to keep the vehicle from
moving. If you do not take either precaution, the
vehicle may roll unexpectedly, leading to a crash.

Driving
479
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 480 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor

Cross Traffic Monitor

Monitors the rear corner areas using the radar sensors when reversing, and alerts 1Cross Traffic Monitor
you if a vehicle approaching from a rear corner is detected.
3 CAUTION
The system is convenient when you are backing out of a parking space. Cross Traffic Monitor cannot detect all
approaching vehicles and may not detect
an approaching vehicle at all.

Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to

back up the vehicle before doing so may
result in a collision.

Do not solely rely on the system when

reversing; always also use your mirrors, and
look behind and to the sides of your vehicle
before reversing.
Driving

480
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 481 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor

■ How the System Works 1Cross Traffic Monitor

Cross traffic monitor may not detect or may delay
The system activates when: alerting an approaching vehicle, or may alert without
• The power mode is in ON. an approaching vehicle under the following
• The Cross Traffic Monitor is turned on. conditions:
2 Cross Traffic Monitor On and Off P. 482 • An obstacle, such as another vehicle and a wall,
2 Customized Features P. 326 near your vehicle’s rear bumper, is blocking the
radar sensor’s scope.
• The transmission is in (R .
• Your vehicle is moving at the speed of about 3 mph
• Your vehicle is moving at 3 mph (5 km/h) or
(5 km/h) or higher.
lower. • A vehicle is approaching at the speed other than
between about 6 mph (10 km/h) and 16 mph (25
km/h).
Radar sensors: • The system picks up external interference such as
Underneath the rear bumper other radar sensors from another vehicle or strong
corners radio wave transmitted from a facility nearby.
• Either corner of the rear bumper is covered with

Driving
When a vehicle is detected approaching from a rear corner, Cross Traffic Monitor snow, ice, mud or dirt.
alerts you with a buzzer and a displayed warning. • When there is bad weather.
• Your vehicle is on an incline.
The system will not detect a vehicle that approaches from directly behind your • Your vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load in the rear.
• Your vehicle is reversing towards a wall, a pole, a
vehicle, nor will it provide alerts about a detected vehicle when it moves directly
vehicle, and so on.
behind your vehicle.
The rear bumper or the sensors have been improperly
The system does not provide alerts for a vehicle that is moving away from your repaired or the rear bumper has been deformed.
vehicle, and it may alert for pedestrians, bicycles, or stationary objects. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

For proper operation, always keep the rear bumper

corner area clean.
Do not cover the rear bumper corner area with labels
or stickers of any kind.

Continued 481
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 482 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor

■ When the System Detects a Vehicle 1When the System Detects a Vehicle
If the on the lower right changes to in amber
Arrow Icon when the transmission is in (R , mud, snow or ice,
etc. may have accumulated in the vicinity of the
sensor. The system is temporarily canceled. Check the
bumper corners for any obstructions, and thoroughly
clean the area if necessary.

If the comes on in amber when the transmission

is in (R , there may be a problem with the Cross
Traffic Monitor system. Do not use the system and
Normal View Wide View Top Down View
have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
An arrow icon appears on the side a vehicle is approaching on the information
If the display remains the same with the transmission
screen.
in (R , there may be a problem with the rear camera
system and the Cross Traffic Monitor system.
■ Cross Traffic Monitor On and Off Do not use the system and have your vehicle checked
Driving

by a dealer.
You can switch the system on and off from
the customized feature on the information
screen.
2 Customized Features P. 326

Icon

482
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 483 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Multi-View Rear Camera

About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
The audio/information screen can display your vehicle’s rear view. The display 1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
automatically changes to the rear view when the transmission is put into (R . The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see
the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath
■ Multi-View Rear Camera Display Area the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects
appear closer or farther than they actually are.

Wide View Mode Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing
Approx. 39 inches (1 m) up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and
high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do
Approx. 20 inches (50 cm) not rely on the rearview display which does not give
you all information about conditions at the back of
Guidelines your vehicle.
Normal View Mode
If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture,
use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free
of debris.

Driving
You can change the Fixed Guideline and Dynamic
Camera Top Down View Mode Guideline * settings.
2 Customized Features P. 326

Bumper Fixed Guideline

ON: Guidelines appear when you put the
transmission into (R .
OFF: Guidelines do not appear.
Dynamic Guideline *
ON: Guidelines move according to the steering wheel
direction.
OFF: Guidelines do not move.

* Not available on all models Continued 483

 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 484 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuMulti-View Rear CamerauAbout Your Multi-View Rear Camera

You can view three different camera modes on the audio/information screen.
Touch the appropriate icon to switch the mode.
: Wide view mode
: Normal view mode
: Top down view mode

• If you were last using Wide view mode or Normal view mode, the same view
mode will be activated the next time you put the transmission into (R .
• If you were using Top down view mode before turning off the power system, the
next time you set the power mode to ON and put the transmission into (R , the
view mode you were using just before using Top down view mode (Wide view
mode or Normal view mode) will be activated.
• If you were using Top down view mode and 10 seconds elapsed after you took
the transmission out of (R , the view mode you were using just before selecting
Top down view mode (Wide view mode or Normal view mode) will be activated
Driving

the next time you put the transmission into (R .

484
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 485 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Refueling
Fuel Information
■ Fuel recommendation 1Fuel Information
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher NOTICE
We recommend quality gasoline containing
Use of a lower octane gasoline can cause a persistent, heavy metallic knocking noise
detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and
that can lead to engine damage. engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain
good performance, fuel economy, and emissions
■ Top tier detergent gasoline control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline
Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based
endorses the use of “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” where available to help fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is
maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent available.
Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive
Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely
manufacturers to meet the needs of today’s advanced engines. affect performance, and cause the malfunction
indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on.
Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met If this happens, contact a dealer for service.
“TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” standards at the retail location. This fuel is Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such
guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on

Driving
oxygenated gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic
by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol.
additives in gasoline, help avoid buildup of deposits in your engine and emission If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try
control system. another service station or switch to another brand of
gasoline.
For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on
gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit www.hondacars.com. For more
information on top tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.

■ Fuel tank capacity: 10.6 US gal (40 L)

485
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 486 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel

How to Refuel
1. Stop your vehicle with the service station 1How to Refuel
pump on the left side of the vehicle in the
rear. 3 WARNING
2. Put the transmission into (P . Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive.
3. Turn the power system off. You can be burned or seriously injured
4. Press the fuel fill door release button. when handling fuel.
u Please Wait appears for a few seconds
on the driver information interface. • Turn the power system off, and keep
5. When the message changes to Ready, the heat, sparks, and flame away.
Fuel Fill Door Release Button fuel fill door automatically opens. • Handle fuel only outdoors.
u You can now unscrew the fuel cap and • Wipe up spills immediately.
start refueling.
6. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. If you hear a This vehicle has a pressurized fuel system.
release of air, wait until this stops, then turn When the fuel vapor pressure inside the fuel tank is
the knob slowly to open the fuel fill cap. high, it takes about 10 seconds for the vehicle to vent
Driving

the fuel tank. Once the pressure is vented, the driver

information interface changes from Please Wait to
Ready.

If the filler nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is

not full, there may be a problem with the pump’s fuel
Fuel Fill Cap vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If
this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer.

The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in

the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result
of changes in air temperature.

486
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 487 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel

Fuel Fill Cap 7. Place the fuel fill cap in the holder. 1How to Refuel
8. Insert the fuel filler nozzle fully. If the fuel fill door does not open after you press the
u When the tank is full, the filler nozzle will button, even after the display changes to Ready, you
click off automatically. This leaves space can manually open the door.
in the fuel tank in case the fuel expands 2 If You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door
P. 584
with a change in the temperature.
u If you do not fill up the tank to full,
An internal valve automatically closes after 30
Holder always add a minimum of 1.3 US gal minutes from the moment you press the fuel fill door
(5.0 L) of fuel. release button. When it does, do not continue to
9. After filling, replace the fuel fill cap, refuel as fuel may spill out.
tightening it until you hear it click at least
once. If you repeatedly fill the tank with less than the
specified minimum amount of fuel, the malfunction
u Shut the fuel fill door by hand.
indicator lamp may come on. If this happens, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Driving
Do not continue to add fuel after the filler nozzle has
automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed
the full tank capacity.

When the fuel fill door automatically opens, a vent

valve in the fuel system also opens to allow the air
and the vapors being displaced by the fuel to escape.
This valve automatically closes, however, if the
refueling is not completed within 30 minutes. If this
happens, reinstall the fuel cap, close the fuel fill door,
and then follow these steps again to restart the
system.

487
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 488 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions

Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO2 Emissions
Achieving fuel economy and reducing CO2 emissions is dependent on several 1Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO2 Emissions
factors, including driving conditions, load weight, idling time, driving habits, and Direct calculation is the recommended method to
vehicle condition. Depending on these and other factors, you may not achieve the determine actual fuel consumed while driving.
rated fuel economy of this vehicle.
Gallons of Miles per
Miles driven
fuel Gallon

■ Maintenance and Fuel Economy 100 Liters of fuel Kilometers

L per 100 km
driven
You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle.
Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the
driver information interface.
• Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.
2 Recommended Engine Oil P. 501
• Maintain the specified tire pressure.
• Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo.
• Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle’s underside
adds weight and increases wind resistance.
Driving

488
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 489 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Maintenance
This chapter discusses basic maintenance.

Before Performing Maintenance Cooling System................................ 506 Wear Indicators ............................... 524
Inspection and Maintenance ............ 490 Inverter Coolant............................... 508 Tire Service Life................................ 524
Safety When Performing Maintenance ...491 Transmission Fluid............................ 509 Tire and Wheel Replacement ........... 525
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Brake Fluid....................................... 510 Tire Rotation.................................... 526
Service ........................................... 492 Refilling Window Washer Fluid......... 511 Winter Tires ..................................... 527
Maintenance MinderTM ..................... 493 Replacing Light Bulbs ....................... 512 12-Volt Battery ................................. 528
Maintenance Under the Hood Checking and Maintaining Wiper Remote Transmitter Care
Maintenance Items Under the Hood.. 499 Blades .......................................... 516 Replacing the Remote Battery .......... 530
Opening the Hood ........................... 500 Checking and Maintaining Tires Climate Control System Maintenance ..531
Recommended Engine Oil ................ 501 Checking Tires ................................. 519 Cleaning
Oil Check ......................................... 502 Tire and Loading Information Label .. 520 Interior Care .................................... 532
Adding Engine Oil ............................ 503 Tire Labeling .................................... 520 Exterior Care.................................... 534
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter ..... 504 DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles) .. 522 Accessories and Modifications ........ 537

489
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 490 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Before Performing Maintenance

Inspection and Maintenance
For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle 1Inspection and Maintenance
in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. emissions control devices and systems may be
(Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in done by any automotive repair establishment or
effect.) individuals using parts that are “certified” to
EPA standards.

■ Types of Inspection and Maintenance According to state and federal regulations, failure to
perform maintenance on the maintenance main
■ Routine inspections
items marked with # will not void your emissions
Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when warranties. However, all maintenance services should
refueling. be performed in accordance with the intervals
2 Maintenance P. 33 indicated by the driver information interface.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 497
■ Periodic inspections
• Check the brake fluid level monthly. If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks
that require more skills and tools, you can purchase a
2 Brake Fluid P. 510
subscription to the Service Express website at
• Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects. www.techinfo.honda.com.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 519 2 Authorized Manuals P. 597
• Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly.
Maintenance

2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 512 If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make
• Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months. sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first.
2 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 516 After performing maintenance, update the records in
the separate maintenance booklet.

490
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 491 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance

Safety When Performing Maintenance

Some of the most important safety precautions are given here. However, we cannot 1Safety When Performing Maintenance
warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in performing maintenance.
Only you can decide whether you should perform a given task. 3 WARNING
Improperly maintaining this vehicle or
■ Maintenance Safety failing to correct a problem before driving
can cause a crash in which you can be
• To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames
seriously hurt or killed.
away from the 12-volt battery, all High Voltage system, and all fuel related parts.
• Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood. Always follow the inspection and
u Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite them, causing a fire. maintenance recommendations according
• To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not to the schedules in this owner’s manual.
gasoline.
• Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the 12-volt
battery or compressed air. 3 WARNING
• Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you. Failure to properly follow maintenance
u Only operate the engine if there is sufficient ventilation. instructions and precautions can cause you
to be seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the procedures and

Maintenance
precautions in this owner’s manual.

Continued 491
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 492 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service

■ Vehicle Safety
• The vehicle must be in a stationary condition.
u Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and
the power system is turned off.
• Be aware that hot parts can burn you.
u Make sure to let the power system including the engine and exhaust system
cool thoroughly before touching vehicle parts.
• Be aware that moving parts can injure you.
u Do not activate the power system unless instructed, and keep your hands and
limbs away from moving parts. When the power mode is on, the engine can
automatically start, or the radiator fan may start operating without the engine
running.
• Do not touch the high-voltage battery and wiring (orange).

Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service

The use of Honda genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and
servicing your vehicle. Honda genuine parts are manufactured according to the
Maintenance

same high quality standards used in Honda vehicles.

492
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 493 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Maintenance MinderTM

If the engine oil life is less than 15%, you will see the Maintenance Minder messages
appear on the driver information interface every time you set the power mode to
ON. The messages notify you when to change the engine oil, or when to bring your
vehicle to a dealer for indicated maintenance services.

Maintenance
493
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 494 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

To Use Maintenance MinderTM

■ Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information 1Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information
Based on the engine operating conditions, the
Maintenance items, which should be serviced at the same time that you replace the
remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed
engine oil, appear on the driver information interface. as a percentage.
You can view them on the engine oil life screen at any time.
Displayed Engine Oil Calculated Engine Oil
1. Set the power mode to ON.
Life (%) Life (%)
2. Press the (home) button.
100 100 to 91
3. Roll the left selector wheel until is displayed. 90 90 to 81
4. Press the left selector wheel to go to the Maintenance screen. The engine oil life 80 80 to 71
appears on the driver information interface along with maintenance items due 70 70 to 61
soon. 60 60 to 51
50 50 to 41
40 40 to 31
30 30 to 21
20 20 to 16
15 15 to 11
10 10 to 6
Engine Oil Life 5 5 to 1
0 0
Maintenance

There is a list of maintenance main and sub items you

can view on the driver information interface.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 497
(home) Button
Left Selector Wheel Main Item Sub Item

494
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 495 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

■ Maintenance Minder Messages on the Driver Information

Interface
Maintenance Message Oil Life Display Explanation Information

When you select the Maintenance

screen, it displays codes for
maintenance items due at the next
— engine oil change, along with the —
percentage of engine oil life
remaining.

Maintenance Due Soon 15 % The engine oil life indicator starts to The engine oil is approaching the end
appear along with other due-soon of its service life.
maintenance item codes when the
remaining oil life drops to 15
percent.

Maintenance
Continued 495
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 496 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

Maintenance Message Oil Life Display Explanation Information

Maintenance Due Now 5% The remaining engine oil life is 5 to 1 The engine oil has almost reached the
percent. Press the (home) end of its service life, and the
button to switch to another display. maintenance items should be inspected
and serviced as soon as possible.

5%

Maintenance Past Due Negative Distance The engine oil has passed its service The engine oil life has passed.
life, and a negative distance appears The maintenance items must be
after driving over 10 miles. The inspected and serviced immediately.
negative distance on the display
blinks.
Maintenance

The system message indicator ( ) comes on along with the Maintenance Minder
message.

496
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 497 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

■ Maintenance Service Items 1Maintenance Service Items

• Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if
they are noisy.
System Message Maintenance Minder Message
Indicator

Main Item Sub Items

CODE Maintenance Main Items CODE Maintenance Sub Items

A ● Replace engine oil*1 1 ● Rotate tires
B ● Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter 2 ● Replace air cleaner element*2
● Inspect front and rear brakes ● Replace dust and pollen filter*3
● Check expiry date for tire repair kit bottle 3 ● Replace transmission fluid*4
● Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots 4 ● Replace spark plugs

Maintenance
● Inspect suspension components ● Inspect valve clearance
● Inspect driveshaft boots 5 ● Replace engine coolant
● Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS/VSA®) 7 ● Replace brake fluid*5
● Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids
● Inspect exhaust system# *3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
● Inspect fuel lines and connections# *4: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds results in higher transmission temperatures.
This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance
*1: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission fluid changed
change the engine oil every year. every 47,500 miles or 3 years (76,000 km or 3 years).
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first column on page 594. *5: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 36 months after the display for item 7 is
reset, change the brake fluid every 3 years.
*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

Continued 497
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 498 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

■ Resetting the Display 1Resetting the Display

NOTICE
Reset the maintenance minder information display if you have performed the
Failure to reset the Maintenance MinderTM display
maintenance service. after a maintenance service results in the system
showing incorrect maintenance intervals, which can
lead to serious mechanical problems.

The dealer will reset the Maintenance MinderTM

display after completing the required maintenance
service. If someone other than a dealer performs
maintenance service, reset the Maintenance
MinderTM display yourself.

You can also reset the Maintenance MinderTM display

using the audio/information screen.
2 Customized Features P. 326
(home) Button
Left Selector Wheel

1. Set the power mode to ON.

2. Press the (home) button.
Maintenance

3. Roll the left selector wheel until is displayed.

4. Press the left selector wheel to go to the Maintenance screen.
5. Press the left selector wheel to enter the reset mode.
6. Roll the left selector wheel to select a maintenance item to reset, or to select All
Due Items (You can also select Cancel to end the process).
7. Press the left selector wheel to reset the selected item.
8. Repeat from step 5 for other items you wish to reset.

498
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 499 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Maintenance Under the Hood

Maintenance Items Under the Hood

12-Volt Battery
(In the Center
Engine Oil Fill Cap Console)

Brake Fluid
(Black Cap)
Engine Oil Dipstick
(Orange)

Washer Fluid
(Blue Cap)
Inverter Coolant
Filler Tank

Radiator Cap Engine Coolant

Maintenance
Reserve Tank

499
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 500 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood

Opening the Hood

Hood Release Handle 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set 1Opening the Hood
the parking brake. NOTICE
2. Pull the hood release handle under the Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are
driver’s side lower corner of the dashboard. raised. The hood will strike the wipers, resulting in
u The hood will pop up slightly. possible damage to the hood and/or the wipers.
Pull
When closing the hood, check that the hood is
securely latched.

If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can

3. Push the hood latch lever (located under open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch
the front edge of the hood to the center) to mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.
the side and raise the hood. Once you have
raised the hood slightly, you can release the
Lever lever.
Maintenance

Support Rod 4. Remove the support rod from the clamp

Grip using the grip. Mount the support rod in
the hood.

When closing, remove the support rod, and

Clamp stow it in the clamp, then gently lower the
hood. Remove your hand at a height of
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and let the
hood close.

500
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 501 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil

Recommended Engine Oil

Use a genuine engine oil or another commercial engine oil of suitable type and 1Recommended Engine Oil
viscosity (for the ambient temperature) as shown in the image that follows. Engine Oil Additives
Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact,
Oil is a major contributor to your engine’s performance and longevity. If you drive they may adversely affect the engine performance
the vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil, the engine may fail or be damaged. and durability.

Genuine Engine Oil Commercial Engine Oil The following seal indicates the oil is energy
conserving and that it meets the American Petroleum
● Honda Genuine Motor Oil ● Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil Institute’s latest requirements.
with an API Certification Seal on the
container.

Ambient Temperature Ambient Temperature

Maintenance
*1:Formulated to improve fuel economy.

■ Synthetic oil
You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal
and is the specified viscosity grade.

501
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 502 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check

Oil Check
We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel. 1Oil Check
Park the vehicle on level ground. If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly
add oil, being careful not to overfill.
Turn off the power system. You can check the oil level without the engine having
run beforehand. If the engine has been running, wait approximately three minutes
before you check the oil.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange).
2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or
paper towel.
3. Insert the dipstick back all the way into its
hole.

4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the

level. It should be between the upper and
lower marks. Add oil if necessary.
Maintenance

Upper Mark
Lower Mark

502
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 503 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil

Adding Engine Oil

1. Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap. 1Adding Engine Oil
2. Add oil slowly. NOTICE
3. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark.
it securely. Overfilling the engine oil may result in leaks and
4. Wait for three minutes and recheck the engine damage.
engine oil dipstick.
If any oil spills, wipe it away immediately. Spilled oil
may damage the engine compartment components.
Engine Oil Fill Cap

Maintenance
503
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 504 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the 1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
engine’s lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly. NOTICE
You may damage the environment if you do not
Turning the power system on automatically starts the engine if the High Voltage dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are
battery charge level gauge shows two segments or less. changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of
2 High Voltage Battery Charge Level Gauge P. 130 the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take
it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away
into a garbage can or onto the ground.
Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the driver
information interface.
Under Cover 1. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature, and then turn the
engine off.
2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil
fill cap.
3. Remove the Phillips-head screws and
slotted head screws by turning 90°
counterclockwise on the undercarriage
Screw
and remove the under cover.
Maintenance

4. Remove the drain bolt and washer from

the bottom of the engine, and drain the
oil into a suitable container.

Washer

Drain Bolt

504
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 505 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

5. Remove the oil filter and dispose of the 1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
remaining oil. You will need a special wrench to replace the oil
Oil Filter
6. Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer.
the engine contact surface.
u If it is stuck, you must detach it. When installing the new oil filter, follow the
instructions supplied with the oil filter.
7. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the
contact surface of the engine block, and Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The
install a new oil filter. low oil pressure indicator should go off within five
u Apply a light coat of new engine oil to seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and check
the filter gasket. your work.
8. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then
reinstall the drain bolt.
u Tightening torque:
30 lbf∙ft (40 N∙m, 4.0 kgf∙m)
9. Pour the recommended engine oil into the
engine.
u Engine oil change capacity (including
filter):

Maintenance
3.5 US qt (3.3 L)
10. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and
start the engine.
11. Run the engine for a few minutes, and
then check that there is no leak from the
drain bolt or oil filter.
12. Stop the engine, wait for three minutes,
and then check the oil level on the
dipstick.
u If necessary, add more engine oil.

505
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 506 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduCooling System

Cooling System
Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 1Cooling System

This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any 3 WARNING
straight antifreeze or water. Removing the radiator cap while the
engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the out, seriously scalding you.
reserve tank first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the
radiator. Add the engine coolant accordingly. Always let the engine and radiator cool
down before removing the radiator cap.
■ Reserve Tank
NOTICE
Reserve Tank MAX 1. Make sure the engine and radiator are
Genuine Honda engine coolant is a 50/50 mixture of
cool. antifreeze and water that can withstand freezing at
2. Check the amount of coolant in the reserve temperatures as low as about -31°F (-35°C). If your
tank. vehicle is consistently subjected to temperatures
u If the coolant level is below the MIN below this, the concentration of antifreeze in the
coolant should be increased. Consult a dealer for
mark, add the specified coolant until it
details.
reaches the MAX mark.
3. Inspect the cooling system for leaks. If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may
Maintenance

MIN use another major brand of non-silicate coolant as a

temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality
coolant recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result
in corrosion, causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed
and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.

Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your

vehicle’s cooling system. They may not be compatible
with the coolant or with the engine components.

506
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 507 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduCooling System

■ Radiator 1Radiator
NOTICE
1. Make sure the engine and radiator are
Radiator Cap Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill
cool. any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can
2. Turn the radiator cap 1/8 turn counter- damage components in the engine compartment.
clockwise and relieve any pressure in the
cooling system.
3. Push down and turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise to remove it.
4. The coolant level should be up to the base
of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.
5. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it
fully.

Maintenance
507
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 508 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduInverter Coolant

Inverter Coolant
Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 1Inverter Coolant

This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any NOTICE
Genuine Honda engine coolant is a 50/50 mixture of
straight antifreeze or water.
antifreeze and water that can withstand freezing at
temperatures as low as about –31°F (–35°C). If your
We recommend you check the inverter coolant level every time you refuel. vehicle is consistently subjected to temperatures
below this, the concentration of antifreeze in the
Have a dealer replace the inverter coolant. coolant should be increased. Consult a dealer for
details.

■ Checking the Coolant If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may

MAX 1. Check the fluid level in the tank. use another major brand of non-silicate coolant as a
Filler Tank
2. If the coolant level has dropped below the temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality
coolant recommended for aluminum engines.
MIN level, have your vehicle serviced at a
Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result
dealer. in corrosion, causing the cooling system to
u Only a properly trained technician can malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed
refill the coolant and check the system and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
for leaks. possible.
Maintenance

MIN Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your

vehicle’s coolant system. They may not be compatible
with the coolant or with the motor components.

508
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 509 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid

Transmission Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda ATF DW-1 1Transmission Fluid
NOTICE
Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary. Do not mix Honda ATF DW-1 with other
transmission fluids.
Do not attempt to check or change the transmission fluid yourself. Using a transmission fluid other than Honda ATF
DW-1 may adversely affect the operation and
durability of your vehicle’s transmission, and damage
the transmission.
Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that
is not equivalent to Honda ATF DW-1 is not covered
by Honda’s new vehicle limited warranty.

Maintenance
509
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 510 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake Fluid

Brake Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 1Brake Fluid
NOTICE
■ Checking the Brake Fluid Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your
vehicle’s braking system and can cause extensive
Brake Reserve Tank The fluid level should be between the MIN damage.
and MAX marks on the side of the reserve
tank. If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should
MAX use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed
container as a temporary replacement.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion

MIN
and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the
brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy
Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.

If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark,

have a dealer inspect the vehicle for leaks or worn
brake pads as soon as possible.
Maintenance

510
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 511 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduRefilling Window Washer Fluid

Refilling Window Washer Fluid

Open the cap and check the amount of window washer fluid. 1Refilling Window Washer Fluid
If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir. NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water
solution in the windshield washer reservoir.
Antifreeze can damage your vehicle’s paint. A
vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield
washer pump.
Use only commercially available windshield washer
fluid.
Avoid prolonged use of hard water to prevent lime
scale build up.

Pour the washer fluid carefully. Do not overflow the reservoir.

Maintenance
511
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 512 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Replacing Light Bulbs

Headlights
Headlights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the 1Headlights
light assembly. The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
heavy items in the trunk, have the aiming readjusted
Fog Lights * at a dealer or by a qualified technician.
Fog lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the
light assembly.

Front Turn Signal, Parking/Daytime Running and

Front Side Marker Lights
Front turn signal, parking/daytime running and front side marker lights are LED type.
Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights *

Door mirror side turn lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect
and replace the light assembly.
Maintenance

512 * Not available on all models

22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 513 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuReplacing Light BulbsuRear Turn Signal Light Bulbs

Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs

When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Rear Turn Signal Light: 21 W (Amber)

Bolts 1. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver or socket to

remove the bolts.
2. Pull the light assembly out of the rear pillar.

Bulb 3. Turn the socket counterclockwise and

Socket remove it.
4. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
5. Slide the light assembly onto the guide on
the body.
6. Align the pins with the body grommets,
then push in until they fully seat.

Maintenance
Brake and Rear Side Marker Lights
Brake and rear side marker Lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer
inspect and replace the light assembly.

513
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 514 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuReplacing Light BulbsuTaillights

Taillights
Taillights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the
light assembly.

Back-Up Light Bulbs 1Back-Up Light Bulbs

When replacing, use the following bulbs. When removing the clip, insert a flat-tip screwdriver,
then lift and remove the clip.
Back-Up Light: 16 W
1. Remove the holding clips using a flat-tip Clip
screwdriver, then pull the lining back.

Holding
Clip

Insert the clip with the pin raised, and push until it is
2. Turn the socket counterclockwise and
flat.
remove it.
Maintenance

3. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.

Push until the

pin is flat.

Bulb Socket

514
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 515 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuReplacing Light BulbsuRear License Plate Light

Rear License Plate Light

Rear license plate light is LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and
replace the light assembly.

High-Mount Brake Light

High-mount brake light is LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and
replace the light assembly.

Maintenance
515
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 516 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades

Checking Wiper Blades
If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks, become noisy, and
the hard surfaces of the blade may scratch the window glass.

Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber 1Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber
NOTICE
1. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF.
Avoid dropping the wiper arm onto the windshield, it
2. While holding the wiper switch in the
may damage the wiper arm and/or the windshield.
MIST position, set the power mode to ON,
then to VEHICLE OFF.
u Both wiper arms are set to the
maintenance position as shown in the
image.

3. Lift both wiper arms.

Maintenance

516
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 517 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Wiper Blade Rubber

4. Press up on and hold the tab, then slide

the holder off the wiper arm.
Wiper Arm

Holder
Tab

5. Pull the end of the wiper blade in the

Wiper
Blade direction of the arrow in the image until it
is out of the holder’s end cap.

End cap at
the bottom

Maintenance
6. Pull the wiper blade in the opposite
Wiper Blade
direction to slide it out of the holder.

Holder

Continued 517
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 518 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Wiper Blade Rubber

7. Insert the flat side of the new wiper blade

onto the bottom part of the holder. Insert
Wiper the blade all the way.
Blade 8. Install the end of the wiper blade into the
cap.
Holder 9. Slide the holder onto the wiper arm until it
locks.
10. Lower both wiper arms.
Cap 11. Set the power mode to ON and hold the
wiper switch in the MIST position until
both wiper arms return to the standard
position.
Maintenance

518
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 519 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Checking and Maintaining Tires

Checking Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in 1Checking Tires
good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.
3 WARNING
■ Inflation guidelines Using tires that are excessively worn or
Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and comfort. improperly inflated can cause a crash in
Refer to the driver’s doorjamb label or specifications page for the specified pressure. which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and Follow all instructions in this owner’s
are more likely to fail from overheating. manual regarding tire inflation and
maintenance.
Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards,
and wear unevenly. Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This
means the vehicle has been parked for at least three
Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If
others, check the pressure with a tire gauge. necessary, add or release air until the specified
pressure is reached.
At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in all
If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as
tires, including the spare *. Even tires in good condition can lose 1–2 psi (10–20 kPa, 4–6 psi (30–40 kPa, 0.3–0.4 kgf/cm2) higher than if
0.1–0.2 kgf/cm2) per month. checked when cold.

Maintenance
■ Inspection guidelines Whenever tire pressure is adjusted, you must
Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems. calibrate the TPMS.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 406
Look for:
• Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts, Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent
splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord. vibration while driving. New tires and any that have
• Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks. been removed and reinstalled should be properly
• Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment. balanced.
• Excessive tread wear.
Models with optional spare tire
2 Wear Indicators P. 524
Check the spare tire pressure once a month or before
• Cracks or other damage around valve stem. long trips.
* Not available on all models 519
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 520 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label

Tire and Loading Information Label

The label attached to the driver’s doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading 1Tire and Loading Information Label
information. The tire and loading information label attached to the
driver’s doorjamb contains:
Label a The number of people your vehicle can carry.
Example b The total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not
exceed this weight.
c The original tire sizes for front, rear, and spare.
d The proper cold tire pressure for front, rear, and
spare.

Tire Labeling
The tires that came on your vehicle have a
Example Tire Size
Tire number of markings. Those you should be
Identification aware of are described as shown.
Number (TIN) 1Tire Sizes
Following is an example of tire size with an
Maintenance

Maximum explanation of what each component means.

Tire Load P235/60 R18 102T
Maximum P: Vehicle type (P indicates passenger vehicle).
Tire Pressure 235: Tire width in millimeters.
Tire Size 60: Aspect ratio (the tire’s section height as a
percentage of its width).
■ Tire Sizes R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial).
18: Rim diameter in inches.
Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size. 102: Load index (a numerical code associated with
the maximum load the tire can carry).
T: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the
maximum speed rating).

520
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 521 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling

■ Tire Identification Number (TIN) 1Tire Identification Number (TIN)

DOT B97R FW6X 2209
The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like
DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all
the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire. requirements of the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
■ Glossary of Tire Terminology B97R: Manufacturer’s identification mark.
FW6X: Tire type code.
Cold Tire Pressure – The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at 22 09: Date of manufacture.
least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Load Rating – Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given Year
Week
inflation pressure.
Maximum Inflation Pressure – The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can
hold.
Maximum Load Rating – Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum
permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Recommended Inflation Pressure – The cold tire inflation pressure recommended
by the manufacturer.
Treadwear Indicators (TWI) – Means the projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.

Maintenance
521
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 522 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety
Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction,
and temperature performance according to Department of
Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these
gradings.

■ Uniform Tire Quality Grading 1Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall For example:
between tread shoulder and maximum section width. Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
■ Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear All passenger car tires must conform
rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a to Federal Safety Requirements in
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 addition to these grades.
would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
Maintenance

and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in

driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.

522
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 523 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

■ Traction 1Traction
Warning: The traction grade
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.
assigned to this tire is based on
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
as measured under controlled conditions on specified
and does not include acceleration,
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
C may have poor traction performance.
traction characteristics.
■ Temperature
1Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its Warning: The temperature grade for
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions this tire is established for a tire that is
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high properly inflated and not
temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and overloaded. Excessive speed,
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire underinflation, or excessive loading,
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which either separately or in combination,
all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.

Maintenance
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.

523
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 524 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWear Indicators

Wear Indicators
The groove where the wear indicator is
Example of a Wear located is about 1/16 inch (about 1.6 mm)
Indicator mark shallower than elsewhere on the tire. If the
tread has worn so that the indicator is
exposed, replace the tire. Worn out tires
have poor traction on wet roads.

Tire Service Life

The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road
conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).

In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is

recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five
years old. All tires, including the spare *, should be removed from service after 10
Maintenance

years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.

524 * Not available on all models

22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 525 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement

Tire and Wheel Replacement

Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and 1Tire and Wheel Replacement
maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire’s sidewall). Using tires of a
different size or construction can cause certain vehicle systems such as the ABS and 3 WARNING
Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system to work incorrectly. Installing improper tires on your vehicle can
affect handling and stability. This can cause
It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isn’t possible, replace the a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or
front or rear tires in pairs. killed.

Make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels. Always use the size and type of tires
recommended in this owner’s manual.

Maintenance
525
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 526 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation

Tire Rotation
Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the driver information 1Tire Rotation
interface helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life. Tires with directional tread patterns should only be
rotated front to back (not from one side to the other).
■ Tires without rotation marks Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation
Rotate the tires as shown here. indication mark facing forward, as shown below.

Front Front

Direction Mark

■ Tires with rotation marks

Whenever tires are rotated, you must calibrate the
Rotate the tires as shown here.
TPMS.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 406

Front
Maintenance

526
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 527 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires

Winter Tires
If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked M+S tires, snow tires, or tire 1Winter Tires
chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles when driving.
3 WARNING
Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent Using the wrong chains, or not properly
skidding. installing chains, can damage the brake
lines and cause a crash in which you can be
Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the law. seriously injured or killed.

When mounting, refer to the following points. Follow all instructions in this owner’s
manual regarding the selection and use of
For winter tires: tire chains.
• Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires.
• Mount the tires to all four wheels.
NOTICE
For tire chains: Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly
• Install them on the front tires only. installed can damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
• Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are
chains listed below: hitting any part of the vehicle.
Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1032
When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain

Maintenance
• Follow the chain manufacturer’s instruction when installing. Mount them as manufacturer’s instructions regarding vehicle
tightly as you can. operational limits.
• Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension.
• Drive slowly. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
aware that these tires are not designed for winter
driving conditions. For more information, contact a
dealer.

527
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 528 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

12-Volt Battery
Checking the 12-Volt Battery
The condition of the battery is monitored by a sensor located on the negative 112-Volt Battery
terminal of the battery. If there is a problem with this sensor, the driver information
interface will display a warning message. If this happens, have your vehicle inspected 3 WARNING
by a dealer. The battery gives off explosive hydrogen
gas during normal operation.
If your vehicle’s battery is disconnected or goes dead:
• The audio system is disabled. A spark or flame can cause the battery to
2 Reactivating the audio system P. 226 explode with enough force to kill or
• The clock resets. seriously hurt you.
2 Clock P. 156
When conducting any battery
maintenance, wear protective clothing and
a face shield, or have a skilled technician do
it.

WARNING: Battery post, terminals,

and related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds.
Maintenance

Wash your hands after handling.

528
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 529 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uu12-Volt BatteryuCharging the AGM Battery

Charging the AGM Battery

AGM labeled batteries like those installed in your vehicle require a compatible 112-Volt Battery
charger to be properly charged. Damage to the battery can result if the battery is
charged improperly or with the wrong equipment. For more information on how to 3 WARNING
charge your vehicle’s AGM battery, consult a dealer. • Use of a battery not designed for this
vehicle could cause a hydrogen gas leak
inside the vehicle, resulting in a fire or
explosion that may cause injury or death.
• Only install a 12V AGM battery designed
for use in this vehicle.
• Contact your Honda dealer for more
information.

The vehicle stability assistTM (VSA®) system, vehicle

stability assistTM (VSA®) OFF, adaptive cruise control
(ACC) with low speed follow, safety support and low
tire pressure/TPMS indicators may come on in amber
along with a message in the driver information
interface when you set the power mode to ON after
re-connecting a battery.

Maintenance
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20
km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.

529
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 530 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Remote Transmitter Care

Replacing the Remote Battery
If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery. 1Replacing the Remote Battery
Battery type: CR2032
3 WARNING
1. Remove the built-in key. CHEMICAL BURN HAZARD
The battery that powers the remote
transmitter can cause severe internal burns
and can even lead to death if swallowed.
Keep new and used batteries away from
children.
If you suspect that a child has swallowed
2. Remove the upper half of the cover by the battery, seek medical attention
carefully prying on the edge with a coin. immediately.
u Wrap a coin with a cloth to prevent
Battery scratching the keyless remote.
NOTICE
u Remove carefully to avoid losing the
An improperly disposed of battery can damage the
buttons. environment. Always confirm local regulations for
3. Make sure to replace the battery with the battery disposal.
correct polarity.
Maintenance

Replacement batteries are commercially available or

at a dealer.

530
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 531 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Climate Control System Maintenance

Air Conditioning
To ensure proper and safe operation, the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE 1Air Conditioning
J2845) recommends that the refrigerant system only be serviced by trained and NOTICE
certified technicians. Vented refrigerant is harmful to the environment.
To avoid refrigerant from venting, never replace the
Never repair or replace the air conditioning evaporator (cooling coil) with one evaporator with one removed from a used or
removed from a used or salvaged vehicle. salvaged vehicle.

Refrigerant in your vehicle’s air conditioning system is

New replacement mobile air conditioning evaporators must be certified (and
flammable and can be ignited during servicing if
labeled) as meeting SAE Standard J2842. proper procedures are not followed.

The air conditioner label is found under the hood:

2 Safety Labels P. 80
2 Specifications P. 588

Dust and Pollen Filter 1Dust and Pollen Filter

The climate control system is equipped with a dust and pollen filter that collects If the airflow from the climate control system
deteriorates noticeably, and the windows fog up
pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The Maintenance MinderTM messages will let
easily, the filter may need to be replaced. Please
you know when to replace the filter. contact a dealer for replacement.

Maintenance
We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your
vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust.

531
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 532 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Cleaning
Interior Care
Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt. 1Interior Care
Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue. Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle. Electrical
devices and systems may malfunction if liquids are
■ Cleaning Seat Belts splashed on them.

Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts. Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices
Let the belts air dry. Wipe the loops of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth. such as audio devices and switches. Doing so may
cause the items to malfunction or cause a fire inside
the vehicle.
Loop If a silicone based spray is inadvertently used on
electrical devices, consult a dealer.

Depending on their composition, chemicals and

liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles,
and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles.
Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as
benzene or gasoline.

After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them

away using a dry cloth.
Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts
Maintenance

or textiles for long periods of time without washing.

■ Cleaning the Window 1Cleaning the Window

Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window.
Wipe using a glass cleaner. Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a
soft cloth so as not to damage them.

Be careful not to spill fluids, such as water or glass

cleaner, on or around the cover of both the front
sensor camera and the rainfall/light sensor *.

532 * Not available on all models

22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 533 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuCleaninguInterior Care

■ Floor Mats 1Floor Mats

If you use any floor mats that were not originally
The driver’s floor mat hooks over floor provided with your vehicle, make sure they are
anchors, which keep them from sliding designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and
Unlock forward. To remove a mat for cleaning, turn are securely anchored by the floor anchors.
the anchor knobs to the unlock position. Position the rear seat floor mats properly. If not
When reinstalling the mat after cleaning, turn properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere with
the front seat functions.
Lock the knobs to the lock position.

Do not put additional floor mats on top of

the anchored mat.

■ Maintaining Genuine Leather * 1Maintaining Genuine Leather *

It is important to clean or wipe away dirt or dust as
To properly clean leather:
soon as possible. Spills can soak into leather resulting
1. Use a vacuum or soft dry cloth first to remove any dirt or dust. in stains. Dirt or dust can cause abrasions in the
2. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a solution comprised of 90% leather. In addition, please note that some dark
water and 10% neutral soap. colored clothing can rub onto the leather seats
3. Wipe away any soap residue with a clean damp cloth. resulting in discoloration or stains.

Maintenance
4. Wipe away residual water and allow leather to air dry in the shade.

* Not available on all models 533

 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 534 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuCleaninguExterior Care

Exterior Care
Dust off the vehicle body after you drive. Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches 1Washing the Vehicle
on painted surfaces. A scratch on a painted surface can result in body rust. If you Do not spray water into the air intake vents. It can
find a scratch, promptly repair it. cause a malfunction.

■ Washing the Vehicle

Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following
conditions:
• If driving on roads with road salt.
• If driving in coastal areas.
• If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces.
Air Intake Vents
■ Using an Automated Car Wash
If you need to lift the wiper arms away from the
• Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the automated car wash. windshield, first set the wiper arms to the
• Fold in the door mirrors. maintenance position.
• For models equipped with automatic intermittent wipers, turn the wipers off. 2 Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber P. 516

■ Using High Pressure Cleaners 1Using an Automated Car Wash

Maintenance

When using an automated car wash that pulls the

• Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body. vehicle through with a conveyor, make sure vehicle is
• Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to in car wash mode.
enter the vehicle interior. 2 If you want to keep the transmission in (N
• Do not spray high pressure water directly into the engine compartment. Instead, position [car wash mode] P. 395
use low pressure water and a mild detergent.

534
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 535 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuCleaninguExterior Care

■ Applying Wax 1Applying Wax

NOTICE
A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicle’s paint from the
Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage
elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicle’s paint to the the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe
elements, so reapply as necessary. away spills immediately.

■ Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts 1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when
If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they you want to repair the painted surface of the parts
may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and made of resin.
clean water.

■ Cleaning the Window

Wipe using a glass cleaner.

■ Maintaining Aluminum Wheels

Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road

Maintenance
contaminants. When necessary, as early as possible use a sponge and mild detergent
to wipe away these contaminants. Do not use a stiff brush or harsh chemicals
(including some commercial wheel cleaners). These can damage the protective finish
on aluminum alloy wheels, resulting in corrosion. Depending on the type of finish,
the wheels also may lose their luster or appear burnished. To avoid water stains,
wipe the wheels dry with a cloth while they are still wet.

Continued 535
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 536 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuCleaninguExterior Care

■ Fogged Exterior Light Lenses

The inside lenses of exterior lights (headlights, brake lights, etc.) may fog temporarily
if you have driven in the rain, or after the vehicle has been run through a car wash.
Dew condensation also may build up inside the lenses when there is a significant
enough difference between the ambient and inside lens temperatures (similar to
vehicle windows fogging up in rainy conditions). These conditions are natural
processes, not structural design problems in the exterior lights.
Lens design characteristics may result in moisture developing on the light lens frame
surfaces. This also is not a malfunction.
However, if you see large amounts of water accumulation, or large water drops
building up inside the lenses, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

■ Painting the Vehicle 1Painting the Vehicle

Refer to the temperature notice label affixed to the driver’s doorjamb before
painting the vehicle.
Maintenance

536
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 537 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Accessories and Modifications

Accessories
When installing accessories, check the following: 1Accessories and Modifications
• Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and
delay your reaction to driving conditions. 3 WARNING
• Do not install any accessories over areas marked SRS Airbag, on the sides or backs Improper accessories or modifications can
of the front seats, on front or side pillars, or near the side windows. affect your vehicle’s handling, stability, and
Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the performance, and cause a crash in which
vehicle’s airbags or may be propelled into you or another occupant if the airbags you can be seriously hurt or killed.
deploy.
• Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with Follow all instructions in this owner’s
proper operation of your vehicle. manual regarding accessories and
2 Fuses P. 577 modifications.
• Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for
assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation.
3 WARNING
Use of improperly designed, engineered or
manufactured high-voltage battery
assemblies could cause a fire in your
vehicle.

Maintenance
A vehicle fire could result in a crash or
injury.

Only use a genuine Honda high-voltage

battery assembly, or its equivalent, in your
vehicle.

Honda Genuine accessories are recommended to

ensure proper operation on your vehicle.

537
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 538 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuAccessories and ModificationsuModifications

Modifications
Do not modify your vehicle in a manner that may affect its handling, stability, or
reliability, or install non-genuine Honda parts or accessories that may have a similar
effect.

Even minor modifications to vehicle systems can affect overall vehicle performance.
Always make sure all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and do not
make any modification to your vehicle or its systems that might cause your vehicle
to no longer meet federal, state, province, territory, and local regulations.

The on-board diagnostic port (OBD-II/SAE J1962 connector) installed on this vehicle
is intended to be used with automobile system diagnostic devices or with other
devices that Honda has approved. Use of any other type of device may adversely
affect the vehicle’s electronic systems or allow them to be compromised, possibly
resulting in a system malfunction, drained battery, or other unexpected problems.

Do not modify or attempt to repair your vehicle's high-voltage hybrid power system
or otherwise modify vehicle electrical systems. Disassembling or modifying electrical
equipment can result in a crash or a fire.
Maintenance

If you ever need to replace your vehicle’s high-voltage battery assembly outside of
warranty coverage, we highly recommend that you only use a genuine Honda high-
voltage battery assembly. Genuine Honda high-voltage battery assemblies are
designed to work with your vehicle’s hybrid power system and have been designed,
engineered and manufactured to avoid overcharging situations. Non-genuine high-
voltage battery assemblies may not have been similarly designed, engineered and
manufactured, and installation of such assemblies could result in overcharging, fires,
loss of power, or other conditions that may increase the likelihood of a crash or
injury.

538
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 539 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Handling the Unexpected

This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles.

Tools Overheating If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System

Types of Tools .................................. 540 How to Handle Overheating............. 567 Indicator Comes On......................... 574
If a Tire Goes Flat Indicator, Coming On/Blinking If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator
Models with optional spare tire If the Low Oil Pressure Warning Appears ...569 Comes On or Blinks ....................... 575
Changing a Flat Tire ......................... 541 If the 12-Volt Battery Charging System If the Transmission System Indicator Blinks
Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire....... 547 Indicator Comes On ....................... 570 along with the Warning Message...... 576
Power System Won’t Start If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes Fuses
Checking the Procedure ................... 561 On or Blinks..................................... 571 Fuse Locations ................................. 577
If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak ...562 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes Inspecting and Changing Fuses........ 582
Emergency Power System Off........... 563 On or Blinks..................................... 572 Emergency Towing........................... 583
If the 12-Volt Battery Is Dead .......... 564 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On If You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door.. 584
Jump Starting Procedure .................. 564 or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake If You Cannot Open the Trunk ........ 585
System Indicator (Amber) Comes On .....573

539
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 540 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Tools
Types of Tools
1Types of Tools
The tools are stored in the trunk.

Box Wrench

Wrench Shaft
Handling the Unexpected

Tool Case

Models with optional spare tire

Wheel Nut Wrench/

Jack Handle

Box Wrench

Jack
Wrench Shaft

Jack Handle Bar

Tool Case

540
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 541 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

If a Tire Goes Flat

Models with optional spare tire

Changing a Flat Tire 1Changing a Flat Tire

If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually Follow compact spare precautions:
to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place. Replace the flat tire with a compact Periodically check the tire pressure of the compact
spare tire. Go to a dealer as soon as possible to have the full-size tire repaired or spare. It should be set to the specified pressure.
replaced. Specified Pressure: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)

When driving with the compact spare tire, keep the

1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, non-slippery surface and apply the parking brake. vehicle speed under 50 mph (80 km/h). Replace with
2. Put the transmission into (P . a full-size tire as soon as possible.
3. Turn on the hazard warning lights and set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF.
The compact spare tire and wheel in your vehicle are
specifically for this model. Do not use them with

Handling the Unexpected

another vehicle. Do not use another type of compact
spare tire or wheel with your vehicle.

Do not mount tire chains on a compact spare tire.

If a chain-mounted front tire goes flat, remove one of
the full-size rear tires and replace it with the compact
spare tire. Remove the flat front tire and replace it
with the full-size tire that was removed from the rear.
Mount the tire chains on the front tire.

NOTICE
Do not use the jack if it doesn’t work properly.
Call your dealer or a professional towing service.

Continued 541
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 542 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

■ Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire

1. Open the trunk floor lid.
Handling the Unexpected

Tool Case 2. Take the tool case out of the trunk.

3. Take the jack, wheel nut wrench and jack
handle bar out of the tool case.
4. Unscrew the wing bolt, and remove the
spacer cone. Then, remove the spare tire.

Spare Tire

5. Place a wheel block or rock in front and rear

of the wheel diagonal to the flat tire.

Wheel
Blocks
The tire to be replaced.

542
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 543 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

6. Place the compact spare tire (wheel side up)

under the vehicle body, near the tire that
needs to be replaced.

7. Loosen each wheel nut about one turn

using the wheel nut wrench.

Handling the Unexpected

Continued 543
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 544 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

■ How to Set Up the Jack 1How to Set Up the Jack

1. Place the jack under the jacking point 3 WARNING

closest to the tire to be changed.
The vehicle can easily roll off the jack,
seriously injuring anyone underneath.

Follow the directions for changing a tire

exactly, and never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the jack.

Jacking Points Do not use the jack with people or luggage in the
Handling the Unexpected

2. Turn the end bracket clockwise as shown in vehicle.

the image until the top of the jack contacts
the jacking point. Use the jack provided in your vehicle.
Other jacks may not support the weight (“load”) or
u Make sure that the jacking point tab is
may not fit the jacking point.
resting in the jack notch.
The following instructions must be followed to use
the jack safely:
• Do not use while the power system is on.
Jacking Point • Use only where the ground is firm and level.
3. Raise the vehicle, using the jack handle bar • Use only at the jacking points.
• Do not get in the vehicle while using the jack.
and the jack handle, until the tire is off the
• Do not put anything on top of or underneath the
ground. jack.

Jack
Handle Wheel Nut
Bar Wrench as Jack Handle

544
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 545 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

■ Replacing the Flat Tire 1Replacing the Flat Tire

Do not over tighten the wheel nuts by applying extra
1. Remove the wheel nuts and flat tire. torque using your foot or a pipe.

Handling the Unexpected

2. Wipe the mounting surfaces of the wheel
with a clean cloth.
3. Mount the compact spare tire.
4. Screw the wheel nuts until they touch the
lips around the mounting holes, then stop
rotating.

5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack.

Tighten the wheel nuts in the order
indicated in the image. Go around,
tightening the nuts, two to three times in
this order.
Wheel nut torque:
80 lbf∙ft (108 N∙m, 11 kgf∙m)

Continued 545
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 546 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

■ Storing the Flat Tire 1Storing the Flat Tire

1. Remove the center cap. 3 WARNING

Loose items can be thrown out of the
vehicle in a crash and could seriously injure
the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely

before driving.
Center Cap
Handling the Unexpected

Spacer Cone 2. Place the flat tire face down in the spare tire
Wing Bolt well.
3. Remove the spacer cone from the wing
bolt, flip it over, and insert it back on the
bolt. Secure the flat tire with the wing bolt.
4. Securely put the jack and wheel nut wrench
For For back in the tool case. Store the case in the
compact full-size trunk.
spare tire tire

■ TPMS and the Compact Spare Tire

If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator
comes on while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), Tire
Pressure Monitor System Problem. Check Tire Pressure. See Your Dealer. will
appear on the driver information interface and the indicator will start blinking for a
short time and then stay on; however, this is normal and is no cause for concern.

Calibrate the TPMS when you replace the tire with a specified regular tire.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 406
546
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 547 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

If the tire has a large cut or is otherwise severely damaged, you will need to have the 1Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
vehicle towed. If the tire only has a small puncture, from a nail for instance, you can The kit should not be used in the following situations.
use the temporary tire repair kit so that you can drive to the nearest service station Instead, contact a dealer or roadside assistance to
for a more permanent repair. have the vehicle towed.
• The tire sealant has expired.
If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually • More than one tire is punctured.
• The puncture or cut is larger than 3/16 inch (4 mm).
to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place.
• The tire side wall is damaged or the puncture is
outside the contact area.
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level, and non-slippery surface, and apply the parking
brake.
When the puncture is: Use Kit
2. Put the transmission into (P .

Handling the Unexpected

3. Turn on the hazard warning lights and set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF Smaller than 3/16 inch
(LOCK). Yes
(4 mm)
Contact
Area Larger than 3/16 inch
No
(4 mm)

• Damage has been caused by driving with the tires

extremely under inflated.
• The tire bead is no longer seated.
• The rim is damaged.

Do not remove a nail or screw that punctured the

tire. If you remove it from the tire, you may not be
able to repair the puncture using the kit.

Continued 547
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 548 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

■ Getting Ready to Temporarily Repair the Flat Tire 1Getting Ready to Temporarily Repair the Flat Tire
Repair notification label and speed restriction label
are applied to the side of the temporary tire repair kit.

Power Plug
When making a temporary repair, carefully read the
Instruction Manual instruction manual provided with the kit.

Air Only Side Sealant/Air Hose

Selector Knob Sealant/Air Side
Pressure Gauge Inflator Switch
Handling the Unexpected

Pressure Relief Button

Repair Notification Label Speed Restriction Label

548
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 549 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

1. Open the trunk floor lid.

2. Take the kit out of the case.
3. Place the kit face up, on flat ground near
the flat tire, and away from traffic. Do not
place the kit on its side.

Tire Repair Kit

Handling the Unexpected

Continued 549
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 550 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

■ Injecting Sealant and Air 1Injecting Sealant and Air

Valve Cap 1. Remove the valve cap from the tire valve 3 CAUTION
stem.
Tire sealant contains substances that are
harmful if inhaled, ingested or if contact is
made with the eyes or skin.

Always use in a well-ventilated area and

use gloves and safety glasses for protection;
do not ingest.
Valve Stem
For skin or eye contact, flush with cool
Handling the Unexpected

Sealant/Air Hose 2. Remove the sealant/air hose from the

packaging. water; if ingested, rinse mouth with water.
In all cases, seek medical attention if
necessary.

In cold temperatures, the sealant may not flow easily.

In this situation, warm it up for five minutes before
using.

The sealant can permanently stain clothing and other

Sealant/Air Hose 3. Attach the sealant/air hose onto the tire
materials. Be careful during handling and wipe away
valve stem. Screw it until it is tight. any spills immediately.

Valve Stem

550
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 551 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

4. Plug in the compressor to the accessory 1Injecting Sealant and Air

power socket.
u Be careful not to pinch the cord in a 3 WARNING
door or window. Running the engine with the vehicle in an
5. Turn the power system on. enclosed or even partly enclosed area can
u Keep the power system on while cause a rapid build-up of toxic carbon
injecting sealant and air. monoxide.
2 Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 79
Breathing this colorless, odorless gas can
6. Turn the selector knob to REPAIR. cause unconsciousness and even death.
Only run the engine to power the air

Handling the Unexpected

compressor with the vehicle outdoors.

NOTICE
Do not operate the temporary tire repair kit
compressor for more than 15 minutes. The
REPAIR compressor can overheat and become permanently
damaged.

Until the sealant injection is complete, the pressure

shown on the pressure gauge will appear higher than
actual. After the sealant injection is complete the
pressure will drop and then begin to rise again as the
tire is inflated with air. This is normal. To accurately
measure the air pressure using the gauge, turn the air
compressor off only after the sealant injection is
complete.

Continued 551
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 552 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

Pressure Gauge 7. Press the inflator switch to turn on the kit. 1Injecting Sealant and Air
u The compressor starts injecting sealant If the required air pressure is not reached within 10
and air into the tire. minutes, the tire may be too severely damaged for
u When the sealant injection is complete the kit to provide the necessary seal, and your vehicle
continue to add air. will need to be towed.
ON
8. Models with 215/55R16 93V tires See a Honda dealer for a replacement sealant bottle
After the air pressure reaches front: 35 psi and proper disposal of an empty bottle.
OFF (240 kPa)/rear: 33 psi (230 kPa), turn off
the kit.
Models with 215/50R17 91H tires
After the air pressure reaches front: 35 psi
Handling the Unexpected

(240 kPa)/rear: 32 psi (220 kPa), turn off

the kit.
u To check the pressure, occasionally turn
off the compressor and read the gauge.
Sealant/Air Hose 9. Unplug the power plug from the accessory
power socket.
10. Unscrew the sealant/air hose from the tire
valve stem. Reinstall the valve cap.

Valve Stem

552
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 553 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

11. Press the pressure relief button until the

gauge returns 0 psi (0 kPa).

Pressure Relief Button

Repair Notification Label

12. Apply the repair notification label to the
flat surface of the wheel.

Handling the Unexpected

u The wheel surface must be clean to
ensure the label adheres properly.

Continued 553
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 554 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

■ Distributing the Sealant in the Tire

1. Apply the speed restriction label to the
location as shown.
2. Drive the vehicle for about 10 minutes.
u Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
3. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.

Speed Restriction
Label
Handling the Unexpected

4. Recheck the air pressure using the sealant/

air hose on the compressor.

Sealant/Air Hose

554
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 555 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

5. Turn the selector knob to AIR.

u Do not turn the air compressor on to
AIR check the pressure.
2 Inflating an Under-inflated Tire P. 558
6. If the air pressure is
• Less than 25 psi (175 kPa):
Do not add air or continue driving. The leak
is too severe. Call for help and have your
vehicle towed.
2 Emergency Towing P. 583
Models with 215/55R16 93V tires

Handling the Unexpected

• Front: 35 psi (240 kPa)/rear: 33 psi (230
kPa) or more:
Models with 215/50R17 91H tires
• Front: 35 psi (240 kPa)/rear: 32 psi (220
kPa) or more:
Continue driving for another 10 minutes or
until you reach the nearest service station,
whichever is sooner.
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). If you
have not reached a service station, stop and
check the tire pressure.
If the air pressure does not go down after
the 10 minute driving, you do not need to
check the pressure any more.

Continued 555
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 556 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

Models with 215/55R16 93V tires 1Distributing the Sealant in the Tire
• Greater than 25 psi (175 kPa), but less
than front: 35 psi (240 kPa)/rear: 33 psi 3 WARNING
(230 kPa): Running the engine with the vehicle in an
Turn the air compressor on to inflate the enclosed or even partly enclosed area can
tire until the tire pressure reaches front: cause a rapid build-up of toxic carbon
35 psi (240 kPa)/rear: 33 psi (230 kPa): monoxide.
Models with 215/50R17 91H tires
Breathing this colorless, odorless gas can
• Greater than 25 psi (175 kPa), but less
cause unconsciousness and even death.
than front: 35 psi (240 kPa)/rear: 32 psi
Only run the engine to power the air
(220 kPa):
Handling the Unexpected

compressor with the vehicle outdoors.

Turn the air compressor on to inflate the
tire until the tire pressure reaches front:
35 psi (240 kPa)/rear: 32 psi (220 kPa).
2 Inflating an Under-inflated Tire
P. 558
Then, drive carefully for 10 more minutes or
until you reach the nearest service station,
whichever is sooner.
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). If you
have not reached a service station, stop and
check the tire pressure.
u You should repeat this procedure as long
as the air pressure is within this range.
7. Unscrew the sealant/air hose from the tire
valve stem.
Reinstall the valve cap.

556
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 557 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

8. Press the pressure relief button until the

gauge returns to 0 psi (0 kPa).
9. Repackage and properly stow the kit.

Pressure Relief Button

Handling the Unexpected

Continued 557
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 558 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

■ Inflating an Under-inflated Tire 1Inflating an Under-inflated Tire

You can use the kit to inflate a non-punctured, under-inflated tire. 3 WARNING
Sealant/Air Hose 1. Open the trunk floor lid.
Running the engine with the vehicle in an
2 Getting Ready to Temporarily Repair
enclosed or even partly enclosed area can
the Flat Tire P. 548
cause a rapid build-up of toxic carbon
2. Remove the kit from the case.
monoxide.
3. Place the kit, face up, on flat ground near
the flat tire, away from traffic. Do not Breathing this colorless, odorless gas can
place the kit on its side. cause unconsciousness and even death.
4. Remove the sealant/air hose from the kit. Only run the engine to power the air
Handling the Unexpected

compressor with the vehicle outdoors.

5. Remove the valve cap.

NOTICE
Do not operate the temporary tire repair kit
compressor for more than 15 minutes. The
compressor can overheat and become permanently
damaged.

Valve Cap
Sealant/Air Hose 6. Attach the sealant/air hose onto the tire
valve stem. Screw it until it is tight.

Valve Stem

558
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 559 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

7. Plug in the kit to the accessory power

socket.
u Be careful not to pinch the cord in a
door or window.
8. Turn the power system on.
u Keep the power system on while
injecting air.
2 Emergency Towing P. 583

9. Turn the selector knob to AIR.

10. Press the inflator switch to turn on the kit.

Handling the Unexpected

AIR
u The compressor starts to inject air into
the tire.
11. Inflate the tire to the specified air pressure.

Continued 559
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 560 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

12. Turn off the kit.

u Check the pressure gauge on the air
compressor.
u If overinflated, press the pressure relief
button.
13. Unplug the kit from the accessory power
socket.
14. Unscrew the sealant/air hose from the tire
Pressure Relief Button valve stem. Reinstall the valve cap.
15. Press the pressure relief button until the
gauge returns to 0 psi (0 kPa).
Handling the Unexpected

16. Repackage and properly stow the kit.

560
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 561 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Power System Won’t Start

Checking the Procedure
When the READY indicator does not come on and the Ready To Drive message 1Checking the Procedure
does not appear on the driver information interface, check the following items and If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an
take appropriate action. assisting vehicle or booster battery to jump start it.
2 If the 12-Volt Battery Is Dead P. 564

Checklist Condition What to Do

Check if the related The Temperature Is Too Cold For Vehicle To Operate message 2 Driver Information Interface Warning
indicator or driver appears. and Information Messages P. 113
information interface The To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message appears.
2 If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak
messages come on. uMake sure the keyless remote is in its operating range. P. 562
2 POWER Button Operating Range P. 181

Handling the Unexpected

The POWER SYSTEM indicator comes on. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
The transmission system indicator blinks and Transmission 2 If the Transmission System Indicator
System Problem. Apply Parking Brake When Parked. See Blinks along with the Warning Message
Your Dealer. message appears. P. 576
Check the brightness The interior lights are dim or do not come on at all. Have the 12-volt battery checked by a
of the interior lights. dealer.
The interior lights come on normally. Check all fuses, or have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.
2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 582
Check the The transmission is not in (P . Put the transmission into (P .
transmission.
Check the When the immobilizer system indicator is blinking, the power
immobilizer system system cannot be turned on. 2 Immobilizer System Indicator P. 96
indicator.

561
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 562 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuPower System Won’t StartuIf the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak

If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak

If the beeper sounds, the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message
appears on the driver information interface, and the POWER button flashes, the
READY indicator does not come on. Turn on the power system as follows:
1. Touch the center of the POWER button
with the H logo on the keyless remote while
the POWER button is flashing. The buttons
on the keyless remote should be facing you.
u The POWER button flashes for about 30
seconds.
Handling the Unexpected

2. Depress the brake pedal and press the

POWER button within 10 seconds after the
beeper sounds and the POWER button
changes from flashing to on.
u The READY indicator comes on.
u If you don’t depress the pedal, the mode
will change to ACCESSORY.

562
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 563 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuPower System Won’t StartuEmergency Power System Off

Emergency Power System Off

The POWER button may be used to turn the power system off due to an emergency 1Emergency Power System Off
situation even while driving. If you must turn the power system off, do either of the Do not press the POWER button while driving unless
following operations: it is absolutely necessary for the power system to be
• Press and hold the POWER button about for two seconds. turned off.
• Firmly press the POWER button three times. If you press the POWER button while driving, the
beeper sounds.

The steering wheel will not lock. However, because turning off the power system
disables the power assist the power system provides to the steering and braking
systems, it will require significantly more physical effort and time to steer and slow
the vehicle. Use both feet on the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle and stop
immediately in a safe place.

Handling the Unexpected

The transmission automatically changes to (P after the vehicle comes to a complete
stop. Then, the power mode changes to VEHICLE OFF.

563
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 564 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

If the 12-Volt Battery Is Dead

Jump Starting Procedure
Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the power 1If the 12-Volt Battery Is Dead
system, then open the hood.
1. Push the tabs to open the jump start box 3 WARNING
cover. A 12-volt battery can explode if you do not
follow the correct procedure, seriously
Tab injuring anyone nearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking

materials away from the 12-volt battery.

Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they

Handling the Unexpected

2. Connect the first jumper cable to your do not come off when the engine vibrates. Be careful
vehicle’s jump start box + terminal as not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the cable
ends to touch each other while attaching or
shown. Do not connect this jumper cable to
detaching the jumper cables.
any other part.
3. Connect the other end of the first jumper You cannot use the terminal to jump start another
cable to the booster battery + terminal. vehicle or to charge the 12-volt battery.
u Use a 12-volt booster battery only.
u When using an automotive battery
charger to boost your 12-volt battery,
Booster select a lower charging voltage than
Battery 15-volt. Check the charger manual for
Jump Start Box + Terminal the proper setting.
4. Connect the second jumper cable to the
booster battery - terminal.

564
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 565 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIf the 12-Volt Battery Is DeaduJump Starting Procedure

Engine Mounting Bolt 5. Connect the other end of the second 1If the 12-Volt Battery Is Dead
jumper cable to the engine mounting bolt 12-volt battery performance degrades in cold
as shown. Do not connect this jumper cable conditions and may prevent the engine from starting.
to any other part.
6. If your vehicle is connected to another
vehicle, start the assisting vehicle’s engine
and increase its rpm slightly.
7. Attempt to start your vehicle’s engine. If it
turns over slowly, check that the jumper
cables have good metal-to-metal contact.

Handling the Unexpected

Continued 565
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 566 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIf the 12-Volt Battery Is DeaduJump Starting Procedure

■ What to Do After the Engine Starts 1What to Do After the Engine Starts
The vehicle stability assistTM (VSA®) system, vehicles
Once your vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following stability assistTM (VSA®) OFF, adaptive cruise control
order. (ACC) with low speed follow, safety support and low
tire pressure/TPMS indicators may come on in amber
1. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle’s ground. along with a message in the driver information
2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery - interface when you set the power mode to ON after
re-connecting a battery.
terminal.
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).
3. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle’s jump start box + terminal.
Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your
4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery + vehicle checked by a dealer.
terminal.
Handling the Unexpected

Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer.

566
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 567 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Overheating
How to Handle Overheating
Overheating symptoms are as follows: 1How to Handle Overheating
• Engine Temperature Too Hot. Do Not Drive. Allow Engine To Cool.
message appears on the driver information interface. 3 WARNING
• Steam or spray comes out of the engine compartment. Steam and spray from an overheated
engine can seriously scald you.
■ First thing to do
1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place. Do not open the hood if steam is coming
2. Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights. out.
u No steam or spray present: Keep the power system on and open the hood.
u Steam or spray is present: Turn off the power system and wait until it
subsides. Then, open the hood.

Handling the Unexpected

Continued 567
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 568 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating

■ Next thing to do 1How to Handle Overheating

Reserve Tank MAX 1. Check that the cooling fan is operating and
turn the power system off once the Engine 3 WARNING
Temperature Too Hot. Do Not Drive. Removing the radiator cap while the
Allow Engine To Cool. message engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
disappears. out, seriously scalding you.
u If the cooling fan is not operating,
immediately turn the power system off. Always let the engine and radiator cool
2. Once the engine has cooled down, inspect down before removing the radiator cap.
MIN
the coolant level and check the cooling
system components for leaks. If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.
Handling the Unexpected

u If the coolant level in the reserve tank is

low, add coolant until it reaches the Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only.
MAX mark. Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze
as soon as possible.
u If there is no coolant in the reserve tank,
check that the radiator is cool. Cover the
radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open
the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to
the base of the filler neck, and put the
cap back on.

■ Last thing to do
Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, turn the power system on. If the Engine
Temperature Too Hot. Do Not Drive. Allow Engine To Cool. message does not
appear, resume driving. If it appears again, contact a dealer for repairs.

568
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 569 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Indicator, Coming On/Blinking

If the Low Oil Pressure Warning Appears
■ Reasons for the warning to appear 1If the Low Oil Pressure Warning Appears
Appears when the engine oil pressure is low. NOTICE
■ What to do as soon as the warning Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause
appears serious mechanical damage almost immediately.
1. Immediately park the vehicle on level
ground in a safe place.
2. If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights
on.
■ What to do after parking the vehicle
1. Turn the power system off and let it sit for
approximately three minutes.

Handling the Unexpected

2. Open the hood and check the oil level.
u Add oil as necessary.
2 Oil Check P. 502
3. Start the engine and check the low oil
pressure warning.
u The warning disappears: Start driving
again.
u The warning does not disappear within
10 seconds: Immediately turn the power
system off and contact a dealer for
repairs.

569
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 570 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the 12-Volt Battery Charging System Indicator Comes On

If the 12-Volt Battery Charging System Indicator

Comes On 1If the 12-Volt Battery Charging System Indicator Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the
Comes on when there is a problem with the charging system. power system. The power system uses the 12-volt
battery to activate. You may not be able to turn the
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
power system on again if you have turned it off with
Stop in a safe place and have your vehicle checked by a dealer this indicator on.
immediately.
Handling the Unexpected

570
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 571 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks

If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or

Blinks 1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
■ Reasons for the indicator lamp to come on or blink NOTICE
• Comes on when there is a problem with the engine emissions control If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on,
system, or the fuel fill cap is missing, or loose. the emissions control system and the engine could be
damaged.
• Blinks when engine misfiring is detected.
■ What to do when the indicator lamp comes on If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when
Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at
dealer. 31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle
■ What to do when the indicator lamp blinks inspected.
Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least
10 minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools.

Handling the Unexpected

■ Tighten Fuel Cap Message
■ The message appears on when:
An evaporative system leak is detected. This may be caused by the fuel fill cap being
loose or not being installed.
■ What to do when the message appears:
1. Turn the power system off.
2. Check if the fuel fill cap is fully installed.
u If not, loosen the cap, and then retighten it until it clicks at least once.
3. Drive for several days of normal driving.
u The message should go off.
■ When the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
Malfunction indicator lamp comes on if the system continues to detect a leak of
gasoline vapor. If this happens, check the fuel fill cap using the procedures described
above.

571
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 572 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or

Blinks 1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on Have your vehicle repaired immediately.
• The brake fluid is low. It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there
is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop
• There is a malfunction in the brake system.
immediately in a safe place. If necessary, downshift
■ What to do when the indicator comes on while driving the gears.
Depress the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure.
• If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop. If the brake system indicator (red) and ABS indicator
• If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the come on simultaneously, the electronic brake
transmission to slow the vehicle using regenerative braking. distribution system is not working. This can result in
■ Reason for the indicator to blink vehicle instability under sudden braking.
Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately.
• There is a problem with the electric parking brake system.
Handling the Unexpected

■ What to do when the indicator blinks If the brake system indicator (red) blinks at the same
Avoid using the parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes
immediately. on, the parking brake may not work.
Avoid using the parking brake and have your vehicle
checked by a dealer immediately.
2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes
On or Blinks at the Same Time When the
Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On
P. 573

572
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 573 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or

Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System 1 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same
Indicator (Amber) Comes On Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On
If you apply the parking brake, you may not be able
■ If the brake system indicator (red) comes on or blinks at the to release it.
same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on,
release the parking brake manually or automatically. If the brake system indicator (red) and the brake
2 Parking Brake P. 468 system indicator (amber) come on at the same time,
the parking brake is working.
• If the brake system indicator (red) continuously comes on or blinks at
If the brake system indicator (red) blinks at the same
the same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on,
time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes
stop the vehicle in a safe place and have it inspected by a dealer on, the parking brake may not work because it is

Handling the Unexpected

immediately. checking the system.
u Preventing the vehicle from moving
Put the transmission into (P . If you repeatedly operate the electric parking brake in
• If only the brake system indicator (red) is turned off, avoid using the a short period of time, the brake stops operating to
prevent heating of the system and the indicator
parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
blinks.
It returns to its original state in approximately 1
minute.

573
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 574 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On

If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator

Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
Comes on when there is a problem with the EPS system.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
• Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn on the power system again.
If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.
Handling the Unexpected

574
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 575 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks

If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or

Blinks 1If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on or blink NOTICE
A tire pressure is significantly low, or the TPMS has not been calibrated. Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause
If there is a problem with the TPMS, the indicator blinks for about one it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always
inflate your tires to the prescribed level.
minute, and then stays on.
If the compact spare tire * is installed, the indicator will either come on or
it will first blink for about one minute, then stay on.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Drive carefully and avoid abrupt cornering and hard braking.
Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the
pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on

Handling the Unexpected

the driver side doorjamb.
u Calibrate the TPMS after the tire pressure is adjusted.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 406
If the compact spare tire * causes the indicator to come on, change the
tire to a full-size tire. The indicator goes off after calibrating the TPMS.
■ What to do when the indicator blinks, then remains on
Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact
spare tire * causes the indicator to first blink, and then stay on, change
the tire to a full-size tire. The indicator goes off after calibrating the
TPMS.

* Not available on all models 575

 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 576 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Transmission System Indicator Blinks along with the Warning Message

If the Transmission System Indicator Blinks along

with the Warning Message 1If the Transmission System Indicator Blinks along with the
■ Reasons for the indicator to blink Warning Message
The transmission is malfunctioning. You may not be able to turn on the power system.

Make sure to set the parking brake when parking

■ What to do when the indicator blinks your vehicle.
• Immediately have your vehicle inspected by
a dealer. Call a professional towing service if you need to tow
your vehicle.
2 Emergency Towing P. 583
Handling the Unexpected

576
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 577 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Fuses
Fuse Locations
If any electrical devices are not working, set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF and
check to see if any applicable fuse is blown.

■ Engine Compartment Fuse Box Type A

Located near the washer fluid. Push the tabs to open the box.
Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box cover. Locate the fuse in question by the
fuse number and box cover number.

Handling the Unexpected

Tab

Continued 577
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 578 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuFusesuFuse Locations

■ Circuit protected and fuse rating Circuit Protected Amps Circuit Protected Amps
Circuit Protected Amps − 30 A 21 AS P/SEAT RECLINING * (20 A)
MAIN FUSE 150 A − 30 A 22 AS P/SEAT SLIDE * (20 A)
4
IG MAIN 1 30 A FUSE BOX 2 40 A 23 HORN 10 A
SUB FAN MTR 30 A FUSE BOX 1 60 A 24 WASHER 15 A
1 IG MAIN 2 30 A 5 IGPS 7.5 A 25 SHIFTER 10 A
OP FUSE MAIN 30 A 6 VBU 10 A 26 SMART 10 A
ESB 40 A 7 IG HOLD1 10 A 27 − −
ENG EWP 30 A 8 PCU EWP 10 A 28 P-ACT UNIT 10 A
WIPER MOTOR 30 A 9 IGP 15 A 29 IGB 10 A
Handling the Unexpected

R/M 2 30 A 10 BACK UP 10 A 30 − −
P-ACT 30 A 11 IGPS (LAF) 7.5 A
2 12 EVTC 20 A
R/M 1 30 A
COOLING FAN 30 A 13 HAZARD 10 A
EPS 70 A 14 IG COIL 15 A
BLOWER MOTOR 40 A 15 DBW 15 A
ABS/VSA MOTOR 40 A 16 STOP LIGHTS 10 A
FUSE BOX OPTION * (40 A) 17 − −
3 18 − −
ABS/VSA FSR 40 A
PREMIUM AUDIO * (30 A) 19 AUDIO 15 A
REAR DEFROSTER 40 A 20 FR FOG LIGHT * (15 A)

578 * Not available on all models

22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 579 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuFusesuFuse Locations

■ Circuit protected and fuse rating

■ Engine Compartment Fuse Circuit Protected Amps
Box Type B Circuit Protected Amps 2 BATT SNSR 7.5 A
PTC2 40 A 3 − (7.5 A)
Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box
cover. Locate the fuse in question by the PTC4 40 A 4 − −
fuse number and box cover number. Push − 40 A 5 AUDIO SUB * (7.5 A)
1 6 − −
the tabs to open the box. − 40 A
− 40 A 7 − (15 A)
− 30 A

Handling the Unexpected

Engine Compartment
Fuse Box Type B

Tab

* Not available on all models Continued 579

 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 580 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuFusesuFuse Locations

■ Circuit protected and fuse rating

■ Interior Fuse Box Type A
Located on 12-volt battery in the center Circuit Protected Amps
console. 1 BATTERY FUSE 175 A
Handling the Unexpected

12-Volt Battery

Replacement of this fuse should be done by

a dealer.

580
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 581 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuFusesuFuse Locations

■ Circuit protected and fuse rating

■ Interior Fuse Box Type B Circuit Protected Amps
Located under the dashboard. Circuit Protected Amps 20 ESB 5A
1 ACC 10 A 21 ACG 10 A
Fuse locations are shown on the label on
the side panel. 2 − − 22 DRL 7.5 A
Locate the fuse in question by the fuse 3 BATT ECU 10 A 23 − −
number and label number. 4 SHIFTER 5A 24 − −
5 OPTION 10 A 25 DR DOOR LOCK (10 A)
6 P-ACT 5A 26 R SIDE DOOR UNLOCK 10 A
7 METER 10 A 27 RR R P/W 20 A
8 FUEL PUMP 15 A 28 DR P/W 20 A

Handling the Unexpected

9 AIRCON 10 A 29 FR ACC SOCKET 20 A
10 − − 30 OPTION 10 A
11 IG1 MON 5A 31 DR P/SEAT REC * 20 A
12 R SIDE DOOR LOCK 10 A 32 FR SEAT HEATER * 20 A
Fuse Label
13 L SIDE DOOR UNLOCK 10 A 33 DR P/SEAT SLI * 20 A
14 RR L P/W 20 A 34 ABS/VSA 10 A
15 AS P/W 20 A 35 SRS 10 A
16 DOOR LOCK 20 A 36 HAC OP 20 A
17 VBSOL 7.5 A 37 BATT FAN 15 A
18 − − 38 L SIDE DOOR LOCK 10 A
19 SUNROOF * (20 A) 39 DR DOOR UNLOCK 10 A

* Not available on all models 581

 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 582 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuFusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses

Inspecting and Changing Fuses

1. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF. Turn 1Inspecting and Changing Fuses
Blown Fuse headlights and all accessories off. NOTICE
2. Remove the fuse box cover. Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating
3. Check the large fuse in the engine greatly increases the chances of damaging the
compartment. electrical system.
u If the fuse is blown, use a Phillips-head
screwdriver to remove the screw and Use the charts to locate the fuse in question and
Combined confirm the specified amperage on the fuse label.
Fuse replace it with a new one.
2 Fuse Locations P. 577
Replace fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified
4. Inspect the small fuses in the engine amperage.
compartment and the vehicle interior.
Handling the Unexpected

Fuse Puller u If there is a blown fuse, remove it with There is a fuse puller on the back of the cover of the
the fuse puller and replace it with a new engine compartment fuse box type A.
one.
5. Check the large fuse in the vehicle interior.
u If the fuse is blown, use a phillips-head
screwdriver to remove the screw and
replace it with a new one.
6. Inspect the small fuses in the vehicle
interior.
u If there is a burned out fuse, remove it
with the fuse puller and replace it with a
new one.

582
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 583 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Emergency Towing

Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle. 1Emergency Towing
NOTICE
■ Flat bed equipment Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will
The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck. cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed
This is the best way to transport your vehicle. to support the vehicle’s weight.

■ Wheel lift equipment Make sure the parking brake is released. If you
cannot release the parking brake, your vehicle must
The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off
be transported by the flat bed equipment.
the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to 2 Parking Brake P. 468
tow your vehicle.
NOTICE

Handling the Unexpected

Improper towing such as towing behind a
motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the
transmission.

Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain.

It is very dangerous since ropes or chains may shift
from side to side or break.

583
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 584 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

If You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door

■ What to Do If Unable to Unlock the Fuel Fill Door 1If You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door
After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the
If you cannot open the fuel fill door, use the following procedure. vehicle checked.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Pull the release lever to the right. 3 WARNING
u The release lever unlocks the fuel fill door
when it is pulled. Gasoline vapors in tank are under pressure.
3. Open the fuel fill door. • If using the manual fuel door release,
2 How to Refuel P. 486 open the cap slowly to gradually release
4. Add fuel very slowly. pressure.
u The automatic fuel tank vent valve does • Stop the engine, and keep all sparks,
Release lever heat, and flame away.
Handling the Unexpected

not operate when the fuel fill door is

opened manually. Trying to add fuel too
rapidly when the vent valve is closed will The automatic fuel tank vent does not operate when
cause fuel vapors to be pushed out the using the manual fuel door release. Gradually release
pressure by slowly turning the fuel fill cap to the left.
filler pipe and can cause a small amount
If you hear a release of air, wait until it stops, then
of liquid fuel to be spilled onto the continue to slowly remove the fuel fill cap.
ground.

584
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 585 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

If You Cannot Open the Trunk

■ What to Do If Unable to Open the Trunk 1If You Cannot Open the Trunk
Following up:
If you cannot open the trunk, use the following procedure. After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the
1. Remove the built-in key from the keyless vehicle checked.
remote.
2. Wrap a cloth around the tip of the built-in
key. Put it into the cover (as shown in the
Cover image) and remove the cover.

Handling the Unexpected

3. Pull the trunk release lever toward you.
u The trunk unlocks and opens.

Trunk Release lever

585
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 586 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

586
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 587 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Information
This chapter includes your vehicle's specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other
information required by regulation.

Specifications .................................... 588 Emissions Testing

Identification Numbers Testing of Readiness Codes.............. 593
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Warranty Coverages ........................ 594
Engine Number, Motor Number, and Authorized Manuals......................... 597
Transmission Number..................... 590 Customer Service Information......... 598
Devices that Emit Radio Waves ....... 591
Reporting Safety Defects ................. 592

587
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 588 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Specifications

■ Vehicle Specifications ■ Engine Specifications ■ Light Bulbs

Model INSIGHT Displacement 91.38 cu-in (1,498 cm3) Headlights (Low Beam) LED
No. of Passengers: Spark Plugs NGK DILZKAR7C11H Headlights (High Beam) LED
Front 2 Fog Lights * LED
Rear 3 Parking/Daytime Running Lights LED
■ Fuel
Total 5 Front Turn Signal Lights LED
Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number
Weights: Type Front Side Marker Lights LED
of 87 or higher
Gross Vehicle Weight See the certification label on the driver’s Side Turn Signal Lights
Fuel Tank Capacity 10.6 US gal (40 L) LED
Rating doorjamb (on Door Mirrors) *
Gross Axle Weight See the certification label on the driver’s Brake Lights LED
Rating (Front) doorjamb ■ Washer Fluid Rear Turn Signal Lights 21 W (Amber)
Gross Axle Weight See the certification label on the driver’s Tank Capacity 2.6 US qt (2.5 L) Taillights/Rear Side Marker Lights LED
Rating (Rear) doorjamb Taillights LED
Back-Up Lights 16 W
■ Air Conditioning High-Mount Brake Light LED
Rear License Plate Light LED
Refrigerant Type HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf)
Interior Lights
Charge Quantity 13.9 – 15.7 oz (395 – 445 g)
Map Lights 8W
Lubricant Type ND-OIL11 (POE)
Ceiling Light 8W
Quantity 7.3 – 8.2 cu-in (120 – 135 cm3)
Ambient Lights LED
Vanity Mirror Lights 2.3 W
Trunk Light 5W
Information

588 * Not available on all models

22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 589 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuSpecificationsu

■ Brake Fluid ■ Engine Oil ■ Tire

Specified Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 ·Honda Genuine Motor Oil 0W-20 215/55R16 93V*1
Recommended Size
·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil 215/50R17 91H*2
Change 3.3 US qt (3.1 L) Regular Front 35 (240 [2.4])
■ Transmission Fluid Pressure
Change 33 (230 [2.3])*1
Specified Honda ATF DW-1 Capacity psi (kPa [kgf/cm2]) Rear
including 3.5 US qt (3.3 L) 32 (220 [2.2])*2
Capacity Change 2.3 US qt (2.2 L) filter Size T125/80D16 97M
Compact
Pressure
Spare*3 60 (420 [4.2])
psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])
■ Engine Coolant
16 x 7J*1
Specified Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 Regular
Wheel Size 17 x 7J*2
Ratio 50/50 with distilled water Compact Spare*3 16 x 4T
1.22 US gal (4.61 L)
*1: Models with 16 inch wheel
Capacity (change including the remaining *2: Models with 17 inch wheel
0.14 US gal (0.52 L) in the reserve tank) *3: Vehicles with optional spare tire

■ Inverter Coolant
Specified Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2

Information
589
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 590 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number,
Motor Number, and Transmission Number 1Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, Motor
Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your Number, and Transmission Number
vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle. The interior vehicle identification number (VIN) is
The locations of your vehicle’s VIN, engine number, motor number, and located under the cover.
transmission number are shown as follows.

Vehicle Identification Number

Engine Number
Cover

Motor Number

Transmission Number

Certification Label/Vehicle Identification Number

Information

590
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 591 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Devices that Emit Radio Waves

Each radio frequency device installed in the vehicle conforms to the requirements
and standards of the regulation listed below:

As required by the FCC:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.

Information
591
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 592 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Reporting Safety Defects

In the U.S.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists
in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-
9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
Information

592
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 593 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
Your vehicle has readiness code as part of the onboard self diagnostic system. 1Testing of Readiness Codes
Some states use these codes for testing to verify whether your vehicle’s emissions The readiness codes are erased when the 12-volt
components are working properly. battery is disconnected, and set again only after
The codes may not be read properly if testing is performed just after the 12-volt several days of driving under a variety of conditions.
battery has gone dead or been disconnected.
If a testing facility determines that the readiness
codes are not set, you may be requested to return at
To check if they are set, set the power mode to ON, without starting the engine. The a later date to complete the test.
malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it then goes off, the
readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are not set. If the testing facility determines the readiness codes
are still not set, see a dealer.
If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready,
prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following:

1. Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full.

2. Park the vehicle and leave the power system off for six hours or more.
3. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40°F and 95°F (4°C and 35°C).
4. Turn the power system on.
5. Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed

Information
of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in
(D . Do not use cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without
moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you
cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for
at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds).
6. Drive in city/suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions
allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal
or the brake pedal.
7. Park the vehicle and leave the power system off for six hours.

593
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 594 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Warranty Coverages

■ U.S. Owners
Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:

New Vehicle Limited Warranty – covers your new vehicle, except for the
emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and
workmanship.

Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance

Warranty – these two warranties cover your vehicle’s emissions control systems.
Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for
exact information.

Seat Belt Limited Warranty – a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered
by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty – all exterior body panels are covered against
rusting from the inside out for the specified time period, regardless of mileage.
Information

Accessory Limited Warranty – Honda accessories are covered under this

warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other
factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details.

Replacement Parts Limited Warranty – covers all Honda replacement parts

against defects in materials and workmanship.

594
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 595 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuWarranty Coveragesu

Replacement 12-Volt Battery Limited Warranty – provides prorated coverage

for a replacement battery purchased from your dealer.

Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty – provides coverage for as

long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.

Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the Honda
warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on
warranty coverages. Your vehicle’s original tires are covered by their manufacturer.
Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.

■ Statement on Warranty Coverage for Aftermarket and Recycled Parts

The Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. s.2301 et seq., makes it illegal for
motor vehicle manufacturers to void a motor vehicle warranty or deny warranty
coverage solely because an aftermarket or recycled part has been used to repair the
vehicle or someone other than the authorized service provider performed service on
the vehicle. This provision does not apply to a new motor vehicle purchased solely
for commercial or industrial use.

Information
Continued 595
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 596 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

uuWarranty Coveragesu

Under federal law, a manufacturer may deny warranty coverage and charge for
repairs to a vehicle if it is discovered that an aftermarket or recycled part installed on
the vehicle is defective or was installed incorrectly and caused damage to another
part of the vehicle otherwise covered under warranty. The Federal Trade
Commission requires that a manufacturer demonstrate that an aftermarket or
recycled part or service performed by a person other than an authorized service
provider caused damage to another part of the vehicle otherwise covered under
warranty before denying warranty coverage. Additionally, federal law allows a
manufacturer to void a motor vehicle warranty or deny warranty coverage if the
manufacturer provides the article or service to consumers free of charge under the
warranty or the manufacturer has secured a waiver from the Federal Trade
Commission.

■ EPA Contact Information

An owner may obtain further information concerning emission warranties or report
violations of the terms of the emission warranties by contacting:

Director,
Information

Light-Duty Vehicle Center,

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
Attention: Warranty Claim
2000 Traverwood Drive,
Ann Arbor, MI 48105;
complianceinfo@epa.gov

596
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 597 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Authorized Manuals

■ Service Express
For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to
Service Express. Visit www.techinfo.honda.com for pricing and options.

■ For U.S. Owners

Manuals can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order a manual by
phone at 1(800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at www.helminc.com.

Information
597
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 598 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Customer Service Information

Honda dealership personnel are trained professionals who should be able to deal 1Customer Service Information
with any problems you may encounter with your vehicle. If, however, you are faced When you call or write, please give us the following
with a problem that they cannot resolve to your satisfaction, contact Honda information:
Customer Services. • Vehicle Identification Number
2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),
Engine Number, Motor Number, and
Transmission Number P. 590
U.S. Owners
• Date of purchase
American Honda Motor Co., Inc. • Odometer reading of your vehicle
Honda Automobile Customer Services • Your name, address, and telephone number
Mail Stop CHI-5 • A detailed description of the problem
1919 Torrance Blvd. • Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you
Torrance, CA 90501-2746
Tel: 1 (800) 999-1009

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin

Islands
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Information

Tel: 1 (787) 620-7546

598
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 599 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Index
Index
Numbers Air Conditioning System (Climate Control Audio/Information Screen........................ 231
System) .................................................... 216 Display Setup .......................................... 253
12-Volt Battery................................... 12, 528
Changing the Mode ................................ 218 Error Messages........................................ 302
Charging System Indicator ................ 89, 570
Defrosting the Windshield and General Information ................................ 304
High Voltage..................................... 12, 414
Windows ............................................... 219 Home Screen........................................... 239
If the 12-Volt Battery Is Dead .................. 564
Dust and Pollen Filter ............................... 531 How to Update Wirelessly ....................... 246
Maintenance (Checking the Battery) ....... 528
Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode ................... 218 How to Update with a USB Device........... 250
Maintenance (Replacing)......................... 530
Sensors.................................................... 222 How to use Siri Eyes Free......................... 293
Synchronized Mode ................................. 221 iPod ........................................................ 273
A Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 216 Limitations for Manual Operation ............ 254
Air Pressure ....................................... 520, 589 MP3/WMA/AAC...................................... 276
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System).................. 476
Airbags ........................................................ 51 Reactivating ............................................ 226
Accessories and Modifications ................ 537
Advanced Airbags ..................................... 57 Remote Controls ..................................... 227
Accessory Power Socket........................... 213
After a Collision......................................... 54 Security Code.......................................... 226
Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System............ 402
Airbag Care ............................................... 65 Selecting an Audio Source....................... 254
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)............ 98, 99
Event Data Recorder .................................... 1 Status Area ............................................. 244
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Front Airbags (SRS) .................................... 54 System Updates....................................... 246
with Low Speed Follow ............. 98, 99, 428
Indicator .............................................. 62, 92 Theft Protection ...................................... 226
Additives
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator .................. 63 USB Flash Drives .............................. 276, 305
Coolant .................................................. 506
Sensors...................................................... 51 USB Ports ................................................ 225
Engine Oil ............................................... 501
Side Airbags .............................................. 59 Wallpaper Setup...................................... 237
Washer ................................................... 511
Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 61 Audio/Information Screen ....................... 231
Additives, Engine Oil ............................... 501
AM/FM Radio ............................................ 258 Authorized Manuals ................................ 597
Adjusting
Android AutoTM ........................................ 298 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking................. 170
Armrest .................................................. 206
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 476 Customize............................................... 343
Front Seats.............................................. 199
Indicator .................................................... 92 Auto High-Beam....................................... 189

Index
Head Restraints....................................... 204
Apple CarPlayTM ........................................ 294 Indicator.................................................... 95
Mirrors.................................................... 197
Armrest ..................................................... 206 Automatic Brake Hold ............................. 473
Rear Seats............................................... 202
Audio Remote Controls............................ 227 Indicator............................................ 85, 473
Steering Wheel ....................................... 196
Audio System ............................................ 224 Automatic Brake Hold System
Agile Handling Assist............................... 405
Adjusting the Sound ................................ 252 Indicator............................................ 85, 473

599
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 600 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Automatic Intermittent Wipers ............... 193 Rear License Plate Light ........................... 515 Climate Control System ........................... 216
Automatic Lighting .................................. 186 Rear Turn Signal Lights ............................ 513 Changing the Mode................................ 216
Average Fuel Economy............................. 137 Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Defrosting the Windshield and
Average Fuel Economy Records............... 150 Lights .................................................... 512 Windows .............................................. 219
Average Speed.......................................... 139 Taillights.................................................. 514 Dust and Pollen Filter .............................. 531
Bulb Specifications ................................... 588 Recirculation and Fresh Air Mode ............ 218
Sensors ................................................... 222
B Synchronized Mode ................................ 221
Belts (Seat) .................................................. 44 C Using Automatic Climate Control............ 216
Beverage Holders...................................... 211 Carbon Monoxide Gas ............................... 79 Clock ......................................................... 156
Blind spot information System ................ 411 Carrying Cargo ................................. 377, 379 CMBSTM (Collision Mitigation Braking
Bluetooth® Audio ..................................... 279 Certification Label.................................... 590 SystemTM) ................................................ 418
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® ................... 349 Changing Bulbs ........................................ 512 Coat Hooks ............................................... 214
Booster Seats (For Children)....................... 78 Charging System Indicator................. 89, 570 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM
Brake System............................................. 468 Child Safety................................................. 66 (CMBSTM) ................................................. 418
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ................... 476 Childproof Door Locks............................. 169 Compact Spare Tire.......................... 541, 589
Automatic Brake Hold.............................. 473 Emergency Trunk Opener ........................ 173 Console Compartment............................. 210
Brake Assist System ................................. 477 Child Seat.................................................... 66 Controls .................................................... 155
Fluid ........................................................ 510 Booster Seats ............................................ 78 Coolant (Engine) ...................................... 506
Foot Brake ............................................... 472 Child Seat for Infants................................. 68 Adding to the Radiator ........................... 507
Indicator .............................. 83, 84, 572, 573 Child Seat for Small Children..................... 69 Adding to the Reserve Tank .................... 506
Parking Brake .......................................... 468 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Overheating............................................ 567
Brightness Control (Instrument Panel) .... 195 Seat Belt.................................................. 73 Cooling System......................................... 506
Bulb Replacement..................................... 512 Larger Children ......................................... 77 Adding to the Radiator ........................... 507
Back-Up Lights......................................... 514 Rear-facing Child Seat ............................... 68 Adding to the Reserve Tank .................... 506
Brake and Rear Side Marker Lights........... 513 Selecting a Child Seat................................ 70 Overheating............................................ 567
Index

Fog Lights................................................ 512 Using a Tether........................................... 75 Creeping ................................................... 390

Front Turn Signal, Parking/Daytime Childproof Door Locks ............................. 169 Cross Traffic Monitor ............................... 480
Running and Front Side Marker Lights.... 512 Cleaning the Exterior ............................... 534 Cup Holders .............................................. 211
Headlights ............................................... 512 Cleaning the Interior................................ 532 Customer Service Information ................ 598
High-Mount Brake Light .......................... 515 Customized Features ............................... 326

600
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 601 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

D Shifting Gear ........................................... 391 Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 501

Transmission............................................ 390 EPS (Electric Power Steering) System ...... 574
Daytime Running Lights .......................... 188
Turning on the Power .............................. 382 EV Button.................................................... 14
Dead Battery ............................................ 564
Driving Support Information ................... 148 Exhaust Gas Hazard (Carbon Monoxide) .. 79
Deceleration Paddle Selector .................. 398
Dust and Pollen Filter ............................... 531 Exterior Care (Cleaning)........................... 534
Defaulting All the Settings...................... 345
Exterior Mirrors ........................................ 198
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows................................................. 219 E
Devices that Emit Radio Waves............... 591
Eco Assist® System ...................................... 18 F
Dimming Eco Drive Display/Drive Cycle Score/ Features .................................................... 223
Headlights .............................................. 185
Lifetime Points ........................................ 151 Filters
Rearview Mirror ...................................... 197
ECON Mode .............................................. 401 Dust and Pollen ....................................... 531
Dipstick (Engine Oil) ................................ 502 Indicator .................................................... 97 Oil........................................................... 504
Directional Signals (Turn Signal)............. 184
Elapsed Time ............................................. 139 Flat Tire ..................................................... 541
Door Mirrors............................................. 198
Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Floor Mats................................................. 533
Doors ........................................................ 157 Indicator ............................................ 92, 574 Fluids
Auto Door Locking.................................. 170
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ............. 403 Brake ...................................................... 510
Auto Door Unlocking .............................. 170
Emergency ................................................ 583 Engine Coolant ....................................... 506
Door and Trunk Open Message................. 43
Emergency Power System Off.................. 563 Inverter Coolant ...................................... 508
Keys........................................................ 157
Emergency Trunk Opener ........................ 173 Windshield Washer ................................. 511
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes) ....... 593 FM/AM Radio............................................ 258
Inside .................................................... 167
Engine ....................................................... 590 Fog Lights ................................................. 188
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Coolant ................................................... 506 Indicator.................................................... 95
Outside ................................................. 160 If the 12-Volt Battery Is Dead ................... 564 Folding Down the Rear Seats .................. 202
Lockout Prevention System ..................... 166
Oil ........................................................... 501 Foot Brake ................................................ 472
DOT Tire Quality Grading........................ 522
Starting ................................................... 382 Front Airbags (SRS)..................................... 54

Index
Driver Attention Monitor........................ 145 Engine Oil ................................................. 501 Front Seat Heaters.................................... 215
Driver Information Interface................... 132
Adding .................................................... 503 Front Seats
Switching the Display.............................. 132
Checking ................................................. 502 Adjusting ................................................ 199
Warning and Information Messages........ 104 Displaying Oil Life .................................... 494 Front Sensor Camera................................ 465
Driving ...................................................... 375
Low Oil Pressure Warning ........................ 569
Braking ................................................... 468

601
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 602 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Fuel ...................................................... 31, 485 H High Beam Indicator.................................. 95

Economy ................................................. 488 High Voltage Battery ............................... 414
Handling the Unexpected........................ 539
Gauge ..................................................... 129 High Voltage Battery Charge Level
HandsFreeLink® (HFL)............................... 349
Instant Fuel Economy............................... 137 Gauge ..................................................... 130
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 91 Hill Start Assist System ............................. 387
and Call History ..................................... 358
Range...................................................... 137 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver ........... 346
Automatic Transferring............................ 357
Recommendation .................................... 485 Honda App License Agreement .............. 306
Displaying Messages................................ 368
Refueling ................................................. 485 Honda Sensing® ................................ 32, 415
Favorite Contacts .................................... 359
Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions ............ 488 HondaLink® ............................................ 281
HFL Buttons............................................. 349
Fuel Fill Cap......................................... 31, 486 Hybrid Vehicle
HFL Menus .............................................. 352
Fuel Fill Door....................................... 31, 486 SPORT HYBRID i-MMD (intelligent
HFL Status Display ................................... 351
Unable to Unlock..................................... 584 Multi-Mode Drive) ................................... 11
In Case of Emergency...................... 285, 372
Fuses .......................................................... 577
Limitations for Manual Operation ............ 351
Inspecting and Changing ......................... 582
Locations ......................................... 577, 581
Making a Call.......................................... 361 I
Options During a Call .............................. 364 Identification Numbers
Phone Setup............................................ 354
Engine and Transmission......................... 590
G Receiving a Call ....................................... 364
Vehicle Identification............................... 590
Receiving a Text Message ........................ 366
Gasoline (Fuel) Illumination Control
Ringtone ................................................. 357
Economy ................................................. 488 Dial ......................................................... 195
Gauge ..................................................... 129 Selecting a Phone.................................... 367 Immobilizer System.................................. 174
To Set Up a Text Message Options .......... 365
Information ............................................. 485 Indicator ................................................... 96
Hazard Warning Button .............................. 6
Instant Fuel Economy............................... 137 Indicators.................................................... 82
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 91 HD RadioTM................................................ 261 12-Volt Battery Charging System ...... 89, 570
Head Restraints ........................................ 204
Refueling ................................................. 485 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low
Headlights................................................. 185
Gauges....................................................... 129 Speed Follow (Amber) ............................. 98
Index

Glass (care) ........................................ 532, 535 Auto High-Beam System.......................... 189 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with
Automatic Operation............................... 186
Glove Box .................................................. 209 Low Speed Follow (Green)............... 99, 429
Dimming ......................................... 185, 188
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 92
Operating................................................ 185 Auto High-Beam ....................................... 95
Heaters (Seat) ........................................... 215
Automatic Brake Hold....................... 85, 473
HFL (HandsFreeLink®)............................... 349

602
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 603 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Automatic Brake Hold System ........... 85, 473 Supplemental Restraint System ............ 62, 92 Rear Door Won’t Open............................ 169
Blind spot information System................. 412 System Message ........................................ 97 Remote Transmitter................................. 164
Deceleration Paddle Selector ..................... 89 Transmission System .................................. 90 Types and Functions ................................ 157
ECON Mode ..................................... 97, 401 Turn Signal and Hazard Warning ............... 95
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF... 93, 404
System ............................................ 92, 574 Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®)
L
EV............................................................. 87 System............................................. 93, 403 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)......... 446
EV Mode................................................... 87 Information............................................... 587 Language (HFL) ........................................ 351
Fog Light .................................................. 95 Instant Fuel Economy ............................... 137 LATCH (Child Seats).................................... 71
High Beam................................................ 95 Instrument Panel ........................................ 81 Lights................................................. 185, 512
Immobilizer System ................................... 96 Brightness Control ................................... 195 Automatic ............................................... 186
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Interior Lights ........................................... 207 Bulb Replacement ................................... 512
(Amber) .................................................. 99 Interior Rearview Mirror .......................... 197 Daytime Running Lights........................... 188
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Inverter Coolant ....................................... 508 Fog Lights ............................................... 188
(Green) ........................................... 99, 448 iPad............................................................ 305 High Beam Indicator.................................. 95
Lights On .................................................. 95 iPhone ....................................................... 305 Interior .................................................... 207
Low Fuel ................................................... 91 iPod ................................................... 273, 305 Light Switches ......................................... 185
Low Tire Pressure/TPMS ............ 94, 406, 409 Lights On Indicator .................................... 95
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............. 88, 571 Turn Signals ............................................ 184
Parking Brake and Brake System
J Load Limits................................................ 379
(Amber) .......................................... 84, 573 Jack (Wheel Nut Wrench) ........................ 544 Locking/Unlocking.................................... 157
Parking Brake and Brake System Jump Starting ........................................... 564 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking.................. 170
(Red) ....................................... 83, 572, 573 Childproof Door Locks............................. 169
POWER SYSTEM ....................................... 86 From Inside ............................................. 167
READY...................................................... 87
K From Outside .......................................... 160
Safety Support (Amber)........................... 100 Key Number Tag ....................................... 158 Keys ........................................................ 157

Index
Safety Support (Green/Gray) ................... 103 Keyless Access System............................... 160 Using a Key ............................................. 165
Seat Belt Reminder.............................. 45, 91 Keyless Lockout Prevention ..................... 166 Lockout Prevention System ..................... 166
Security System Alarm............................... 96 Keys ........................................................... 157 Low Battery Charge ................................. 570
Shift Position............................................. 89 Lockout Prevention .................................. 166 Low Fuel Indicator...................................... 91
SPORT Mode..................................... 97, 397 Number Tag ............................................ 158 Low Keyless Remote Signal Strength...... 159

603
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 604 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Low Oil Pressure Warning........................ 569 Interior Rearview ..................................... 197 Outside Temperature Display ................. 135
Lower Anchors ............................................ 71 Modifications (and Accessories) .............. 537 Overheating ............................................. 567
Luggage (Maximum Load Limit).............. 379 Moonroof ................................................. 180
MP3 ........................................................... 276
MP3/WMA/AAC ........................................ 276
P
M Multi-View Rear Camera.......................... 483 Panic Mode............................................... 176
Maintenance ..................................... 141, 489 Parking ..................................................... 478
12-Volt Battery ........................................ 528 Parking Brake........................................... 468
Brake Fluid............................................... 510 N Parking Brake and Brake System
Cleaning.................................................. 532 Navigation ................................................ 140 Indicator (Amber)............................. 84, 573
Climate Control System ........................... 531 Numbers (Identification).......................... 590 Parking Brake and Brake System
Coolant ................................................... 506 Indicator (Red).......................... 83, 572, 573
Maintenance MinderTM ............................ 493 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator................. 63
Oil ........................................................... 502
O Passing Indicators..................................... 185
Precautions.............................................. 490 Odometer ................................................. 134 Phone........................................................ 142
Radiator................................................... 507 Oil (Engine)............................................... 501 Playing Bluetooth® Audio ....................... 279
Remote Transmitter ................................. 530 Adding.................................................... 503 POWER Button ......................................... 181
Replacing Light Bulbs............................... 512 Checking................................................. 502 Power Flow Monitor ................................ 153
Safety ...................................................... 491 Displaying Oil Life.................................... 494 Power Windows ....................................... 177
Service Items............................................ 497 Low Oil Pressure Warning........................ 569 POWER/CHARGE Gauge .......................... 131
Tires ........................................................ 519 Oil Life .................................................... 141 Precautions While Driving ....................... 388
Transmission Fluid.................................... 509 Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 501 Rain ........................................................ 388
Under the Hood....................................... 499 Viscosity .................................................. 501 Pregnant Women....................................... 49
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............. 88, 571 Open Source Licenses............................... 320 Puncture (Tire) ......................................... 541
Map Lights ................................................ 208 Opening
Maximum Load Limit................................ 379 Trunk ...................................................... 585
Index

Meters, Gauges ......................................... 129 Opening/Closing R

Mirrors....................................................... 197 Hood....................................................... 500 Radar Sensor ............................................ 467
Adjusting................................................. 197 Moonroof ............................................... 180 Radiator .................................................... 507
Door........................................................ 198 Power Windows ...................................... 177 Radio (AM/FM) ......................................... 258
Exterior.................................................... 198 Trunk ...................................................... 171 Radio (SiriusXM®) ..................................... 262

604
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 605 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Radio Data System (RDS) ......................... 260 Safety Labels ............................................... 80 SiriusXM® Radio........................................ 262
Range........................................................ 137 Safety Message ............................................. 3 Snow Tires................................................. 527
RDS (Radio Data System) ......................... 260 Safety Support .......................................... 149 Spare Tire.......................................... 541, 589
Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing) ...... 593 Seat Belts..................................................... 44 Spark Plugs ............................................... 588
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor .................. 48 Specifications............................................ 588
Button..................................................... 194 Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners.................. 46 Specified Fuel ................................... 485, 588
Rear Seat (Folding Down) ....................... 202 Checking ................................................... 50 Speedometer ............................................ 129
Rearview Mirror ....................................... 197 Fastening................................................... 47 SPORT Mode ............................................. 397
Refueling .................................................. 485 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Indicator.................................................... 97
Fuel Gauge ............................................. 129 Seat Belt .................................................. 73 SRS Airbags (Airbags)................................. 54
Gasoline ......................................... 485, 588 Pregnant Women ...................................... 49 Steering Wheel
Low Fuel Indicator..................................... 91 Reminder................................................... 45 Adjusting ................................................ 196
Regulations .............................. 409, 522, 591 Warning Indicator................................ 45, 91 Stopping ................................................... 478
Remote Engine Start with Vehicle Seat Heaters.............................................. 215 Summer Tires ............................................ 527
Feedback................................................. 384 Seats .......................................................... 199 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)........ 54
Remote Transmitter................................. 164 Adjusting................................................. 199 Switches (Around the Steering
Replacement Front Seats .............................................. 199 Wheel)............................................. 6, 7, 181
Battery.................................................... 530 Rear Seats ............................................... 202 System Message Indicator.......................... 97
Bulbs ...................................................... 512 Seat Heaters ............................................ 215 System Updates ........................................ 246
Fuses .............................................. 577, 581 Security System ......................................... 174
Tires........................................................ 525 Immobilizer System Indicator ..................... 96
Wiper Blade Rubber ................................ 516 Security System Alarm Indicator ................. 96
T
Reporting Safety Defects......................... 592 Selecting a Child Seat ................................. 70 Temperature
Resetting a Trip Meter..................... 135, 137 Shift Buttons ....................................... 28, 391 Outside Temperature Display................... 135
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) ......... 454 Operation ................................................ 393 Temperature Sensor......................... 135, 222
On and Off ............................................. 456 Shift Position Indicator............................... 89 Temporary Tire Repair Kit ....................... 548

Index
Shifting (Transmission) ............................. 391 Time (Adjusting)....................................... 156
Shoulder Anchor......................................... 48 Tire Pressure Monitoring System
S Side Airbags ................................................ 59 (TPMS) ..................................................... 406
Safe Driving................................................ 39 Side Curtain Airbags................................... 61 Indicator............................................ 94, 575
Safety Check............................................... 43 Siri® Eyes Free ........................................... 293

605
 22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 606 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Tires ........................................................... 519 TRIP Button............................................... 134 V

Air Pressure ..................................... 520, 589 Trip Computer .................................. 136, 138
Vanity Mirrors .............................................. 9
Checking and Maintaining....................... 519 Trip Meter................................. 135, 137, 139
Vehicle Identification Number ................ 590
Inspection................................................ 519 Troubleshooting....................................... 539
Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) .............. 403
Labeling................................................... 520 Blown Fuse...................................... 577, 581
Off Button .............................................. 404
Puncture (Flat Tire)................................... 541 Brake Pedal Vibrates.................................. 35
Off Indicator ............................................. 93
Regulations.............................................. 522 Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door.......... 35
System Indicator ....................................... 93
Rotation .................................................. 526 Emergency Towing.................................. 583
Viscosity (Oil).................................... 501, 589
Spare Tire ........................................ 541, 589 Noise When Braking............................ 36, 37
Voice Control Operation ......................... 255
Summer................................................... 527 Overheating ............................................ 567
Voice Portal Screen ................................. 256
Temporary Tire Repair Kit......................... 548 Power System Won’t Start....................... 561
Voice Recognition ................................... 255
Tire Chains .............................................. 527 Puncture/Flat Tire .................................... 541
VSA® (Vehicle Stability AssistTM) .............. 403
Wear Indicators ....................................... 524 Rear Door Won’t Open...................... 35, 169
Winter ..................................................... 527 Warning Indicators .................................... 82
Tools .......................................................... 540 Trunk......................................................... 171 W
Towing a Trailer........................................ 381 Lid........................................................... 171
Wallpaper................................................. 237
Towing Your Vehicle ................................ 381 Light Bulb................................................ 588
Warning and Information Messages ...... 104
Emergency............................................... 583 Unable to Open....................................... 585
Warning Indicator On/Blinking ............... 569
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring Turn Signals .............................................. 184
Warning Labels .......................................... 80
System) .................................................... 406 Indicators (Instrument Panel) ..................... 95
Warnings .................................................. 141
Indicator ............................................ 94, 575 Turning on the Power.............................. 382
Warranties (Warranty Manual provided
Traffic Sign Recognition System .............. 459 If the 12-Volt Battery Is Dead................... 564
separately) .............................................. 594
Transmission.............................................. 391
Watts ........................................................ 588
Automatic ............................................... 391
U Wear Indicators (Tire) .............................. 524
Creeping ................................................. 390
Wheel Nut Wrench (Jack Handle) ........... 544
Number ................................................... 590 Unlocking the Doors ................................ 160
Index

Wi-Fi Connection ..................................... 290

Shift Operation ........................................ 393 Unlocking the Front Doors from the
Window Washers ..................................... 192
Shift Position Indicator ............................... 89 Inside ......................................................... 24
Adding/Refilling Fluid .............................. 511
Shifting.................................................... 391 USB Flash Drives ............................... 276, 305
Switch .................................................... 192
Transmission System USB Ports................................................... 225
Windows (Opening and Closing) ............ 177
Indicator .................................................... 90 Using the Keyless Access System ............. 160

606
22 INSIGHT HMIN-31TXM6300.book 607 ページ ２０２１年２月２４日 水曜日 午後３時４５分

Windshield
Cleaning ......................................... 532, 535
Defrosting/Defogging ............................. 219
Washer Fluid........................................... 511
Wiper Blades........................................... 516
Wipers and Washers ............................... 192
Winter Tires
Snow Tires .............................................. 527
Tire Chains.............................................. 527
Wipers and Washers ................................ 192
Automatic Intermittent Wipers................ 193
Checking and Replacing Wiper Blades..... 516
WMA......................................................... 276
Worn Tires ................................................ 519

Index
607
 owners.honda.com

31TXM630
OM-15903 2022 Honda Insight Owner’s Manual
00X31-TXM-6300 © 2021 Honda Motor Co., Ltd. — All Rights Reserved Printed in U.S.A.